The Ancient Egyptian Books of the Earth 9781937040000

Citation preview

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

,

Wilhaur Studies in Egypt and Ancient Western Asia Series Editors James P. Allen John M. Steele

VOLUME

1

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH by JOSHUA AARON ROBERSON

~ LOCKWOOD PRESS ATLANTA, GEORGIA

Wilbour Studies in Egypt and Ancient Western Asia is a series of the Department of Egyptology & Ancient Western Asian Studies at Brown University, Box 1899, Wilbour Hall, Brown University, Providence, RI 02912.

PUBLISHED ON BEHALF OF BROWN UNIVERSITY BY LOCKWOOD PRESS

PO Box 133289 Atlanta, GA 30333 www.lockwoodpress.com © 2012 by Brown University All rights reserved. Published 2012. Printed in the United States of America 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12

1 2 3 4 5

ISBN: 978-1-937-04000-0 (hardcover) Library of Congress Control Number: 2012930584

I§ This paper meets rhe requirements of ANSIINISO Z39.48-1992 (Permanence of Paper).

Die Finsternis vertrieben

durch verzehrende Glut. Durch Gefahr fUhrr unser Weg und Bilder von Bestien.

Oberall reillt die Erde auf Selbst in die Unterwelt dringt durch Spalten Licht, versetzt die Herrscher in Angst und Schrecken. -Einsturzende Neubauten, Sonnenbarke

So dark and deep and nebulous it was, Try as I might to force my sight below, I could not see the shape of anything. "Let us descend into the sightless world," began the poet (his face was deathly pale): "r will go first, and you will follow me." - Dante, Inferno, Canto IV: 13-15

...

-

CONTENTS List of Figures, Tables, and Plates Acknowledgements Abbreviations CHAPTER

1: INTRODUCTION

§l.l §!.2 §1.3

§1.4 §1.5 §1.6 §1.7 CI-W'TER 2:

§2.1 §2.2 §2.3

xi xix xxi

General Remarks Underworld Books The Designation of "The Book of the Earth" Definition of the Corpus Outline of Sources

4 6 9

Contenr and Internal Structure of the Book The Notational System Used in the Present Study

II

12

AACHITEcrURE

Development of the Royal Tomb in the Valley of the Kings Underworld Cosmology and Architecture Considerations on

me Evolu tion of the Ramesside Royal Tomb: Precursors and'

Prototypes §2.4 §2.5

I

3

Internal Orientation in [he Mature Ramesside Royal Tomb Catalogue of Monuments

2.5. 1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.5.5 2.5.6 2.5.7 2.5 .8 2.5 .9 2.5.10 2.5.11 2.5.12

The Cenotaph of Seti I at Abydos Merneptah (KV8) Tawosret (KVI4) Ramesses III (KVll) Ramesses N (KV2) Ramesses VI (KV9) Ramesses VII (KVI) Ramesses IX (KV6) Osorkon II (NRTI) Pedamenopet (IT33) Mutirdis (IT410) Padihorresnet (TT!96)

vii

15 16 19 24 27 28 32 34 35 37 39 42 43 45 47 49 51

viii

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

2.5.13 Padineith (TTI97) 2.5.14 Hotira'a (Saqqara, Lepsius 23) , The Symbolic Significance of the Ramesside Sarcophagus Chamber as akhet and Divine Birth Station Excursus: The Sarcophagi

§2.6 §2.7 CHAPTER

3:

§3.1 §3.2 §3.3

-r

§3.5 §3.6

§3.7

§3.8

CHAPTER

§4.1 §4.2 §4.3

4:

55 59

ORTHOGRAPHY

General Remarks Orthographic Variation among Individual Signs Phonetic Change 3.3.1 Consonantal Shift 3.3.2 Omission of Un pronounced Consonants 3.3.3 Omission/Coalescence of Semivowels Adaptations from the Hieratic 3.4.1 l from "!i 3.4.2 )?/Ii, from ~ 3.4.3 =, from Shape Substitutions Superfluous Signs 3.6.1 Plural Strokes 3.6.2 Superfluous W, j, y, and t 3.6.3 Unusual Verbal Morphology Miscellaneous 3.7.1 Pars pro toto Substitutions 3.7.2 Class Substitutions 3.7.3 Perturbation Cryptography 3.8.1 General Remarks 3.8.2 Sources 3.8.3 Substitution Mechanisms 3.8.4 Complete List of Enigmatic Sign Values

§3.4

52 54

65 66 67 68 71 72 74 75 77 78 79

80 80 82 83 86 86

88 92 93 93 94 94

96

GRAMMAR

General Remarks The Introductory Formula nn (n) nrr. w m sl]r pn Pronouns 4.3.1 The Proclitic Pronoun Construction (sw sgm=j / sn sgm=sn) 4.3.2 The sn r=sn Construction 4.3.3 Demonstrative Pronouns and Adjectives Prepositions Ijt(w) and m-Ijt The Proclitic Particle if Circumstantial sgm=j Noun + sam=! Construction

§4.4 §4.5 §4.6 §4.7 §4.8

sgm.ljr=j

§4.9

Subject + Stative vs. Pseudo-Verbal Construction

101 101 105

!O5 107 111 115 117 119 120 124 126

CONTENTS

CHAPTER

5:

THE V'GNEITES

§5.1 §5.2 §5.3 §5.4

General Remarks Catalogue of Scenes The Merneptah Template The Aker Group

6: §6.1 §6.2 §6.3 §6.4 §6.5 §6.6 §6.7 §6.8 §6.9 §6.IO

THE TEXTS

CHAPTER

§6.11 §6.12 §6.13 §6.14 §6.15 §6.16 §6.17 §6.18 CHAPTER

§7.1 §7.2 §7.3 §7.4

7:

General Remarks The Cenotaph of Seti I at Abydos Merneptah Tawosrer Ramesses III Ramesses IV Ramesses VI Ramesses VII Ramesses IX Twenty-First Dynasty Mythological Papyri 6.10.1 Djedkhonsuiusankh (Louvre 3276) 6.10.2 Khonsumes (Bibliotheque Nationale EG 153-54) Osorkon II Pedamenopet Mutirdis Padineith Horira'a

Sarcophagus of Nakhtnebef (Berlin 7) Sarcophagus ofTjahorpta (CG 29306) Sarcophagi Inscribed on the Model of Ramesses III CWSING REMARKs The Internal Structure of the Books of the Earth Date of Compostion The Original Function of the Books of the Earth, from the Later New Kingdom (Dynasties 19-20) The History and Evolution of the Books of the Earth from rhe Third Intermediate Period and Later

Appendix 1, Tables Appendix 2, Black and White Plates Appendix 3, Text Plates Bibliography Indices

ix

129 133 293 295

301 303 307 308 310 315 316 383 389 404 404 408 416 417 427 432 436 440 442 447

455 457 459 461 463 469 509 541 557

d

LIST OF FIGURES, TABLES, AND PLATES All credited images reproduced with permission ofthe respective copyright holders or taken from the public domain. All uncredited images are the work of the author.

FIGURES

Chapter 2 Figs. 2.1-4 Fig. 2.5 Fig. 2.6 Fig. 2.7 Fig. 2.8

Fig 2.9

Fig. 2.10 Fig. 2.11 Fig. 2.12 Fig. 2.13 Fig. 2.14 Fig. 2.15 Fig. 2.16

Axial evolution in the Valley of the Kings (to mb plans courtesy of the Theban Mapping Project) . Plan and section of the "Amduat Tomb" of Senwosret III at Abydos (after Wegner 2009a, fig. 7). Clockwise rotation of the internal (symbolic) axis of decoration. Plan of the cenotaph of Seti I at Abydos (after Frankfort et at. 1933, 2:plate I). Reproduced by permission of the Egyptian Exploration Society. Plan and section of the monumental "sarcophagus". in the cenotaph of Seti I, local direction indicated (wall with BE marked as 'X'; after Frankfort et al. 1933, 2:plate 3). Reproduced by permission of the Egyptian Exploration Society. Relative locations of Books of N ut and Night in the cenotaph of Seti I , internal (symbolic) alignment indicated (walls with BE marked as 'X'; after Frankfort et at. 1933, 2:plate 3). KV8 sarcophagus chamber and adjoining rooms, minor axis indicated (wall with BE marked as 'X '; tomb plan courtesy of the Theban Mapping Project). KVI4 sarcophagus chamber, minor axis indicated (walls with BE marked as 'X '; tomb plan courtesy of the Theban Mapping Project). KVII sarcophagus chamber and adjoining rooms, mino r axis indicated (walls with BE marked as 'X'; tomb plan courtesy of the Theban Mapping Ptoject). KV2 sarcophagus chamber and adjoining rooms (lintel with BE marked as 'X'; tomb plan courtesy of the Theban Mapping Project). KV9 sarcophagus chamber and adjoining rooms, minor axis indicated (walls and pillars with BE marked as 'X'; tomb plan courtesy of the Theban Mapping Project). Organization of scenes on the pillars (faces wi th BE circled). ' Grayed areas indicate unexcavated/unfinished pillar faces, wholly or partially attached to the parent wall. KVI sarcophagus chamber and adjoining room (walls with BE marked as 'X'; tomb plan courtesy of the Theban Mapping Project). xi

17 20 26 29

30 31

33 35 37 38 40 41 42

xii

Fig. 2.17 Fig.2.1S Fig. 2.19 Fig. 2.20 Fig. 2.21 Fig. 2.22 Fig. 2.23

Fig. 2.24 Fig. 2.25 Fig. 2.26 Fig. 2.27

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

KV6, sarcophagus chamber (walls with BE marked as 'X'; tomb plan courtesy of the Theban Mapping Project). NRTI tomb plan (walls with BE marked as 'X'; after P. Montet 1947, plate 5). Reproduced by permission of the Mission Ftan D- A. '''' Other architectural and iconographic evidence, discussed below (ch. 2, §2.6), supports Abitz's identification of the beginning of the book with the left-hand wall. The present study, therefore, employs a system of notation intended to reRect, on the one hand, the fundamental, bipartite structure of the book and, on the other, the revised order (left-right) proposed originally by Abitz, for which, see Table 1.2. Table 1.2. Location of scenes and texts by letter designation and their correspondences in previous literature.

Present designation. by location

Earlier equivaleots

"D"

A

Left wall

=

A2

Rear wall, left side: R6 and Pn only

= "C"

B

Right wall

= "A"

B2 0

Rear wall, right side: R6 and Pn (?) onlylO7

= "B"

Other: pillars, lintels, sarcophagi. etc.

= "E" (Abitz)

The conventional modern terms "left" and "right" refer [0 the point of view of an observer facing the rear of the tomb, 1011 The "rear wall" lies opposite [he entrance CO the chamber. 1°O

103. Abitz. 1989, 133- 37; the scenes from the pillars were designated as yet another "Part E" (Abitz 1995, 142--43), which, rather confusingly, must be differentiated from the "Parr E" defined by Barra. 104. Abitz. 1995, 137-42, with additional comments on the artifiCiality of the four-fold sequence on p. 165, n. 316.

105. Bana 1994, 16. 106. Abitz. 1995, 165, n. 316; Hornung 1999, 97-103, also follows this new sequence (see ch. 2, §2.6). lO7. It seems likely that Padineith included BE scenes on the right, rear wall of the unpublished and unnumbered chamber near the entrance corridor of his tomb (see ch. 2, §2.5.13), but the wall surface in this area has unfortunately not survived. 108. Directional terms relative to the observer are preferable to cardinal directions, which were never observed consistently in the Val~ ley of the Kings, due to the reliance upon imernal or symbolic orientation (Cerny 1973, 27; Abitz 1989, 19; Wilkinson 1994a, 79- 86). Symbolic oriemation is discussed in greater detail ch. 2, §2.4. For additional, important caveats with regard to the use of "left" and "right" in the present corpus and their symbolic associations for the ancient Egyptians, see ch. 2, n. 74. 109. It is interesting [Q nore that no Earth scenes appear ro have been placed on the front wall of a cham bet-i.e., Ranking the entrance to the room, and visible [Q an observer Facing me outside-in any of the existing versions.

14

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OFTHE EARTH

The system outlined above has the distinct advantage of progressing logically from beginning (A) to end (B), with subdivisions A2 and B2 reflecting the secondary alterations found only in the tombs of Ramesses VI and Padineirh. Noncontiguous or isolated elements that occur outside of the basic bipartite schema employed on the side walls of tombs receive a separate designation (0), unconneCted to the alphabetic sequences employed in earlier publications. Most importantly, this system may be applied with equal facility to any tomb or artifact in or on which the Book of the Earth occurs. 110 Expository annotations to the various scenes, presented in ch. 6, are identified throughout the present volume by the source abbreviations (§1.5) and wall designations outlined above, followed by the register in which they appear (numbered top to bottom),1ll the relevant scene number,1I2 and finally, the text number, lIl Thus, for example, "R6.B.1.38.44," refers to the sarcophagus chamber of Ramesses VI, right wall, first (uppermost) register, Scene 38, Text 44. In the case of papyri, which obviously lack a wall designation, the tegister, scene, and text numbers follow immediately after the so urce abbreviation. Thus, Kh.I.4.2 refers to the funerary papyrus of Khonsumes, register 1, scene 4, text 2. Sarcophagus text numbers follow the source abbreviation directly, that is, Nakhrnebef.l, Sarcophagus.2, etc. 114 This system is intended to facilitate comparisons of the relative locations of individual texts and their scenes between different sources. More concise references, without indication of relative placement, cite only the final (text) number and its source. Thus, "text 44" from the tOmb of Ramesses VI is equivalent to the full citation "R6.B.I.38.44." In addition to the longer annotations, short captions labeling individual figures in a given scene have been identified by scene number, source (tomb or papyrus owner, sarcophagus, etc.), and caption number, for example, "Scene 5, Djedkhonsuiusankh. caption 1." The captions have been presented together with their respective scenes in ch. 5. For texts from the tombs of Ramesses VI and VII, a concordance of plates from Piankoff 1953 and Hornung 1990 appears in app. I, Tables 2 and 3.

110. lr is, however, important to recall mat many of the organizational principles governing the primary, New Kingdom corpus appear to break down following the composition's "democrat ization" in the Twenty-First Dynasry (see the outline of sources, in § 1.5. above). Ill. The "top to bottom" order is also purely conventional, noting in particular that the course of the sun along the righmand (8) wall probably progresses from bottom lO top (see ch. 2. §2.6, and ch. 7, §7.3-4). 112. The scenes have been grouped by common themes and asSigned individual numbers, as discussed below, in ch. 5. These scene numbers have been designed to accommodate the entire corpus and should not be confused with the order in which the tableaux appear in a given tomb, sarcophagus. etc. (e.g., scene 20 appears in four different tombs but is not the "rwentieth scene" in any of them; for (he physical layout and order of [he tableaux in the various sources, see plates provided in app. 2, which also provide references to individual scene numbers, as ptesented in ch. 5). 113. Like the scene numbers, the text numbers are purely conventional, and do not necessarily reflect me order in which the texts were to be read. 114. The sarcophagus texts from the present corpus appear generaIJy in a Single register and may refer to multiple scenes. hence, the omission of register and scene numbers in their description.

CHAPTER

2

ARCHITECTURE §2.1 DEVELOPMENT OF THE ROYAL TOMB IN THE VALLEY OF THE KINGS

The primary corpus of rhe Book of the Earth (§ 1.4) occu rs as the main decorative motif on the left and right sidewalls of royal sarcophagus chambers constructed for one queen and five kings from the N ineteenth and Twentieth Dynasties: Merneptah, Tawosret, Ramesses III, Ramesses VI, Ramesses VII, and Ramesses IX.' In addition, an analysis offragmentary texts from the cenotaph of Seti I at Abydos, in a room identified plausibly as a giant. monumental "sarcophagus," indicates that a Book of the Earth figured prominently there as wel!.2The explicit association of the New Kingdom Books of the Earth with the burial chamber refleers changing aspects of the royal afterlife embodied in innovative architecture and decoration of the Ramesside tomb irselfl In order to defin e more clearly the function of the Book of the Earth with relation to the burial chamber, we must examine the evolution of the New Kingdom royal tomb complex and its associated architectural symbolism: All of (he [Drnbs in the Valley of the Kings are rock-cut/ subterranean Structures consisting minimally of an initial descending stairway or corridor, a second corridor Ranked most often by paired niches,6 and a burial chamber. 7 In practice, however, the royal tombs of the New Kingdom rarely incorporated fewer than four corridors and two rooms, including both a "well shaft'" and sarcophagus chamber. This sequence was doubled

me

1. Also note Ramesscs IV, who employed a single scene fro m the Book of the Earth above a lintel behind the burial chamber itself (see below, §2.5.5J. 2. Roberson 2007, 107. For the identification of th e room as a monumental sarcophagus. see Frankfort t t at. 1933, 1:26--27, with additional discussion below, §2.5.1. 3. Thus, Hornung 1990a, 92: "The picrures and texes on the walls of the Ramesside royal tombs bring the solar cycle into the romb, letting the mightiest star pass through its co rridors and chambers. The deceased pharaoh accompanies the sun on its journey." 'The physical structure of the tomb was also intended to recreate the nocturnal path of the sun god, as the technical terms for the various corridors and other architectural elements indicate, e.g., PJ s[J-nlr rpy n pJ_Rr ntj J:!r WJ.t SW, "the first god's passage of Pre, which is upon the sun's path," (Cerny 1973, 27). The architectural and iconographic developments taking place in the royal tombs of the Nineteenth and Twentieth Dynasties appear to coincide with a general reevaluation of the symbolic attributes of Egyptian funerary structures in the Ramesside period, as indicated also by changes taking place in contemporary private tombs, vis-a-vis the process of so-called sacralization, for which, see Assmann 2003 , 2004; and Raue 1995. For the cosmographic (especially solar) significance of royal burials in earlier periods, see references in ch. 1, n. 16, with additio nal discussion in §§2.2-3. below (Middle and New Kingdoms); for the Old Kingdom, see also J. Allen 1994 and Friedman 1996. 4. A concise, popular summary of much the following material appears in Roberson 2008. 5. As opposed to earlier mastabas and pyramids, or later temenos-style constructions (Hornung 1990a, 23; Arnold and Hornung 1980). For the development of royal and private rock-cut tomb architecture, see Badawy 1954-68, 2:90, 96, 156-61 . 195-96; Badawy

1966, 54-56. 6. KVl (Ramesses VU) and KV62 (Tutankhamun) are the only completed tombs in the Valley of the Kings to omit the paired niches altogether (compare the plans in Hornung 1990a, 211 - 16). 7. This basic templare is best exemplified by KV16, which was hastily constructed for Ramesses I following his brief, one-year reign and consequently included only these essential features (Hornung 1990a, 28); see Piankoff 1957b, 189- 200. 8. For which, see Abitz 1974; Vandersleyen 1975; E. 'Thomas 1968.

15

16

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

frequently from Thutmose IV onward, in the "mature" phase of construction in the Valley (cf. figs . 2.1-4).' Additionally, various sardlirc chambers, anterooms, and annexes might also accrue as successive kings sought CO expand upon the achievements of their predecessors, while maintaining recognizable ties with the architectural traditions of the past. 10 Throughout the Eighteenth Dynasty, prior to the reign of Akhenarcn, the various corridors and rooms of the royal tomb were laid out along distinctively curved or bent axes (figs. 2.1-2). " Akhenaten, who chose ultimately to construct his tomb in the great wadi at Amarna (TA 26)," built along a linear axis, although it remains unclear whether this was by design or due to the king's premature death. 13 In either case, the bent axis only reemerged twice after his reign, in the tombs ofTutankhamun (KY62) and Ramesses II (KY7) ." Horemheb (KY57; fig. 2.3) offered a hybrid solution with the introduction of an offset, jogged axis that was later adopted by Seti I (KYI7) and Ramesses III (KYII). In the latter tomb at least, the jogged axis served a primarily utilitarian function for the avoidance of an adjacent funerary monument. 15 All of the remaining rulers of the Ramesside period adhered to a strictly linear major axis (fig. 2.4) ," considered further in §2.3, below.

§z.z

UNDERWORLD COSMOLOGY AND ARCHITECTURE

The royal tOmbs in the Valley of the Kings seem to function on some level as architectural models of the Egyptian underworld, or Duat. The use of a delibetately hidden tomb, in addition to the potential for deterring tomb robbers," may have held specific mythological significance as a reference to the "hidden chamber"

9. Romer 1981, 279-80. 10. These are the guiding principles that Hornung (1957, 120-33; 1990a, 28) terms the "extension of the existing." Against this ideal of continuous expansion, we may also observe its inverse: The alternation of originally grandiose tomb plans to accommodate the early death of a king. resul ting in abbreviated sequences and reduced dimensions. 11. Tombs KV38 (Thutmose I) and KV2D (Hatshepsut) both exhibit curved axes (againsr the tradidonal sequence of construction for these two tombs, see Romer 1974, 119-28, who suggests that KV20 was begun originally for Thutmose I then expanded to accommodate the burial of Hatshepsut, the form er king being reinterred in KV38 at a later date by his grandson, Thutmose III). The remaining tombs prior to Akhenaten all adopt a moro:: angular, bent configu ration, for which so::o:: Abitz 1989a, 1-7. 12. Reeves and Wilkinson 1996, 118-19, including discussion of that king's apparently abandoned Thehan monument (WV 25). For the suggested reburial of Akhenaren in KV55, see M. Bell 1990, 132-37; against the identification of the KV55 mummy as Akhenaten, so::e. e.g., Dodson 1994. 13. On the possibility that the straight axis was introduced to allow the sun to penetrate the depths of Akhentaten's tomb, see Cerny 1973.8-9; and Hornung 1990a, 28. 14. The ground plan ofTutankhamun's tomb most likely reAeces the conversion of an originally private structure into a makeshift royal burial (Abitz. 1989a, 7-8; Robins 2007, 321, with additional references). In the case of Ramesses II, explanations for me bent axis have included the possible avoidance of shale deposits in the bedrock (Reeves and Wilkinson 1996, 142), or a final refutation of Amarna theology. ViN2~vis tho:: linear tomb axis adopted by Akhenaten (Hornung 1990a, 30). 15. K.VIO, built for Amenmcsse. Note that. having already breached the roof of }(VI 0 during the initial phaso:: of construction under Secnakht (Cerny 1973, 9), Ramesses III offset the second half of KVII to the right, as opposed to Horemheb and Sed I, whose tomb axes both shift: to the left. 16. Note that this li near ideal was not always a practical reality. As noted in Romer 1981, 280-81, "Most of the tombs in the Valley aro:: unfinished ... They are a compromise between what was planned and what was actually achieved in excavation.» Cf., for instance, the disjunction between the ancient tomb plan of Ramesses IV and the actual placement of the rooms, discussed in Carter and Gardiner 191 7; this same theme is taken up again, with reference to an unidentified pit tomb from Ora Abu'l Naga, in Romer 1976, 199. Also see comments in Cerny 1973, 5, with regard to the false sense of accuracy imparted by many modern tomb plans and their tendency to "show all the walls ... as straight, and all angles as right angles." 17. A dubious possibility at best, as noted in Cerny 1973, 2: '"'If ... hope of protecting the tombs was really the reason for moving tho:: royal cemetery to the Valley of the Kings, it was an illusion, and the hope was not fulfilled." In any case, the eventual inclusion of a visible, exterior fa.~ade (Merneptah and later) effectively eliminated any practical hope of concealing the royal burial (cf. Hornung 1990a, 30, who expresses confusion as to why a visible exterior should appear "preCisely in the unstable years at the end of Dynasty 19").

17

ARCH ITECTURE

,

"

2.1. Curved axis. KV20 (Thutmose IIHatshepsut).

2.2. Bent axis. KV43 (Thutmo,e IV). o o

Post-Amarna

Pre-Am arn a

2.3. Offset/jogged axis. KV57 (Horemheb).

t:~: X: : : : : : :il;:~:;fSe' The ceiling features a unique combination of elements, consisting of an astronomical ceiling, which was integrated into a double image of Nut adapted from the Books of the Sky."" Due to the rotation of the ceiling vault, the celestial images were executed necessarily parallel to the tomb's descending corridor, recalling the orientation seen already in the tomb ofRamesses IV As in that tomb, the head of the goddess (= west) points toward the tomb entrance (= east), confounding any

X

X

to entrance Fig. 2.16. KV1 sarcophagus chamber and adjoining room (walls with BE marked as 'X'; tomb plan courtesy of the Theban Mapping Project).

186. See Brock 1995; Hornung 1990b, 52- 76; and Piankoff 1958. 187. On the apparencly completed status of the tomb, see Reeves and Wilkinson 1996, 166. 188. According to the Egyptian terminology, Ramesses VII's sarcophagus "chamber" should be properly considered a corridor (stJ-nIr, or "god's passage"), owing to its length being greater than its width (Cerny 1973, 30). 189. Hornung 1990b, plates 115 (front wall) and 120 (rear wall). 190. Hornung 1990b, 89, n. 3, and plates 10, 121- 24.

ARCHITECTURE

43

sense ofinrernal alignment along the major axis. IiI At the same time, neither of the double images of Nut exhibits a distinctive nocturnal or diurnal form, so it is likewise impossible to tell if they are directionally aligned with the minor axis, respective to the sidewalls. In fact. only one piece of evidence paims toward the survival of the W2-~ minor axis in Ramesses VII's sarcophagus haJJ: A unique concluding scene (23), somewhat reminiscent of the curved concluding representations employed in the Amduat-sryle Underworld Books, serves to orient the right wall to notional east (£2), Otherwise, there is little evidence to suggest the consistent operation of any form of internal alignment within the chamber.'92 Since the reign of Merneptah, the Books of the Earth had always employed vertical concluding represemarions, wh ich served as visual cues directing the observer's attention from the lower registers toward the dome-shaped upper register and the moment of solar rebirth. The Book of the Earth of Ramesses VII marks an important turning point, as the first collection of Earth scenes in which the nocturnal course of the sun tOward the eastern hadron was conceived primarily as a horizontal, as opposed to vertical, journey. 193 This shift in emphaSiS was achieved both through the abandonment of dome-shaped sidewalls and the adoption of a horizontally oriented concluding representation. The significance of this change as a precursor to the private Books of the Earth from the Third Intermediate period and later will be considered further below (§§2.6-7).

2.5.8 Ramesses IX (KV6)'~ Sarcophagus Chamber F: sixteen scenes; thirteen texts (ch. 6, §6.9) Left wall: 12,37,52,54, 60, 61 , 71 (app. 2, plate 13) Right wall: 19,29,36,39,42, 46,47,73,75 (app. 2, plates 14-17) Textual parallels: Tutankhamun , Cenotaph, Ramesses VI, Ramesses VII, Sarcophagus (app. 3, plates

2-3,9, 19,23-26) The tomb of Ramesses IX represents a return [0 the canon of proportions utilized by Ramesses IV and Ramesses VI (fig. 2. 17).'" Like those kings, Ramesses IX also left his tomb unfinished at the time of his death, wh ich may account for many of the changes in the traditional decorative program that were devised at this 1 time. % KV6 is the last royal tOmb to present Significant new developments in the Underworld iconography of the Ramesside period.'" It is also the last tOmb in which the Book of the Earth appears as the primacy decorative motif in the sarcophagus chamber.l98

191. See discussion at §2.6, below. 192. Thus, e.g., the Waler lilies (; Upper Egypt, south) held by Werethekau on the right-hand (: north) side of the front wall (see Hornung 1990b, plate 115) would seem to indicate that rhe major axis in this tomb also deviated from the Ramesside norm (for the orientation of heraldic motifs, see Wilkinson 1994a, 84). 193. Note that cenain scenes from earlier Books of the Earth-above all the "Aker group" (scenes 3-10) in the tomb of Ramesses VI-already placed emphasis on the horiwntal progress of lhe sun, although even in such cases, a vertical axis linking the upper and lower registers was always present (see discussion in ch. 5, scenes 2 and 68, and §5.4). 194. See Abirz 1992; 1990j t 989bj and Guilmant 1907. The present treatm ent incorporates data gathered during my visit to the tomb in summer 2008, while on fellowship with the American Research Center in Egypt. 195. Ab,C2 1990,2. 196. Ab,C2 1990, 16; 1992, 168. 197. Abitz 1992,165. 198. Exemplars from the 1hird Intermediate period and Saite period (§§2.5.9-14 and ch. 7, §7.4), all occur outside the burial chamber, although elemems from the Book of the Earth might still occur on burial furniture, e.g., sarcophagi and papyri (see the outline of sources in §1.5, abovej for sarcophagi, also see §2.7, below).

44

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

The sarcophagus chamber with its vaulted ceiling was oriented lengthwise, along the major axis, as seen already in the tomb of Ramesses VII. The dimensions of the burial chamber. its lengthwise orientation. and the rough s.tare of the rock surface beneath the painted plaster are indicative of the room's hasty completion, following the king's early death. '" Of note in this tegard is the central depression for the royal sarcophagus, which also runs parallel to the major tomb axis. This orientation, which occurs from the reign of Ramesses III and later, cannot be ascribed to alterations necessitated by (he early ........ ~ demise of the king. \/ The overall decorative plan of Ram esses lX's tomb seems to I reRect a continuation of the program developed by Ramesses VI. 200 The burial chamber, however, presents an ocheIVIise unique blending of rhe Book of Caverns and the Book of the Earth. The room begins with the giant figures of Osiris and N ut, from the fifth division of the Book of Caverns,wI to the left and right of the entrance, respectively. '" The left wall then conrinues with the final scenes from the fifth division of that book (upper and middle regisrers), and the first scene to entrance of the sixth division (middle register), in their correct order.xu The remainder of the sidewalls consists of individual Earth scenes, most Fig. 2.17. KV6 sarcophagus chamber of which are attested in earlier sources.204 The rear wall was, for the (walls with BE marked as 'X'; tomb plan first time, decorated with an expanded representation of "awakening courtesy of the Theban Mapping Project). of Osiris,"2QS which perhaps served as a sore of concluding scene for the tomb itself."" Abitz has suggested thar the scenes on the walls are to be read from left to right, proceeding from the fifth and sixth division of th e Book of Caverns, through the various Earth scenes, and culminating with the image of /

x

x

"

1

199. Abi" 1990. 2. 200. Abitz 1992, p. 169. 201. The male deity is identified as Geb in Piankoff 1944, 59; Hornung 1972, 38 1, prefers Osiris, on the basis of the figure's epithet as "Lord of the West." 202. Abitz 1992, 183, fig. 40; 1990, 33, fig. 11. The representations from division 5 do nor occur in isolation: the preceding two corridors contained abbreviated versions of the Book of Caverns, divisions 1--4 (Abin 1992, 169-70), indicating a continued emphasis on the traditional divisions of (he book, as opposed to the following Earth scenes, which exhibit no predictable divisions (see above, § 1.4, and bdow, nn. 203--4). 203. The Caverns scenes fro m the left wall are indicated in app. 2, plate 13. For the full , original context of these dements, see Piankoff 1944, plate 51 (fifth division); 1945, plate 121 (sixth division) . These scenes represent a continuation of dements from divisions 1-4, which appear in the first and second corridor of the tomb, for which, see Abitz 1990, 12. 204. Note that some scenes (e.g., 60, 71) are entirely new. In two instances we find individual excerpts from the Arnduat and Book of Caverns (scenes 36 and 39, respectively, in [he present corpus); both of these images have been completely removed from their original context and given new annotations, which is why they are considered here as part of the Book of the Earth (as opposed to the collection of scenes from the fifth and sixth division of the Book of Caverns, wh ich retain significant portions of their original layouti also cf. Abitz 1990, 24-25. who interpretS all of the scenes from the Amduat, Book of Caverns, Book or the Earth. as isolated excerpts). 205. Abitz 1990, 31-32; 1992, 173. Most of the lower right quarter of the tableau has been destroyed; compare, e.g., the reconstructed scene in Assmann 1977,91, fig. 41. 206. Cf. [he placement of the concluding scene from the Book of Gates on the final, rear wall of the tomb of Ramesses VI (§2.S.6, n. 168, above).

ARCHITECTURE

45

Nut on the right-hand side.107 This interpretation corresponds well with OUf concept of the minor axis, and the requisite identification of the right wall with notional east (E2), as the terminal half of the Book of the Earth. As in the tombs of Ramesses IV and V11, howevet, the lengthwise orientation of the Books of the Sky on the cei l ing,~ along the tomb's major axis, with the head of the sky goddess (= west) facing the entrance to the tomb (= east), would appear to throw the system of internal alignment into disarray. In this regard, we are inclined to agree with Wilkinson's suggestion that, once it became clear that the Books of the Sky would have to be rotated ro accommodate the decreased width of the burial chamber, the primary orientational concern became the placement of the king's head beneath the crotch of the sky goddess, in the position of rebirth.'"

2.5.9 Osorkon II (NRT 1)''' Entrance chamber: two scenes; no texts Left wall: 27 (app. 2, plate 21b) Right wall: 26 (app. 2, plate 21a) Chamber 3 (Takelot II crypt): one scene; two texts (ch. 6, §6.ll) Left wall: 51 (app. 2, plate 22) Textual parallels: Ramesses V1 (app. 3, plate II) After the close of the New Kingdom and through the following Twenty-First Dynasty, scattered scenes and texts from the Book of the Earth began to appear on the so-called mythological papyri from the vicinity of Thebes/ ll but no exam ples are currently known from either royal or private tomb walls during this period, The next occurrence of the Book of the Earth as a decorative element in a tomb occurs in the Twenty-Second Dynasty complex ofOsorkon II, at Tanis (fig. 2.18) . This monument also marks the last known use of the Book of the Earth in a royal context. Osorkon II built his tomb within the precincts of the great temple of Amun at Tanis, to the immediate south of the sepulcher constructed for his illustrious Twenty-First Dynasty predecessor, Psusennes 1. 212 This new style of "temenos-tomb,,211 represented an archircccucal development from the small funerary chapels built in the forecourt of the Amun temple at Karnak, si nce the end of the Nineteenth Dynasry.1I4

207. Abin. 1990, 35, correctly poin ts out that the orientation of the large figure of Osiris (on the left) toward the rear of (he tomb, and Nut (on the right) toward the entrance, implies that the intervening scenes should be read as an open circuit. However, his association of the various scenes in the sarcophagus hall with the twemy-four hours of the day is rather more problematic. as it requires that a lengthy solar litany (see ch. 6, text R9.B.2.75.14) be counted as a scene (number 20 of24, by his reckoning), rather [han a text. 208. Ramesses lX incorporated abbreviated versions of the Book of the Day and Book of the Night, without text (Abin 1990, 30- 31, and fig. 9). 209. Wilkinson I994a, 86. The significance of th is placement is considered further below, in §2.6. Also note Abirz's observation ( 1992, 173) that the nine worshipping figures of the king from the Book of the Day were shifted to the Book of the Night in Ramesses IX's sarcophagus hall, such that the king in the Janer book appears to be leaving the tomb. 210. See Roulin 1998,216-49; Montet 1947. 211. See app. 2, plates 18- 20. These scenes derive primarily from the "Aker Group" (ch. 5, scenes 3-10). For the mythological papyri in general, see Niwinski 1989a; Piankoff 1957a. 212. See the plans provided in Momet 1947, plate 5; a tOtal of six such tombs were discovered, of which Osorkon II represents the second largest, after Psusennes. 213. So called (Hornung 1990a, 31), owing to its location within the boundaries of the temple's temenos wall (also see Arnold 2003, 129-30; Arnold and Hornung 1980, cols. 509-10). 214. Arnold and Hornung 1980, cols. 509-10.

..... 46

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

N

Fig. 2.18. NRT1 tomb plan (walls with BE marked as 'X'; after P. Montet 1947, plate 5). Reproduced by permission of the Mission

Fran~aise des Fouil1es de Tanis.

ARCHITECTURE

47

Osorkon's tomb mayor may not have had some form ofbuHr 5upersrruccure. 1I5 The subterranean portion of the comb consists of an entrance chamber and four subsidiary crypts. Unlike the surrounding tombs, which were entered by means of a shaft, the entrance to NRT 1 consists of a simple, undecorated door, which had been walled up in antiquity. 2!'" The long axis of the tomb runs vaguely southwest to northeast, but it is unclear what, if any, internal or symbolic orientation may have governed the layout of the decoration. The firsr [Wo Earth scenes appear opposite one anorher, on rhe left- and right-hand walls of the granite entrance chamber.217 No other decoration is evident on either of these two walls,1l8 and it is tempting to see in the symmetrical placement of the scenes a last vestige of the bipartite division of the Book of the Earth, as found in the royal sarcophagus chambers of the New ](jngdom. If so, then the images, both of which depict the creation and elevation of the solar disc by giant figures. betray no overt indications of the minor axis,l19 which appears to have governed the placement of all such images in the Valley of the ](jngs. The third scene from the Book of the Earth appears in a northeastern chamber (room 3) that connects with the entrance hall via a blocked door to the east. This small room was used as a crypt for the internment of Osorkon's son Takelot II, and was decorated in large part with various deities and scenes from the Book of the Dead.'" The flat ceiling was decorated with a simple field of stars on a blue background.'" The vignette from the Book of the Earth (scene 51) was placed on the left wall, alongside a representation of various bas, gods, and the king, adoring the ram-headed, mummiform figure of Amun-Re-Horakhti. 222

2.5.10 Pedamenopet (TT33)n, Hall XlII: Easternmost wall: Textual parallels:

9+ scenes; 13+ texts (ch. 6, §6.12) 3,4,5,6,7,8,9, 10,22,77 (app. 2, plates 23- 26) Ramesses VI, Khonsumes, Mutirdis, Horiria (app. 3, plates 16, 18,20,27-28,30)

The vast Theban tomb of Pedamenopet includes the earliest known example of a Book of the Earth inscribed on a private tomb wall (fig. 2.19).2H The scenes and texts in question appear on the easternmost wall

2 15. Montet 1942, 129, found no evidence for a superstructure above any of the tOmbs at Tanis, but cf. comments by Arnold 2003, 130, who suggestS that an above-ground component, similar to the royal tombs at Sais, may have been present. 216. Monter 1942, 132. 217. Designated the "north" and "south" walls, respectively, by Montet 1947,55-56. 218. Monter 1947,56, noting chat "'il est possible que Ie granit ait ete autrefois crepi avec du platre pour recevoird'autre representations." 219. However, note lhat representations of the disc being pushed and/or pulled by giant pairs of arms, etc., carry an implicit association with the daily course of the sun, which may be tr.l.ced back to the concluding representations of (he earlier Underworld Books (for which, see Hornung 1981, 217-26) . 220. Monter 1947,77-78. 221. Montet 1942, 133-34. The use of a Rat ceili ng with stars recalls the decorative tradition of royal "Amduat-style" tombs from the Eighteenth Dynasry (see Hornung 1990a, 27 and 209), which, in turn, may be traced back as far as the step pyramid complex of Djoser at Saqqara, whose subterranean chambers include Hat ceilings with similar stellar decoration (see Friedman 1996,343). 222. Montet 1942, plate 37. 223. See Piankoff 1947b; von Bissing 1938; Dumichen 1884-94. 1he third volume ofDum ichen's study was published posthumously, without explanatOry notes; for essential comments on the sources of the plates, many of which do not derive from Pedamenopet's tomb, see Maspero 1913. For additional bibliography see Bianchi 1982. The present treatment incorporates dara gathered during my visit to the tomb in summer 2008, while on fellowship with the American Research Center in Egype, as well as photographs provided through kind permission of Dr. Isabelle Regen in 2009, with the assistance of Prof. Claude Trauneckcr, whose clearance of the tOmb began in 2006. A thorough, new srudy ofTI33 is currendy being prepared by Prof. Traunecker and his ream. 224. Elements from Book of ehe Earth had appeared already on the private Mythological Papyri of the Twenty-First Dynasty, for which see ch. 5, scenes 3- 10, 68, and §5.4; for texrual transmission, see ch. 7, §7.4. The precise ruler(s) under whom Pedamenopet served is not

T HE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

48

o

o o

o

o o

0

o

0

o

0

0

forecourt

o o ~---N

Fig. 2.19. TT33 tomb plan (wall with BE marked as 'X'; after PM], 1:65). Reproduced by permission of the Griffith lnstitute.

of Hall XI II, opposite the last hour of the Amduat and following the Book of Gates, which concludes on the adjacent south wall. nl The Rat ceiling of the chamber was decorated with a field of painted red Stars on a dark blue or black background. The Book of the Earth scenes were executed in a relatively shallow sunk relief that is now badly damaged with many large sections of the wall completely loSt. In his discussion of the religious texts from this tomb, Piankoff recognized a group of scenes belonging to what he identified as the "Book of Aker," Stating that, Ce "livre" n' est coonu que par quelques representations dom les deux parties de devant du Lion Aker place face

a

face ~~ avec deux barques solaire qui sont hatees par des serpents et des oiseaux a tete humaine. Le lion Aker est

known, although an art-historical analysis of several statues attributed to him seems to place his tomb chronologically at or near the cusp of the Twenty~ Fif(h and Twenty~Sixth Dynasties (Bianchi 1982; for an early Twenty~Sixth Dynasty date, see now Jansen~Winkein 1998). 225. Piankoff 1947b, 74--76. N. Thomas 1980, 241--42, has suggested that the architecture and decoration of corridor XIII was intended to recreate the Osirian "Hall of Embalmment" above the burial apartments.

ARCHITECTURE

rcpresente au dernier registre de cetce paroi. Les (execs et

des cartouches, denommees ~~~a,

=:0

0

49

les representations sont treS mutiles, seules trois divinir6: dans

ct OOOQ, so nt intactes.

226

My survey of the tomb in 2008 confitmed the presence of all eight tableaux connected to this "Aker group,,,m as well as a previously unidentified concluding representation adapted from the Book of Caverns. In addition, I was able to confirm that the description of the leonine heads of Aker as "face to face" is incorrect. The left head, of which only the ear and back of the mane are now preserved, clearly faces away from its counterpart, that is, J)~,

as in the versions of Ramesses V1, Djedkhonsuiusankh, and Padineith (§5.4). Pedamenopet's Book of the Earth differs significantly from the its royal antecedents in that it progresses along a single wall surface, from right to left, toward the moment of sunrise, represented by the hotizontally

oriented concluding representation (scene 22). In addition the precise, cardinal alignment, which governs all aspects of Pedamenopet's tomb, also stands in marked Contrast to the internal or symbolic orientation of scenes

employed in the royal tombs of the New Kingdom. However, the placement of the "Aker group" cardinally eastn• might still echo the internal orientation employed in the New Kingdom, insofar as the earliest occurrence of that

group of scenes, from the tomb of Ramesses VI, appears on the right sidewall, beneath the hindquarters of Nut, that is, notionally east, along the minor axis. Pedamenopet's placement of the Book of the Earth opposite the final hour of the Amduat anticipates the relative layouts of those two compositions in the tombs of Mutirdis (TT410; §2.5.11) and Padineith (TTI97; §2.5.13), the latter of which also includes a version of the horizontally oriented concluding representation (scene 22). It seems likely that the Books of the Earth employed in these three Theban tombs-all Saite period monuments located within a few hundred meters of one another, within the Asasif necropolis-may have been based upon a common template, which took as its central theme the programmatic ''Aker group ."m The organization of this group of scenes during the Saite period shares many affinities with the arrangements found on

the Twenty-First Dynasty funerary Papyri of Djedkhonsuiusankh and Khonsumes, which supply an important intermediate step between the ''Aker group" attested first in the tomb of Ramesses VI and the Saite versions

found at el-Asasi£""

2.5.11 Mutirdis (TT410)D> Chamber I: east wall: Textual parallels:

eight+ scenes; eight+ texts (ch. 6, §6.13) 3,4, 8, 9, 45, 51, 55, 70 (1); probably also 5 (app. 2, plates 27-29) Ramesses V1, Khonsumes, Pedamenopet (app. 3, plates 12-13,29-30)

226. P;ankoff 1947b, 76. 227. See ch. 5, Scenes 3-10, with additional discussion at §5.4. The present study has abandoned Piankofl's identification of these scenes as a separate book (following Hornung 1972, 23). Note that N. Thomas 1980, 248, incorrectly assumes that the description of the Book of the Earth in Piankoff 1954, 41, applies equally to the tomb ofPedamenopet, although several clements (e.g., the scarab "emerging from the pellet," shrewmouse~headed figures) do not occur in Pedamenopet's recension, as preserved. It is cri tical to nOte that, when Piankoff (p. 327), hypothesized that "the only complete version of [the Book of Aker] is in the tomb of Pedamenopet," he was referring only to this "Aker group," not the entire corpus of scenes found in the sarcophagus chamber of Ramesses VI, which he instead dubbed "the Creation of the Solar Disc." 228. Identified incorrectly as the final hour of the Amduat in N. Thomas 1980,245. The Amduat scene, to which Thomas refers, occurs on the umt wall, opposite the Book of the Earth. 229. For which, see ch. 5, §5.4. For shared architectural and iconographic e1ernenrs in Saite tombs from e1·Asasif generally, see N. Thomas 1980, 25- 138 (architecture) and 139-282 (iconography).

230. See ch. 5, §5.4. 231. Assmann 1977.

50

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

Mutirdis served as chief follower of the divine adoratrice232 under the God's wife of Amun Nitokris, during the reign of Psarmek 1.'" The superStructure of her tomb, located in the area of e1-Asasif, east of Deir e1-Bahri, consists of twO pylons and two courryards, running approximately east to wes[.~ after which a descending stairway leads to an open sun court (fig. 2.20).D> A series of four "hambers, terminating in the burial hall and arranged in a vaguely u-shaped configuration. branches off of the southwestern side of the open courtyard. 216 The scenes from the Book of the Earth occur in the first of these chambers, along the length of the badly damaged east wall, opposite the final hours of th e Amduar.n> Assmann recognized the scenes along the east wall as Underworld tableaux, which he divided into six sections, noting that none of the known Underworld Books exhibit an identical form (fig. 2.21).'" From the preserved traces, he suggests parallels from the Amduatm and Book of the Earth."" In fact, the first four scenes from the left half of the upper register'" directly parallel the Twenty-First Dynasty funeraty papyrus ofKhonsumes,'" which includes th e same seq uence (4-9-8-9), but reverses the orientation. 243 The exact same sequence also appears in the upper register of the version from the tomb of Pedamenopet. Judging from these earlier versions, which illustrate variations on the template referred to in the present study as the ''Aker group,,,244 it seems certain that the partially preserved hands grasping a rope in Mutirdis's second register correspond to the towing ba-birds of scene 3, while the third register would most likely have included some form of the great Aker tableau (scene 5). The nexr preserved scene (51) also belongs to the Book of the Earth,W but does not otherwise appear in close association with the "Aker group."ZC6 The remainder of the wall w is very badly damaged, but the preserved traces that permit the confident identification of scenes 45 and 55. Scen e 45, previously unrecognized in the tomb of Mutirdis, was only otherwise arrested in the tomb ofRamesses III (now destroyed) ,148 and is now me only surviving exemplar of this tableau. Scenes 55 and 70'" borh occur in the tombs of Ramesses 1II (§2.5.4), Ramesses VI (§2.5.6), and Padihorresnet (§2.5.12).

232. Ifr}.t smsw.t n.t dWJ .t-n[r (Assmann 1977, 17). 233. Assmann 1977,9; also see pp. 15-19 . fo r her fami ly, titles, etc. 234. The east- west orientation of the superstructure-with varying degrees of accuracy-is typical of the funerary palaces at e1-Asasif, occurring also in conjunction with the tombs of Pedamenopet and Padihorresnet (see N . Thomas 1980, 477). 235. See Assmann 1977, to- II, for a comparison of Mutirdis's somewhat abb reviated plan with a typical Saite tomb. 236. For the full ground plan, see Assmann 1977, plate 46. 237. According to N. Thomas 1980,230, the decoration employed in this chamber suggests that it was conceived as a unit with me burial apartments, as opposed to a "cult chamber," wh ich would normally follow the preceding open court. 238 . Assmann 1977,71. 239. Assmann 1977,7 1. Assmann's proposed Amduat parallel must now be discarded, as that particular tableau unquestionably represents a variant of a Book of the Earth scene (scene 4 from the present corpus). 240. Assmann 1977,72, no. 60 (scene 8 from the present corpus), 73, no. 60a (scene 3) and no. 61 (scene 5 1). The suggested parallel with scene 12, ciring Pianko{f 1953, plate B, IX+X, can now be refuted on the basis of parallels from the papyrus ofKhon5umes (see ch. 5, scenes 3-5, 8- 9, and §5.4). Assmann cites no paralicls for the remainder of the tableaux on the east wall. 241. Assmann's sections I- III. 242. See app. 2, plate 20. 243. The sequence of scenes in the version of Mutirdis, from left to right, is 4, 9a, 8, and 9b (fi g. 2.21); this same group runs from right to left: on the papyrus of Khonsumes. 244. See ch. 5, §5.4. 245. Assmann 1977,73, §2A, and n. 61. Scene 51 was incorporated already in the tombs of Ramesses VI and Osorkon II (see §2.56 and §2.5.9). 246. In the tomb of Ramesses VI, scene 51 occurs in the first/upper register of the right hand wall, wh ereas the "Aker Group" fins the fourth/bottom register. The same scene also occurs in the tomb of Osorkon II , which omits the "Aker Group" altogether. 247. Assmann's sections V-VI. 248. Assmann 1977,73-74, offers no parallels. 249. The preserved traces resemble the figures from scene 70, although the vignette and texts are toO poorly preserved to permit a definitive identification.

51

ARCHITECTURE

second pylon & forecourt

first pylon

N

\ Fig. 2.20. TT410 tomb plan (wall with BE marked as 'X'; after Assmann 1977, plate 46).

The scenes from the Book of the Earth along the east wall occur opposite a represenracion of a portal, in

the style of the Book of Gates, and selections from the twelfth hour of the Amduat on the west wall. '" The ceiling decoration, almost entirely destroyed, appears to have included some sort of astronomical representation.

25i

The

combination of elements from the "Aker group" opposite the twelfth hour of the Amduat, most closely parallels the tOmb ofPedamenopet{§2.5. I I), which also locates the Earth scenes on an eastern wall.'" In addition, the occurrence of scenes 5 I, 55, and 70 (?) on the same wall as the "Aker group" parallels the placement of those scenes in the romb of Ramesses VI, where they all occur on the right wall {notionally east, along the minor axis). m

2.5.12 Padihorresnet (TT196)'" Room 13: Right wall:

two scenes; no texts 255

55, 70

250. Assmann 1977, 74-77; the usc of portals styled afrer (he Book of Gates in conjunction with sections of the Amduat and Litany of Re occurs on a number of sarcophagi from the Thirti eth Dynasty (Manassa 2007. 118); the combination of the Amduat with a Book of Gates-style portal in the romb ofMutirdis should be recognized as an important precursor to thc decorative program of the Persian-era sarcophagi. 251. Assmann 1977,64-66. 252. The pairing of the final hour of the Amdua( opposite the Aker group also occurs in the tomb ofPadineith (§2.5.13), although [he books' cardinal orientation is reversed in that tomb. Also, note that Pedamenopent's tomb was oriented much morc precisely to the cardinal directions than those of Mutirdis or Padineith.

253. Soc ch. 5, §5.4. 254. Graefd003, 1,14, 109-10; 2,242 (T378-79) and plares 4 1a and V22-23. 255. Fragmentary captions to scenes 55 and 77 are preserved. which seem to parallel the captions from the corresponding scenes in the tomb of Ramesses VI (see entries for the relevant scenes in ch. 5).

52

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

, 70?

~

~II

',: [(I\.

II

I"

3 51

rJfi[1ii)

Fig. 2.21. TT410 Chamber I, east wall overview (after A ssmann 1977, fig. 28; scene numbers are those of the present study [eh. 5]).

Padihorresnet was the third High Steward to serve the God's Wife ofAmun Nitorcris, with a career that ap-

pears to have spanned the reigns of Necho II and Psamtek II."' The main axis ofTTl9G runs apptoximately east to west (fig. 2.22). Traces of two scenes from the Book of the Earth have been preserved on the badly damaged right wall of chamber R.13, which branches off the north side of the westernmost hall (R.II).'" As in the tomb of Mutirdis (§2.5. 1 I), the occurrence of the Book of the Earth here suggests that chamber R.13 was conceived as part of the burial apartmenrs,m rather than as a group with the preceding cult chamber.

TTI9G is the only known Saite tomb in which the Book of the Earth scenes appear in a chamber on the north side of the monument. However, thee scenes' occurrence on the right-hand, east wall of chamber R.13 does parallel the placement of the Earth tableaux on the right-hand, east walls of their respective (southern) chambers in the tombs ofPedamenopet and Mucirciis.

l59

In addition, organization of the [wo images corresponds

to the arrangement found in the tomb of Ramesses VI, where scenes 55 and 70 also occur side by side."" Unfortunately, the decoration of the northern and western wall surfaces is roo poorly preserved to permit an identification of their scenes or texts.

2.5.13

Padineith (TT197)'"

Unnumbered side room:

Rear wall: Left wall: Texrual parallels:

six+ scenes; six+ texts (ch. 6, §6.14) 4, 5, remainder destroyed (app. 2, plate 30) 6,22,77,22, remainder destroyed (app. 2, plates 31-32) none

Padineith was chief steward of the god's wife Ankhnesneferibre, under Psamtek 11.'" His large tomb at Thebes includes a number of Earth scenes in a side room that branches off the north side of a short east-west

256. N. Thomas 1980, 17; Graefe 2003, 1:5. 257. Graefe 2003,14. Room II corresponds to the second "cult chamber" mentioned in N. Thomas 1980,234-35. 258. Note that a shaft in the southwest corner of room 13 provides direct access to a burial chamber (13.1) belonging to an unidentified individual (Graefe 2003, 1:95); cf. the tomb ofPadineith (TT 197), below. 259. Note that this arrangement is reversed in the tomb of Padineith (Tf I97). 260. See Graefe 2003, 2:415, plate V23a-c. 261. Charnpollion 1884,552-53; a comprehensive study of [h is tomb has yet to appear. The present treatment incorporates data gathered during my visit [0 the tomb in summer 2008, while on fellows hip with the American Research Center in Egypt. 262. PM I, part I, 302.

ARCHITECTURE

53

f

N

Fig. 2.22. TTI96 tomb plan (wall with BE marked as 'X'; after Graefe 2003, 2:17, fig. 16.) Reproduced by permission of the A ssociation Egyptologique Reine Elisabeth.

corridor con necting the foreeDurt with the descending stairway (fig. 2.23). The location, ex tent, and current state of preservation of these scenes have been misconstrued in previous literature. In their Topographical Bibliography, Porter and Moss indicate that scenes from the "Book of Aker" (= the ''Aker Group" in the present study) occur on 263 the south and west sides of a side room that branches off from the northwest corner of the main pillared hal1.

During a survey of this chamber that I conducted in 2008, the room in quesrion was found to be utterly devoid of decoration, all worked surfaces having fallen from the friable bedrock. The correct room in which the Book of the Earth scenes occur (indicated in fig. 2.23) does nOt appear on Porter and Moss's map. The smal l chamber extends from the north wall of a short co rridor that connects the preceding stairway to the sunken courtyard. A shaft in the northeast corner of th e room descends to a additional subterranean cham ber (also unrecorded in PM). whose decoration and function rem ain , at present, unknown. With regard to the decoration of the un -

numbered chamber. Piankoff noted only thar: Malheureusement la rombe esc ensablee. Neanmo ins, sur une des parois d'une piece, Amiqujn£s en 1942, rai cru voir des scenes qui rappelaienr ceUes du Livre d'Aker.U-I

ademi deblayee par Ie Service des

Although Piankoff was correct in his identificarion of matetial from the Aker Group. he failed to note the presence of an additional Earth tableau (sce ne 77) or the curved concluding representation, adapted from the Book of Caverns, on the left-hand wall (scene 22). The concl uding representation for (h e Earth scenes mirrors a sec-

ond concluding representation, adapred from the Amduat, which appears on the opposite wall (also unrecorded in PM). The symmetrical pairing of the Caverns and Amduat concluding scenes follows a pattern established already in the tomb ofPedamenopet (§2.5.10) and partially replicated in the tomb ofMutirdis (§2.5.11). However, the placement of the Earth/Caverns and Amduat scenes on the western (left) and eastern (right) side walls, respectively, reverses (he orientation found in (hose earlier tombs. In addition, the occurrence of Book of the

Earth tableaux on the rear wall of Padineith's chamber is only otherwise paralleled in the tomb of Ramesses VI (§2.5.6) . As in that tomb, the shifting of scenes co the rear wall may have resulted from alterarions to the originally planned dimensions of the chamber.

263. PM I, pan 1, 302; walls 14 and 15 on the map on p. 296. 264. Piankolf 1953. 70.

54

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

N

\

o o o

o o o o

Fig. 2.23. TT197 tomb plan (walls with BE marked as 'X'; after PM I, 1:196), The eastern stairway and side room with Earth scenes have been added to the plan by the author and are not to scale. Reproduced by permission of the Griffith Institute.

2.5.14 Horn,', (Saqqara, Lepsius 23)'" Chamber A: Rear wall: Textual parallels:

scenes; fWO texts (ch. 6, §6. 15) 5, 6 (app. 2, plate 33) Ramesses VI, Khonsumes, Pedamenopet (app. 3, plates 16-17) fWO

The funerary monument of Horiria, who served under the Saite kings Neko II, Psamtek II, and Apries,'" includes the latest known attestation of the Book of the Earth on the walls of a tomb and the first such use at the site of Saqqara (fig. 2.24).'" Two scenes from the "Aker group"'" occur on the west wall of room A, opposite the entrance passage. The placement of th ese scenes on a wall oriented cardinally west may be compared to the

arrangement found in the tomb ofPadineith (§2.5.13).'" The other tableaux surrounding this group all derive

265. See Buongarzone 1998; Lepsius 1842-45.280; 1897, 175-77. The study by Bresciani and Pernigotti, La tomba di Horiraa, cited as "in preparation" in PM iII, part 2, 588, has yet to appear. 266. Buongarzone 1998, 43. 267. Hornung 1999a. 96. Scenes from the Book of me Earth would cominue Persian period and beyond (see §2.7, below).

to

appear on private sarcophagi and coffins through the

268. See ch. 5, §5.4. 269. Note mat the corresponding Padineith tableaux begin on the northlrear wall a.nd continue onto the west/left wall.

ARCHITECTURE

A

55

l

Fig. 2.24. Lepsius 23 (Saqqara) tomb plan (wall with BE marked as 'X'; after Lepsius 1897, 1:175).

from the Book of the Dead,z71l while the Aat ceiling was decorated with vultures, stars, and the name of the

deceased.271

§2.6 The Symbolic Significance of the Ramesside Sarcophagus Chamber as aMet and Divine Birth Station As discussed above,'" the decoration of royal burial chambers in the Ramesside period exhibits typically a cyclical arrangement, organized along a minor axis that lies perpendicular to the major (descending) axis of the tomb, where the decoration is predominantly linear. The royal sarcophagus was placed at the intersection of the major and minor axes, such that the king's body might serve as the literal focal point and nexus for the cosmographic narrative unfolding along the monumenes walls and ceilings. The characteristic architectural features of the Ramesside sarcophagus chamber (symmetrically opposed, arching sidewalls; vaulted roof; central sarcophagus depression), in conjunction with its celestial and chthonic decorative programs. served to recreate the mythological locale in which Re and Osiris unite in the depths of the Underworld, as well as ,he akhet through which rejuvenated sun27J passes each evening and morning. The combination of these twO aspects of the nocturnal solar journey-the deepest, central point of the Duat and the transitional boundary of the akhet-invires comparison with the various programmatic concluding

me

270. 271. 272. 273.

Buongarwne 1998,43, wirh reproductions in Ltpsius 1842-45,281. u:psius 1897, 177. §2.4, text at nn. 82-84. By extension, of course, also the transfigured spirit of the deceased king.

56

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

representations found in rhe Undetworld Books. The mythological significance of those scenes is threefold, summarizing the most important aspects of the solar cycle: death in the west. travel through the underworld for the purpose of uniting with Osiris at the midpoint point of the DUflt, and rebirth in the east. 2H In a very real sense, the Ramesside sarcophagus chamber serves as a SOrt of "concluding representation" for the tomb itself. a microcosmic summary of the sun's perpetual death and rebirth. The various Books of the Earth, as the conventional designation implies. illustrate the chehonic aspect of this solar cycle. The organization of the books' scenes, as attested from the version of Merneptah through that of Ramesses VI, reflectS a vertical movement through the Underworld. in which the sun progresses downward from the moment of sunset in the west, represented by the dome-sh aped upper register of the left wall,m then upward toward the moment of sunrise in the east, represented by the dome-shaped upper register on the right wall. 276 The critical moment of sunrise appears as a vertically oriented concluding representation, which unfolds symmetrically from the center of the uppermost register on the right, replicating to a greater or lesser extent the domed shape of the wall itSelf.= The inclusion of either an astronomical ceiling or the so-called Books of the Sky, in various permutations, provides the expected celestial counterpart, through a symmetrical bipartition of the ceiling into the nonhern and southern heavens above the western and eastern mountains of the horizon , represented by the sidewalls.m The final element in this architectOnic microcosm. the royal sarcophagus, lies within a sunken depression between the dome-shaped sidewalls, in a position corresponding to that of the solar disc in the 3t1. t-hieroglyph (Qj), effectively recreating the perpetuum mobile'" of the solar cycle in stone, in order to assure the eternal afterlife of the king (fig. 5.25)."" This new "akhet-sryle" sarcophagus chamber evolved over the course of the Nineteenth an d Twentieth Dynasties. standing in marked contrast to th e "Amduat-sryle" burial chambers of the Eighteenth Dynasty.2S! Two

274. Horn ung 1981,220. 275. I.e. , "left" from the modern perspective, looking into the tomb; for the Egyptian directional terminology and its associations with left and right, see n. 74, above. 276. This vertica1 progression further distinguishes the Books of the Earth from earlier Underworld Books, which generally depict a horizontal progress through the Underworld (with exceptions, e.g., the fourth and fifth hours of the Amduat, for which see Hoffmann 1998, 29- 31). With regard to the Books of the Earth, note that, while motion between the registers progresses vertically, the sun's course within a given register often follows a horizontal path (for the horizontal progression of scenes in the tomb ofRamesses VI, see Abirz 1989c, 139-4 1), espeCially in those scenes that include (he solar barque (e.g., scenes 3, 20). Other scenes, e.g., those featuring the elevation of the solar disc by giant arms (scenes 25- 27), exhibit a symmetrical orga.nization of figures and probably represent vertical movement within (or between) the register(s). In a few cases (e.g., scenes 1, 5), the vertical and horizontal elements are combined. 277. Th e concluding images in the tombs ofMerneptah, Tawosrec, and Ramesses III (scene 22) completely fill their upper registers and therefore mimic the domed shape of the wall exactly (see app. 2, plate 3, with discussion in ch. 5, §5.3). The corresponding images fro m the tomb of Ramesses VI exh ib it the expected symmetry and central placement bur do not fill the upper wall surface, although the arching cascade of alternating discs and stars (scene 68) echoes the domed shape of the wall on which it appears. 278. Cf. the use of Nut imagery on the lids of royal sarcophagi, which, in the Ramesside period, were also frequen dy paired with scenes from the book of the earth on the interior or exterior sides (§2.8, below); a similar tradition can, of cou rse, be traced back as far as the early Middle Kingdom, where we find the Book ofTwo Ways on the floorboards of private coffins paired with celestial images on the undersides of the coffin lids, for which see Lesko 1972, 2-7; Hermsen 1991 , 236. 279. On the use of this term, see Derchain 1975-76. The concept of the solar perpetuum mobik is implici t in a host of cosmological images, above all, the programmatic concludi ng representations of the Underworld Books, for which see Hornung 1981, 217-26; with additional comments in Darnell 2004, 36-37. Also note Hermsen 1991 , 114-15, who discusses the application of the p"puuum mobile to the Book of Two Ways, as a transitional form from the cosmography of the Old Kingdom. 280. Cf. Wilkinson 1994b, 70: "In the late.r Ramesside burials. the lower reaches of the tomb-and particularly the burial chamberwere decorated to represent the complete cycle of the sun in both its diurnal and nocturnal phases. Thus the books of the heavens were inscribed on the ceiling of the sarcophagus chamber and the texts and illustrations from the books of the earth and underworld were placed on the walls. n 28 1. The major, salient characteristics of the earlier Amduat-sryle chambers being 1) a long axis which follows that of the preceding, descending corridor; 2) placement of the royal sarcophagus perpendicular to the long axis, near the terminal end of the chamber; 3) a Rat

ARCHITECTURE

57

ICeiling: Astronomical or paired Books of the Sky I VV2~~~----------

Left wall: Book of the Earth, from sunset

Right wall: Book of the Earth, to sunrise

Sarcoph agus chamber with cycli cal decoration, organized along the

m'em .." '" -

'''@

Sarcophagus pit in the lower Duat; king's corpse equated with rejuvenated sun

Descending corridor with linear deco ration,

organized along the major axis (El - Wl) See discussion with caveats at §2.4 Fig. 2.25. Ideal organization of the Ramesside "akhet-style" burial chamber as a perpetuum mobile model of the cosmos.

of the most characteristic architectural elements of the "akhet-style" chamber- the arched sidewalls and curved

ceiling- appear already in the Theban tomb of Seti I, contemporary with the fitst occuttence of the Book of the Earth in mat icing's cenotaph at Abydos. Seti's successor, Ramesses II, then provided an important intermediate

step through the combination of the arched burial chamber with the second pillared hall into a single room. The final architectural element of [his new design-a centrally located, sunken sarcophagus emplacement-appears first in the tomb of Ramesses II's son Merneptah , contemporary with the introduction of th e Book of the Earth

into the decorative program of the royal burial chamber irself.u, The full complement of architectural and iconographi c features that define th is new style of burial chamber appear for the last time in the tomb of Ramesses VI. Beginning with Ramesses VII, we find a pronounced deemp hasis on the vettical transit of the sun along the minor axis. This change is particularly evident in the 90 0 ro-

tation of the vaulted ceiling, which now ran parallel to the major tomb axis. As a result, the sidewalls of the burial

ceiling decorated with a field of stars; and 4) use of the Amduat and Litany of Rc as the primary decorative motifs on walls and ceiling (for additional discussion , see Roberson 2008). 282. Note that the corresponding celestial decoration-the double sky, as represented originally by lhe so-called astronomical ceilingappeared already on the arched burial chamber ceiling ofSeti I.

58

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OFTHE EARTH

chamber assumed a purely rectilinear form , whose physical shape no longer replicated the curved mountains of the Jtl.l-hieroglyph.'~ Significantly, the tOmb of Ramesses VII also employed a unique, horizontally oriented concluding representation in the style of the earlier Underworld Books, which was placed at the far right end of the upper register on the right wall. The shift of emphasis in the Book of the Earth from vertical to horizontal movement through the Underworld, provides a critical. intermediate step in the development of nooroyal Books of the Earth, in particular compilatio ns employing the "Aker gro up" (§5.4), from the Third Intermediate period and later. The emergence of the Rarnesside "akhet-style" sarcophagus chamber may. in some cases, reflect a broader cultural association of (re)birrh with the magical recreation of (he horiwn in miniature. Josef Wegner. on the basis of his analysis of a functional birth brick recovered from a late Middle Kingdom settlement context at Abydos, has argued persuasively that the paired birth bricks upon which a travailing mother delivered her baby should be understood as functionally analogo us to the akhet.W, The mother, who knelt amp this miniature horizon, assumed the role of Hathor as she gave birth to the newborn child, equated with the emerging sun god.28S A similar mythological constellation of solar rebirth is known to have extended to temple architecture, in which the pylon gateway (and the temple itself) served as a man-made akher, marking the point of the deity's emergence from the primordial darkness of the sanctuary in to the open courtyard and beyond during festival processions. 286 Some scholars have also suggested that the horizon symbolism of the main temple gateway might reflect the biological apparatus of birth itself, vis-a-vis the body of the sky goddess.''' Just as the temple was the birthplace of the god, so were the tomb and, more specifically, the sarcophagus hall the sites of the king's rebirrh. 188 It may, therefore, be reasonable to suggest that the architectural and iconographic symbolism of the Ramcsside "akhet-chamber" overlapped to a certain degree with the magical apparatus incorpo rated for the protection actual newbo rns. m In an Egyptian "birthing station," the travailing mother, equated with the sky goddess H atho r, supports her weight atop stacked bricks. The practical function of the bricks in expediting the birth process was magically strengthened through their association with the horizon and the sun god's own rebirth. The Ramesside "akhet-charnber" may have operated according to similar mythological

283. Nso see §2.5.8, above, for comments on the rotation of the vaulted ceiling in the tomb of Ramesses IX and the corresponding movement of the domed walls to the front and rear of the burial chamber. 284. Wegner 2009b, 479-80. For a text-based comparison of birth bricks with the magical bricks employed in royal and private tombs of the New Kingdom, see also Roth and Roehrig 2002, 129-39; aspects of these practices probably survived through the early Christian period in Egypt, for which see Crum 1942. 285. Wegner 2009b, 479-80, with discussion of Hamor's role as divine U[erus on pp. 483-84. For the laner equation , cf. the epithet nb.l 1}/p.t, "Lady of the uterus/vulva," discussed in Pinch 1993, 155-56; Brunner 1970, 30-33; and Vandier 1965, 108-10. For the mythology of the solar child, equated with the deceased, see also H. Altenmuller 1965, 1:82-86. 286. Thus, e.g., Richards 1999.90; Shafer 1997,8; Finnestad 1997.220; Baines 1976, 10. 287. Shafer 1997, 5. n. 38; The connection between temple architecture and the body of the (divine) mother as Hathor finds support in the contemporary textual sources; cE, for example, a birth spell from P. Leiden I, 348 (Nineteenth Dynasty), "Open for me. I am the one whose offering is large, the builder who built the pylon for Hathor, lady of Dendera, who lifts up in order that she may give birth. It is Hathor, [he lady of Dendera who is giving birth" (translation after Borghours 1971. 30; sec now additional discussion in Wegner 2009b. 479-80); also see comment~ regarding the numerous feminine terms for "'cavern," "coffin." "corpse." among others. employed, perhaps, in connection with the concept of "the tomb as womb" and locus of tebirth in Onsdne 1995, 73-74. 288. See. e.g., Richards 1999,90. 289. ). Wegner. personaJ communication (2006). Cf. [he apparent use of Unde twO rid iconography on a so-called magic wand, designed for the protection of mothers and newborns, from the later Middle Kingdom, discussed in Roberson 2009a, 427-45.

ARCHITECTURE

59

principals, substituting Nut for Hathor,'~ but retaining the concept of the sky goddess who gives birth to the solar child atop the mountains of the hotiwn, equated now with the side walls of the tomb itself'" This apparent emphasis on the physical process of birth might also help to explain the orientation of the Nut tableau relative to the royal sarco phagi in the tombs of Rarnesses IV, Ramesses VII, and Ramesscs IX. In each of those monuments, the narrow dimensions of the sarcophagus hall necessitated a ninety-degree rotation of the celestial representations on the ceilings, such that the goddess Nut's head faced the entrance of the burial chamber. In each case, the sarcophagus was rotated in the opposite direction, such that the king's head pointed toward the chamber's rear wall. Wilkinson suggests that the rotation of the kings' sarco phagi served to place their heads closer to the moment of solar rebirth and further from the point of death.'" If, however, the sarcophagus chamber represented a divine birthing stacion with its attendant biological symbolism. then we might suggest that the primary mythological consideration was to ensure that the king emerge in the manner of a healthy. nonbreach birth, which is to say, head first from the womb of his mother, Nut. 193

§2.7

EXCURSUS: THE SARCOPHAGI

A substantial number of Late period and early Ptolemaic sarcophagi include an array of texts and images that derive from nearly the entire spectrum of cosmological books used to decorate the earlier royal tombs in the Valley of the Kings. Colleen Manassa has now completed a thorough study of the Underworld compositio ns that appear on these Late period sarcophagi.1'J· Her work supersedes, to a large degree, a number of earlier, often faulty publications'" and helps to fill a considerable gap in our knowledge of cosmography in the Late period. The interests of the present study concern only those sarcophagi that include excerpts from the Book of the Earth. This short excursus, therefore, aims only to outline the basic organization and decorative plans of these "Earth sarcophagi." From the reign ofSiptah, at the end of the Nineteenth Dynasty, through the Twentieth, a number of royal sarcophagi include a group of three scenes from the primary Book of the Earth corpus on each of their twO long sides.296 These scenes occur alongside two additional tableaux, which are attested only on the sarcophagi.w

290. On the relarionship between Nut and Hathor as complimentary aspects of the mother goddess (together with Neith and Isis), see Billing 2002, 39-41. This relationship becomes quite explicit in representations from later periods, e.g., the Roman period scene from the New Year Chapd of the Hamor Temple at Dendera, which explicitly connects the sun's birth from the thighs of Nut with an image of Hathor on the horizon (Daumas 1951, plate 1; Mariette 1870-80, 5:place C; also see the discussion of the Dendera scene in Wegner 2009b, 472-73; and Billing 2002. 219). 291. On the transformation of the burial chamber into a divine birthing station, see also Roth and Roehrig 2002, 129-33, who suggest that that the frequent pairing of so-called magical bricks around royal and private sarcophagi of the New Kingdom might also relate to their use as birth bricks for the rebirth of the deceased individual. 292. Wilkinson 1994a, 86. 293. If correct, this aspect of the king's solar rebirth cannor be demo nstrated consistently in the other tombs under consideration. Thus, for instance, Ramcsses VI oriented his sarcophagus lengthwise along the major tomb axis, petpendicular to the Nut images in his sarcophagus halL A si milar orientation appears also in the tomb of Ramesses III although, in that case, (he lack of ceiling decoration might have decreased the need for emphasis on a "biologically correct" birthing process. On the Olhcr hand, in the tomb of Merneptah, which employs an astronomical ceiling rather than images of the goddess Nut, the sarcophagus appears with the head end pointed notionally "east," toward the right-hand wall, where we might reasonably expect an implicit association with the hindquarters of the sky goddess. 294. Manassa 2007. 295. Most notably, Maspero 1914-39; von Bergmann 1885; Mysliwiec 1981. 296. Hornung 1999a, Ill; 1990b, 121; Dodson 1986a, 197; 1986b, 35. See ch . 5, scenes 8, 12, and 52. Also note that the lids of a number of these sarcophagi (Siptah, TawosretlSetnakht, Ramesses III , and Ramesses rv) include a variant of an additional Earth tableau (Piankoff 1953, 44, n. 2; Hornung 1990b, 120; see ch. 5, scene 56). 297. See ch. 5, scenes 41 and 57.

60

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

Manassa has suggested that these additional SCeneS probably also derive from the Book of the Earth.'" Probably during the reign of Semakh r,299 an additional scene from the primary corpus begins ro occur on the foot end. JOO Ramesses III would later shift this scene to the interior head end ,301 while the correspo nding foot end was decorated with a condensed versio n of the first hour of the Book of Gat~s. 302 Already during the Saice period,30J variations of the Ramesses III tem plate. inscribed once more on the exterio r of the sarcophagus, begin (Q appear in private contexts, becoming particularly popular Over the course of the Thirtieth Dynasty (app. 2, plates 36-37).~ In addition, a handful of othet Late petiod and Greco-Roman sarcophagi and coffins include individual Book of the Earth scenes,30S which are paralleled in the primary corpus, but do not adhere co the decorative templates of any known, royal sarcophagi from the Ramesside age. Unfortunately, the lack of ptimary publications for most of the Ramesside sarcophagi does nor yet allow for a detailed analysis of the their scenes and texts, However, available line drawings and hand copies of the sarcophagi of Ramesses III and Ramesses IV,"" though not withou t their Raws,'" provide ample mate rial fat comparison with their Late period counrerparts, and have been chosen as a representative sample for the later New Kingdom (figs. 26-27, below).'" Variations on the Ramesside "Earth sarcophagus" become extremely popular in the Late period, with at least twelve exemplars currently identified."" These include the satcophagi of Harsiese I (Cairo temp. n . 21: I I: 16: 15),'" Harsiese 2 (Cai ro temp. 28:5:25:5),'" Pirkap (Btitish Museum EA 66),'" Djedhor I (Cairo CG

298. Manassa 2007, 441. 299. Dodson 1986a, 197, n. 4. 300. Ch. 5. scene 26. 301. Un like the other sarcophagi under consideration here, that of Ramesses III included all of its Earth scenes on the interior sides (Dodson 1986b, 35). 302. For the original Book of Gates tab leau. see H ornung 1979-80. 2:29--44; this scene appears on royal sarcophagi as part of the actual Book of Gates as early as the reign ofSeti I (p. 32); for the late sarcophagus variants and their New Kingdom precursors, see Manassa 2007,21-29. 303. A partial parallel occurs on a Dyo. 26 sarcophagus belonging to a certain Harsiese (Manassa 2007, 20; see list of sources, below). 304. Hornung 1990b, 122. 305. See ch. 5, scenes 2, 5, and 38. 306. Selectio ns of text from Ramcsses Ill 's sarcophagus appear in von Bergmann 1885. 131-65; for Ramesses IV, see Hornung I 990b, 120-27; also see following nOte. 307. Seyffarth's early hand copy of the interior of Ramesses Ill's sarcophagus (Seyffarth 1826, plate 17) includes the captions labeling the various figures, bue none of the accompanying narrative text. Lefebure's line drawings of the sarcophagus ofRamcsses IV are considerably morc detailed (Lefebure 1886-90, 3:plates 28-31), but lack the lower right corner of the of the foot end, which was apparently res[Qred to its original position sometime between 1971 and 1991 (Darnell 2004, 153, n. 522). 308. The corpus of Ramesside "Earth sarcophagi" also includes the sarcophagus of Siptah (described cursorily with photographs of the lid and one long side in Burton 1916, figs. 2 and 5), as well as the fragmentary coffers ofTawosretiSernakhr (Dodson 1986a, 197), and Ramesses Vl. Edwin Brock and his team have now reconstructed the laner sarcophagus from in situ fragments within KV9 (ARCE canurlJation proj~ct brochurt, May 13 2004), the full publication of which should provide much additional information regarding the chronological development of this sarcophagus type in the late Ramesside period. 309. Hornung 1990b, 122, notes that "Wcieere befinden sich ... sehr wahrscheinlich noch in weiteren Sarnmlungen." The lise of sarcophagi given here follows Hornung, with additions from Manassa 2007, 16-20. 3 10. Manassa 2007, 20. Note that the Arabic numerals "1," "2," eK., have been used in the present study to distinguish similarly named private individuals, but are not meant to reflect any additional familial or temporal relationship. 3 11. Manassa 2007,17-18. 312. Sharpe 1837--41,40-41; Manassa 2007, 16, n. 25.

ARCHITECTURE

61

29302) ,''' Djedhor 2 (Cairo CG 29307),'" Djedhor 3 (Louvre 08),'" Udjashu (Cairo CG 29317),'" Wennefer (New York MMA 11 .154.1 AB),'" Nesshutefnut (Vienna I),'" Nesisut (British Museum EA 30),'" and Ankhhap (Cairo CG 29301),'" as well as the wooden coffin of Kheneshap (Cairo CG 29323) .'" With the exception of the Twenty-Sixth Dynasty exemplar of Harsiese, all of the preceding Late period sarcophagi date from the Persian period to the Ptolemaic period. m In addition to the sources outlined above, individual Earth scenes also occur on the sarcophagus of Usermaatte (Cairo CG 29309; Geneva MAH 18050, 27806; New York MMA 04.5.539),'" and on the sarcophagus lids ofTjahorpta (Cairo CG 29306)''' and Nakhtnebef (Berlin 7).'" The latest known Book of the Earth scene occurs on a wooden coffin fragment from the early Roman period, of which only a single long side remains (Marseille 260) .'" The sarcophagi belonging ro the traditions established under Siptah, Ramesses III, and other New Kingdom rulers, correspond to Manassa's "Type I" decorative program,327 which that scholar identifies as a hirherco unrecognized Underworld composition relating to "resurrection through decomposition/deconsrfUcrion."m However, desp ite their many shared features, the Type I sarcophagus template also exhibit significant variation already in [he Ramesside period.J29 Figures 2.26-27 illustrate two such variations.1:lO The orientation of a given scene (left or right) has been indicated with arrows; scenes marked with a double arrow exhibit a symmetrical

313. Maspero 1914-39, 1:78-82; Manassa 2007, plates 4-5, 8-9, 14-15, 32-33; I photographed and collated the texts and images ofCG 29302 in the summer of200B. 314. Maspero 1914-39,2:9-13, with photographs of the relevant scenes in plates 2-3; I photographed and collated the texts and images in 200B (see app. 2, plates 36--37). This is the much-discussed dwarf, pl-wn-Ipt=! m4 nlr sllj see AiiG, 52-54, §§118-121); this pronunciation survives into Coptic as ep __ Ll=c-J

qrr.l=Sn

qrr.l·f

"their cavern"

"his cavern"

co\.9

cols.I4-15

~8),

..,~~

!.IJ. wt

bl.wl

"co rpses"

"corpses"

Word-final occurrences, as illustrated above, are the mOSt common, but initiapo and mediaPl examples also occur. Although some of the interplay between 0 and may have been due ro archaizing rendencies within the rext,31 or to simple graphic confusion from the hieratic,33 certain words appear to show the effect of contemporary phonological change. For example, n{r, "god," and n{r.l, "goddess," almost always employ 0 as a phonetic compliment, presumably reflecting their then-current pronunciarion. J4 In a small handful of instances, 15 n[r utilizes ~ as its phonetic complimenr. These cases may represent a deliberate attempt to replicate an older pronunciation." On the other hand, they may simply reflect the sign's "weakened" use, as an allograph of I. Despite the high incidence of interchange between 0 and a few examples of the old value { do Still occur. The moSt frequent of these is the word W{S, " to lift," which exhibits a clear preference for the rope-hobble variant ~=:L 17 This sign. with its "diacritical tick," appears to be used exclusively in words that preserve the ori3s ginal! sound. In addition to its frequent use with WIS, ~ also occurs once with the second person dependent pronoun [W, "yoU."l9 Whether by accident or design, this singular orthography.o serves to differentiate !W from the impersonal pronoun tw, which is otherwise indistinguishable from the second person form , when spelled with the more usual grapheme~. In addition to the palatal> dental shifts observable in the plosive consonants, coalescence among the dentals themselves also occurs. Rarely, C'::l is employed for I, as in the following:

=

=

30. E.g. R6.A2.3.33.39, col. 6: ~:,~, Immw. 31. E.g. R6.B.4. 5.66, col,. 1- 2, M!!'i?, ~Imy.l. 32. See GEe', § 19, Ob,. 2. 33. See LEG. 7. § 1.11 ; Pad",b", 1981 , 109. 34. Perhaps already comparable ro Coptic NOYT€ and NTWP€, respectively (see Edgerton 1947, 2, 5-6; Cerny 1976, Ill ; Satzinger 1997,37; Darnell 2004, 62, n. 120); similar "phonetic" spellings also occur later (see, e.g., de Meulenaere 1994,66-69; Jansen-Winkeln 1996, 26 [c]; and Manuelian 1994, 71, nn. 225 and 226). Note that nIr. WI, "goddesses," is very ofren spelled I.:ql~, in the Book ofthe Earth and elsewhere, e.g., in the eleventh hour of the Amduac (Hornung 1987-94, 3:763). The inclusion of the medial y grapheme, ~~, may serve to indicate the preservation of syl!able-initial r following the preceding stressed, long vowel of the femin ine plural (I.e., "!:}n-t5-c:}[r]/; see Edgerton 1947, 5-6;jLEG, 35-36); alternately, the medial y may simply reAect the phenomenon of sign redundancy common to texts of the New Kingdom and later (see pp. 33-34; LEG, §1.6; and also see below, §3.6). 35. Four examples: R6.B.4.5.G8, col. 3; R6.A2.2.49.37, cols. 3 and 6; and R6.A2.3.33.39, cols. 3-4 . 36. Speaking with regard to texts of the Twenty-Sixth Dynasty, Manuelian 1994, 67, characterizes the use of ::::=. for 0 as a hypercorrection, reRecting "conscious bur inaccurate attempts by the Saite scribes to return to 'original' consonants." 37. The word occurs founeen times with the ticked variant (VI4), versus only five times with the regular rope-hobble (VI3). Thc variant appears to derive from the sign's fo rm in hieratic (cf. Moller 1965, Of. 528; and see §3A, below). 38. GEGl, 523 V14; LEG, §1.II. Polotsky 1964, 14, §23, discusses some early examples of variant employed for t, the use of which persists through the latest stages of the language, with examples occurring in, e.g., Saitc, Ptolemaic, and Roman period Egyptian (see Manuelian 1994,71, n. 227; Fairman 1943, 244, nc. 294; Mecks 2004, 200 , §546). 39. R6.A.1.74.12, col. 6. 40. All other examples from the presenr corpus employ the regular form, ::::=..

=s

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

70

Ex. 4. Sarcophagus.!, col. 9

, Ib.!j > db.!j, "sandals"" This spelling of tb.tj with initial ~ occurs only on the Persian- and PtOlemaic-era sarcophagi:l The parallel sections from the sarcophagi of Ram esses III and Ramesses IV both employ initial 0." Two additional examples from Ramesses VI's Book of the Earth spell the same word once with initial 0 and once with ,he older

:=:::> « In Late Egyptian, alphabetic ~, m, occasionaJiy appears as JINHNN\ , n, and vice versa. ~5 The shift from m to n occurs only once in the present corpus. 46 The corresponding n to m interchange. on the other hand, appears more often:

Ex. 5. R6.A.3. 16.24 , cols. 7-8

7a~ ! ffir~,':~! ~~~~ = ~~~ '. wj=jj tJpr(=w) ms. wj n fjprj (liP m dm,.!j=jj "his two arms having become the

twO

offspring of Khepri. who is pleased on account of his two wings."

Ex. 6. R9.B.1.29.6, cols. 18- 19 ~

= ==

@ 0 n~ @ J!"'"~6~F~~

";;"'...6-n~ ~

~ ~I~~I r I

'tJ=f mj 'a-tn n ntf w' jm=ln "his akh being like your akh, because he is one with you." Ex. 7. R6.B.4.6.69, rows 1-2

~ I ~ I~

I:: ~~a!§,!~ ~~~~

{jd. w (])n ntr. wI jmj. w(/) mr. w n W -f:lr-,tJ.!j "What is said by the goddesses, who are in the canal, to Re-Hor-Akhti,"

41. Older [b.t, e(c. Wb. V, 36 1>indicates that spellings with initial t and d are characteristic of the New Kingdom and later; cf. Coptic Tooye (Cerny 1976, 199; Wb V, 247). 42. Examples with the more traditional spelling ~8ij occur elsewhere on the same sarcophagi; c( Manassa 2007, pis. 38 (initial t) and 40 (initial d). 43 . Wb V, 361, ind icates that spellings with initial r occur from the Middle Kingdom and later, while spelli ngs with initial d occu r from the New Kingdom and later. 44. Scene 26, Ramesses VI, caption I, and R6.B.1. 38.45, col. 9, respectively. 45. Sec Erman 1933, §606; LEG, §1.7;}LEG, 37; this m > n interchange occurs also in neo-Middle Egyptian inscriptions of the Third Intermediate period and later Uansen-Wi nkeln 1996,35, §54, and I n, §271; Manuclian 1994, 76); in the G reco-Roman period , this phonetic shift becomes a regular feature of the Ptolemaic script (Fairmann 1943, 225, nr. 173, 226, nr. 176; 1945, 64--65, 92; P. Wilson 1997 , 392, 487); the same phenomenon manifests in Coptic as the very common shift N > M, which occurs before nonsyllabic n and M (Steindorf 1951, 24 , §30; Layton 2000, 20-21 , §21). For evidence pointi ng to the interchange of m and n already in the Old Kingdom, seeAaG, 55, § 123. 46. Tjahorpta.2, col. 3: ~ for m!)ry n (thus, also Manassa 2007, 400).

71

ORTHOGRAPHY

In example 5, the "two arms" referred to are the limbs of the sun god as they transform into the wings of his rejuvenated, scarab form: 7 Logically. therefore, the first ~ makes little sense as the m of predication (Le., *"having become offspring, as Khepri") because rhe arms have only become a part of the god, not the god himself. On the other hand, a locative interpretation, "in Khepri ," cannot be ruled OUt. ~8 Tf, however, [he reading proposed above is correcr:9 then example 5 represents a notable exception to rule that the genidval adjective nU) was not subject to the n > m interchange. 5O Example 6 can also be interpreted in one of two ways. On the one hand, the proceeding nrj could be could read with the pronoun, yielding the Late Egyptian spelling (m)ntf." On the other hand, the initial also be interpreted as an archaic use of the preposition n, with the meaning "because," introducing a nominal sentence headed by an independent pronoun. 52 Since other examples of independent pronouns exhibits the traditional, earlier Egyptian orchography,sl and given the Book of the Earth's preference for archaic grammatical S4 constructions in general, the present study has followed the latter interpretation. Example 7 is the least ambiguous of the three, and can only be interpre,ed as the agentive preposition (j)n. " The use of ~ in this case is also noteworthy, in that it distinguishes agentive (j)n from the following dative n.

me

==

==

3 .3.2 Omission of Un pronounced Consonants In general. the Book of the Earth is fairly consistent in its preservation of the full consonantal roOt struccure of earlier Egyptian. The trend in later Egyptian toward the loss or weakening of consonants in syllable-final position, in particular n, r, and (,56 has been kept to a minimum throughout the present co rpus. Neve rtheless, occasional omissions do occur, very likely under the influence of contemporary pronunciation, as shown by the following: Ex. 1. R6.B.4.6.69, row 1

IT41 J~ 4w pen) j,bt.t "this eastern mountain"

47. See ch. 5, scene J 6. 48. The wings of the scarab, when not in use. appear to rcs[ within the beede's carapace (actually beneath the hardened elytra wing coverings; see O'Connor 1985, 4, fig. I). However, the accompanying vignette clearly depicts the wings in their extended nate, arguing against such an interpretation. 49. Piankoff 1953,51 ("procreations de Khepri") and Hornun g 1972,471 ("Kinder des Chepri") also appear to have interpreted the sign in question as the genitival adjective.

50. LEG, 6. 51. CoptiC NTOq; for the Late Egyptian independent pronoun forms. see}LEG, 165; LEG, §2. I. 1. 52. For which, see AaG, 388, §757 (f); Malaise and Winand 1999, 594, ex. 1614; and GEG3, § 154, who notes that this construction was limited to "early religious compositions" already by the Middle Kingdom. 53. The 3cp form ntsn, as opposed to Late Egyptian (m)nrw, occurs in RJ.A. 1.69. ! ,col. 1; R6.B.3.26.61, cols. 2-3; Tjahorpta.2 , cols. 12-13. 54. Thus, also Piankoff 1953, 69. translating, "car il est un parmi vallS." 55. GEG'· §168. 56. Sc=e LEG. 6, §1.9;}LEG, 35-36; Jansen-Winkeln 1996,29, §40 (f), and 37, §59; Manuelian 1994,73-74. Note that omission of word final r occurs already with cenain verbs in the Pyramid Texts O. AJlen 1984, 29, §52d--e). Similarly, the fc=minine marker 1 appears to have been recognized as a weak, hc=nce potemially omissible, element already by the originators of hieroglyphic script, although the actual loss of the feminine marker from nouns in the absolute state does seem to occur in texts prior to the Sixth Dynasty (Edgerton 1940,

479-80).

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

72

Ex.2a-b. R6.B. 1.5 1.47, col. 2 ~~

1...Jj

d;.t (see Darnell 2004, 66 and n. 139; GEG3, 487, N14; Wb V, 415; 1976.178; CCD, 392,). 64. See, for example, PT §§5b, JSla, 282a, 390b. 65. R6.A2.2.18.36, col. 8 (with feminine marker t); R7.A.2.12.S, col. 3. 66. See, e.g., Barta 1994, 123, who subsumes all occurrences of "Underworld" under the transliteration d;.t. 67. For the substi tution of 1A1 for [&, see §3.5, below; for superfluous final t, see §3.6.2.

Cerny

74

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

It seems unlikely that these spellings were intended to reRect the pronunciation of the late Ramesside period in which they were copied. On the contrary, the consistent use of the archaizing, split-tailed wi-lasso 68 appears to represent a deliberate attempt to recreate the full, original root structure, dw;.t. The inclusion of medial w in examples 1 through 4 casts some doubt on the applicability of the conventional transliteration dJ.t to logographic spellings encountered elsewhere in the Book of the Earth. Other alphabetic 69 orthographies that reproduce the full consonantal skeleton of dWl.t occur also in other Underworld Books. In at least one such case, spellings of [he root dw] occur both with and without medial f\ within the same line of texr. ro Based on these alphabetic orthographies, the present study has employed the full transliteration, dwJ.t, except in those cases where the abbreviated spelling dJ.t has been indicated specifically."

§ 3.4

ADAPTATIONS FROM THE HIERATIC

Signs whose forms have been modified under the influence of the hieratic script are common in the Book of the Earth." In some cases, the scribes appear to exploit ambiguity from the hieratic deliberately, as a means of developing alternate orthographies that may relate back to or otherwise compliment the meaning of the word itself.n However, this practice is evident primarily in the cryptographic corpus.;4More often, such variants appear to represent unintentional copying errors:

Ex. 1. R6.B. 1.68.52, cols. 8-9 I I c:. I 111.-. .........

III

j j ...... II

lll.-.~

68. Cf. the use of the "ticked" variant of the rope ~ hobble for archaic I, discussed in §3.3.I, above. The w~-Iasso with split tail occurs frequently in inscriptions from the later Old Kingdom, and becomes common in Dynas£)' II (Fischer 1968,8 1-82, nr. 10; with additionaJ examples from Dynasty 12 in Shaheen 1996, 89-90 and tables 2-3). Evidence for the use of the split-tailed variant as a deliberate archaism begins to appear already in the early Middle Kingdom, e.g., the tombs of Sekweskhet and Sahathoripy at Saqqara (reign of Amenemhet 0, where the sign in question occurs in conjunction with other forms that are more characteristic of the Old Kingdom, such as the tie-less book roll (Silverman 2000, 274). Similar spellings with w~ ~ lasso occur frequently in [he Pyramid Texts (four variations listed in HAwb, 1467). 69. E.g., =~e;, =·fY~*~, plus many similar variations, throughout the Book of Caverns (e.g., Piankoff 1942a, pIs. Ill, I, 3, 5, and 8, V, 5, VI. 2, 3. 4, and 6, 1944, pis. Xli. 4, 7-8, Xlll , 2, 4, 5, and 6, XlV, 8-9, XVI, 5, XVII, 1.2,5.8, XVIII , 2, XX. 3, 9, XXlII, 1- 2, XXIV, 3-4; XXXVII, 6; XLIV, 3, 8; XLVI , 9; LIII, 4; LXXI, 9; 1945, pis. CXXII, 1; and see following noce); likewise, in che third hour of the Book of Gates (Hornung 1979-80, 1:73, all sources except the sarcophagus of Seti 0 ; the eighth hour of the short Amduar (Hornung 1987-94,1:76, all sources); and from the long Amduar, first hour (p. 161, Ramesses VI only) and second hour (pp. 261, 265. 268, Ramesses VI only). Cf. also the cryptic orthographies ~=, dw~.t, "Duat," and ~~, dwnj(w), "denizen(s) of the DUal," from the Book of the So lar-Osirian Unity (Darnell 2004, 52 and plate 4c, 86 and place 7b, respectively, noting aJso a possible alternate reading of~ asjmn). 70. Piankoff 1944, place XLN, 3. 7 1. In addjtion to the cryptic orthography discussed in examples 3 and 4, above, cf. also H .B.l.3.1, col. 8, and H.B.I.3.2, cols. 6, II, and IS, which write 'Ie;, omining the medial aleph and substituting (/. < d (consonantal shift; sec §3.3.1; for this spelling, see P Wilson 1997, 1181). lhe reading d(w~).t may he confirmed by comparison with paraJlel text Kh.2.3.6, col. 8 (= H.B.1.3. 1, col. 8), which writes

*~. 72. Piankoff 1953, 2. Note that several texts from the Book of the Earth of Ramesses IX were in inscribed entirely in Hieratic, in a hand that is typical ofche lace Ramesside period (R9.B.1.29.6; R9.B.2.19.7-9; scene 19, Ramesses lX, captions 1-6; R9.B.2.36.1O; Hieratic originaJs reproduced in app. 2, pis. 15-17); in addition, the Book of the Earth of Ramesses VI includes twO individual Hieratic signs amid longer Hieroglyphic passages (R6.A.l.74.12, col. 6, waJking reed leaf, discussed below, §J4.1 , n. 88; and R6.A.2.66.23, coL 3, q in J}.qnw). 73. See below, §3.4.2 74. Darnell 2004, 32-34 who also notes that "In the Book of the C reation of the Solar Disc ... what might at first appear to be cryptographic is often no more than the influence of the hieratic original." For the cryptic texts from che present corpus, see below, §3.8 and ch. 6, §6.2.

...

ORTHOGRAPHY

75

6 n tp.J 6 n rd. wj=Jj "six belonging to his head, six belonging to his feet" The "six" refer to the hours depicted in the vignette as a semicircle of alternating discs and stars, which stretch from the head to the feet of the recumbent mummy of Re-Osiris. 7S The apparent pairing of "head" and "feet" supports Piankoff's interpretation of 0 I as a writing of 6) 1. 76 Tn New Kingdom hieratic, the sign representing a human head in profile often resembles the bread loaf I + stroke: "", or similar.71 This observation seems to provide the simpleSt explanation for the singular orthography of tp in the preceding example." Other inStances of hi era ric influence on the hieroglyphic text may be cited. Thus, for example, JINNN'iIt. occasionally replaces as a writing of the preposition r,79 while the latter sign occurs also in place of ~ and ~. 110 Similarly. the rectangular pool, which subStitutes occasionally for the eye, .a:I>," might also derive from a misreading of the hieratic original." The following paragraphs (§§4.4.1-3) examine three such adaptations, which occur with some frequency in the present corpus. Other infrequent or singular examples of hi era ric influence on the hieroglyphic

=,

text have been indicated in the individual texts' notes.

3.4.1 ~,from ~ The hieratic adaptation encountered most frequently in the Book of the Earth is the walking reed leaf, l for biliteral S3. This use stems from a similarity to the s, herdsman, ~, which is evident mainly in hieratic documents from the mid-Eighteenth, through the Twenty-First Dynasties." The interchange of the herdsman and walking reed leaf is characteristic primarily of the Book of the Earth of Ramesses VI." None of the other sources examined for the present study employ this variant orthography and examples outside of the Book of the Earth are rare.1S Despite the frequent use of the walking reed leaf for 51, alphabetic spellings featuring the SJ-duck, \-, appear slightly more often (see table 3.4.1, below). In addition, the herdsman, '111, also occurs occasionally with

75. See ch. 5. scene 68. 76. Piankoff 1953, 9, n. 8; followed by Hornung 1972, 431. 77. See Moller 1965. 2:nr. 79. 78. One might suggest mat the noun [P , "head," could have experienced a weakening of its final consonant, yielding a semi phonetic spelling '*I(P). as discussed in §3.3.2, above. However. if this were the case, then the noun's occurrence in the pronominal state with a following suffix would more likely have resulted in the preservation of the final consonanr, rather chan its omission (thus, e.g., CoptiC TATTPO, "mouth," from lf7, tP-rJ, "utterance," for which see Cerny 1976, 192); also cf. the similarly biconsonantal body pan term I)r, "face," which appears to retain its final consonant in both the absolute and pronominal states (Edgerton 1947, 14) 79. For the hieratic ambiguity of nand r, see Gardiner 1929, 54. 80. Cf Moller 1965, 20m,. 91 (r), 11 5 (d), ,nd 528 (j). 81. As the fi rst element in the divine name Ws}r on the sarcophagi of Ramesses III and Ramesses IV, as well as in the tombs of Ramesses VII and IX (see Hornung 1990b, 123, nt. 5). This spelling also occurs in the Book of the Earrh of Ramesses VI, e.g., R6.A2.3.43.41, col. 23. Cf. a sim ilar spelling from the fifth division of the Book of Caverns, in Piankolf 1944, plate LXXVI , 2. 82. Note that the eye typically exhibits a less rectangular morphology than the pool in New Kingdom hieratic (Moller 1965, 2:nrs. 82 and 335, respectively), but d. an example of = from the Second Intermediate period, which appears as 4J (l:nr. 335, P. Boulaq 18). 83. See Moller 1965, 2:005. 47 and 284; the cwo signs are much more distinct both earlier and later (cf. vol. 1 and vol. 3, respectively). For the evolution of the various signs used to denote "herdsman," see Fischer 1996, 177-79; 1978, 12. 84. Note that none of the examples of ~ from the present corpus employ the sign's usual value,}}; Similarly, the otherwise common verb lit, "to come," is also unattested in the Book of the Earth. 85. From the Ramesside period, see the Great Karnak Inscription of Merneprah, col. 32 (KJU IV 6.1; discussed in Manassa 2004, 45g), and a "Ramessid rhetorica1 stela" (KJU 319.8-9; for the reading of the sign in question as 5J, see the comments in Manassa 2004, 50-51, n. 283); from the Third Intermediate period, Jansen-Winkeln 1996, 29h, cites two examples. noted already in Belegstellm III , 121 a.

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

76

its traditional ideographic value, as SJ. The latter sign may alternate with seated figures carrying implements other than the herdsman's tether,SO which may also be the result of~confusion from the hieratic. S7 In one case, the draftsman opted simply to leave the ambiguous hieratic sign in its original form on the comb wall, as (.88 The apparent ambivalence exhibited with respect to the spellings of s; might suggest that this use of the walking reed leaf represents a genuine scribal error, as opposed to a deliberate substitution. Perhaps the most telling piece of evidence in favor of this suggestion comes from a scene that appears in the tombs of bach Ramesses VI and Osorkon II.89 In the annotation to this tableau in the tomb of Ramesses VI, S1 occurs three times, and is written with the walking reed leaf in each case.1lO All three of these instances have been corrected [0 the seated shepherd in the parallel text from the later tomb of Osorkon." The orthographic distribution of S1 in the sarcophagus chamber of Ramesses V1 may be summarized as follows:

Table 3.4.1. Occurrences of Sl. Section A

A2 B B2

Totals

Total number

- \;.

26 5 15 5

It2

5 0 0

51

22

~ 6 0 10

17

4!i. or variant

Other

1 0 5

0

4

0

10

2

2"

Sections A and A2 exhib it a clear preference for the alphabetic spelling - \;., which is completely absent from sections B and B2. At the same time. sections A. Al, and B2 make minimal use of the walking reed leaf. which occurs as the primary variant in section B. If all of the reed leaf/shepherd variations in fact derive from a common hieratic sign-perhaps not unlike the isolated example (, discussed above- then the last three columns can be taken together as a common "ideographic" group. yielding the following distr ibution:

86. Ankh, R6.A.3.35.26, 001. 1. StrokdCr.,k (?), R6.B.3.26.61, 001. 1. sw-ftath" R6.B.3.26.61, 001. 5, R6.B.3.40.62 , 001. 10, and R6.B.4.5.66, col. 2. The Late period sarcophagi favor a seated figure holding a knife (i.e.• thejry-watchman) for SJ (see Manassa 2007, plate 39). 87. Compare, e.g., the variously drawn strokes representing the object in the herdsman's hand (MoUer 1965, 2:nr. 48) with the knife in the lap of the seatedjry-watchman (nr. 63). In principle, any of me objects mentioned in the previous note could have substituted for this seemingly ambiguous hieratic sign. 88. R6.A.l.74.12, col. 6 (see Piankoff 1954. plate 131); the hieratic sign employed here is, itself, nonstandard. The form shown above most closely resembles the herdsman or walking reed leaf employed in the nearly contemporary P. Abbot (dated to the reign of Ramesses IX), lines 6,7 and 5,12, respectively (see Moller 1965, 2:nrs. 47 and 284), but lacking the additional diagonal stroke found in those signs. Earlier examples tend to execute the main horizontal Stroke (i.e .• the lap of the seated figure) in each of these signs much less summarily; the more abbreviated hieratic fo rm found in the sarcophagus chamber of Ramesses VI might, therefore. suggest mat the hieratic master document employed there did not greatly predate the construction of that king's tomb. 89. See ch. 5, scene 51. 90. Scene 51, Ramesses VI, caption I, and R6.B.1.51.47, cols. 2, 9. 91. Scene 51, Osorkon II, caption 1, and O.A.I.5!.1, cols. 1,4. 92. One example (R6.A.3.35.26, col. 10) writes the SJ-duck only, without the bolt-s phonetic compliment. 93. R6.A.I.25.4, coL 2. regular reed leaf, q (M 17), in place of (he walking variant; R6.A.1.74.12, col. 6 (hieratic; see n. 88, above).

ORTHOGRAPHY

Section

Total

- \.,

.~

occurrences

alphabetic

ideographic

9 20

A-A2

31

22

B- B2

20

o

77

One possible explanation for this disrri burion may lie in the use of two (or more) master documents in the decotation of Ramesses VI's sarcophagus hall. These documents, corresponding to sections A- A2 and B- B2, would be identifiable by a preference for the alphabetic spelling of 51, on th e one hand, vs. an ideographic spelling using some version of the seated herdsman I walking reed leaf, on the orher. 9•

3.4.2 ~/9, from ~ The hiding man, \, which determines the verb jmn, "to hide," and its derivatives, is quite often replaced by )/, in the sarcophagus chamber of Ramesses VI, and occasionally also in that of Ramesses IX." The other tombs examined for the present study tend to employ the genetic, book roll determinative with this verb, less often using fiJ,.% The Late period sarcophagi favor th e latter sign. 97 The hiding man, ~, occurs in hieratic documents of the later New Kingdom as {t,n from which 'iI presumably derives. The Hieroglyphic variant occurs in Ramesses VI's Book of the Earth both wi th and without han ds (i.e., II), with roughly equal frequency." In two instances, the standing man + d isc has been reinterpreted as si mply a walking disc, 11, or nw-jar, Jt 100 In one case the nw-jar appears to include twO strokes or hands extending from the of the vessel: )1101 In tefms of distribution, ten of the thirteen examples of ); / r:;; appear in section A, versus only three in section B. No examples of either variant are attested in sections A2 or B2. John Darnell compares li with an image of Re-Osi ris from the ceiling of corridor G in the tomb of Ram esses VI. IOl The figure in question appears as a giant on the eastern horizon with a large disc emerging from his upper torso in place of a head, no arms, and feet terminating in serpents.103 The accompan ying annotation indicates that the god's two arms remain in the solar disc. I Clo4 According to Darnell, "the 'arms' of the deity which remain in the sun disc are the light," of the sun's rays, which can also appear in the form of fire spitting snakes. los

94. If initial layout of the inscriptions was dictated verbally, then the different orthographies might simply reflect the preferred spellings or "signature style" of individual draftsmen working on the wal ls (see above, n. 1384). However, the presence of I.. in section 0 suggests strongly that the scribe(s) were working directly from the hieratic master document(s). 95. Four examples using \ are attested, versus thirteen that employ);. Abitz 1989b, 5. cites a similar spelling ofjmn.t from the tomb of Ramesses IX, which employs a variant of the laner sign, noting that this orthography occurs as early as the reign of Ramesses IV 96. E.g., Scene 21, caption 1. 97. See Manassa 2007, pis. 23 and 37. 98. MoUer 1965, 2:nr. 39, Ennene and Harris H .M. 99. With hands (seven examples): R6.A. I.25.3, col. 7; R6.A.I.25,4, col. I ; R6.A.l.25.5, row bi R6.A.1.74.12, cols. 1,2; R6.A.l.74. 18,

col. 4, R6.B.1.38.46, col. 5. Without hands (six examples); R6.A.1.25.Z, col. 2, R6.A.1.74.17, col. 4, R6.A.5.3Z.32, col. 1Z, R6.A.5 .76.33, col. 7, R6.B. 1.38.44, cols. 10, 15. 100. Walking di5C: R6.A.1.56.9, col. 3. Walking nw-jar: R6.A.1.74.13, col. 3. 101. Scene 51, caption 3, first column. The details of me sign on the wall are unclear and somewhat difficult to interpref. Piankoff 1953, plate IV, 3, transcribed as a nw-jar with hands but the figure might. in faCt, be a poorly drawn version of~ (cf. the photograph in Piankoff 1954, plate 11 4). 102. Darnell 2004, 237, and plate 29. 103. For this image, see Piankoff 1954, 435-37; Hornung 1988; and Abitz 1989c, 157-58 . 104. Darnell 2004, 231.

105. Dame112004, 237.

78

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

If Darnell's comparison with >; is apt. then the use of this sign 106 withjmn and its derivatives might owe as much to theological considerations as to an original confusion from the hieratic. The "Birth of the Hours" (scene 19) from the tomb of Ramesses IX may provide some additional insight into the use of the various dererminarives depicting a man hidden behind or within a disc. The annotations to that scene, which were copied onto the walls in hieratic,I07 include five examples ofjmn, determined in the following ways: Scene 19. Ramesses

rx, caption 5a

Scene 19, Ramesses IX, cap tion 6a

Scene 19, Ramesscs IX, caption 5h

Scene 19. Ramesses lX, caption 3

R9.B.2. 19.7, col. 8

The first two signs conform to the standard hieratic orthography of ,. for the Ramesside period. However, the third sign represents a nonstandard variant, which is quite distinct. In fact, the third form resembles the actual hieroglyph, ~, more closely than the standard hieratic forms. As indicated above, the signs iI and Ii may have come to acquire a degree of rheological significance in their own right by this time. Therefore. it is possible that Ramesses lX's scribes actually intended st(t)}. w, "ones who illuminarc," from scene 69 in the tomb ofRamesses 111 m and perhaps also the group ~Jl~, st. wt, "rays," from the tomb of Ramesses IX, I2fl

§3.S

SHAPE SUBSTITUTIONS

One of the most common SOUIces of orthographic variation in [he Book of the Earth is the interchange of signs with the same general shape. In this context, "shape" refers to the position of a given sign within the socalled ideal sq uare that governed monumental orthography. 121 For example, the scribe may, in principal, exchange any two low, broad signs, likewise any tall and narrow signs, etc. 122 In many cases, shape substitutions appear to derive ultimately from similar sign forms in the hieratic, as in the use of for ::::::::::>.123 None of the shape substitutions from the present corpus appear to reflect any SOrt of standardization and most occur fewer than three times. Only > !El. and > :=;, appear more often, l24 In certain cases, the similarity of shape extends beyond the basic ideal square, exploiting more specific morphological similarities berween the signs in question . For example, the {fw-mountain,~, interchanges once with the dj-arm, 4.......JI ,12S and once with the not-arm, irr-.-Q, '16 both of which replicate, in their general shape, the twin hillocks and central valley o f the mountain sign.127 Occasionally, the jmj sign, depicting two crossed

m

114. Wb IV, 204; for the possible interchange or confusion between _ and in Ptolemaic Egyptian, see Fairman 1943, 237, nr. 245. 115. Manassa 2007, 29. 116. Hornung 1990b, 122. The missing in itial radical s may be explained as a mistake from the hieratic, bur note that Wb IV, 201, indicates that the spelling srk, in place of the more usual srq, "to breathe," is characteristic of the Greco-Roman period. while other examples of this verb from the present corpus all appear as srq, not srk. 117. Hornung 1990b, 65. (cf. Moller 1965, 2:nr. 167, Harris H.M.), misinterpreted as *:J3... < ~, or the like. 118. I.e., 119. R3.A.l.G9.1, col. 2; for the use of ~ for ~, as the plural marker. w, see below, §3.7.2. 120. R9.A.3.60A , col. 9. This last group mighr also represent a simple alphabetic spelling, substituting for::=> (see §3A, above, and nn. 123-124, below). 12 L For a discussion of the "ideal square" in classical vs. Ramesside monumental Egyptian, see Loprieno 1995, 21-22. 122. See Jansen-Winkeln 1996, 27. for a wide range of examples of each type of shape substitution, dating to the Third Intermediate period. 123. Darnell 2004, 61, n. 118. The interchange of these two signs as an apparent error from the hieratic may be observed already in the Pyramid Texts, as noted already in Sethe 1935-62, 2:2. For adaptations from the hieratic in the present corpus, see §3.4, above. 124. Six occurrences each ; the latter appears most often in the spelling of the proclitic particle if as *rf(PiankolF 1948; and see below, ch. 4, §4.5). For lil > tm see Darnell 2004, 236 (b) and n. 252; for > :=;:., see previous nOte. 125. R6.BA.47.73. col. 7. 126. R6.A2.3A3A1. col. 10. 127. For other examples of {he interchange of~ and ""---D, see Hornung 1963-67, 2:30, nr. 96; and Darnell 2004, 259-60. For 4-JI and ~ ,see Parker and Neugebauer 1960-64, 1:79, text nmes to VlI, 14, and plate 54 (Book of Nut, "Dramatic Text," from {he

d.

80

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

+.

f)

planks, interchanges with the cross-shaped Roret. as a writing of wnm,llfl In another particularly interesting example, the individual senet pieces on the mn-game board, ~, ~ave been reinterpreted as waves atOp a pool of water, S ,129 Along similar lines, the demonstrative tn, ~, appears once in the Book of the Earth of Ramesses VI as db. 110 In another case, the SW(l. t-egg reversed, 0 occurs in ·place of the similarly shaped s4m-ear, &:1. i3l Similar examples occur with considerable frequency throughout the corpus. Occasionally, phonetic change (§3.3, above) might also playa role in the choice of similarly shaped signs, such as I for I (w(;)" > w!f),'" or = for (§ > s).'" Signs modified in this manner cannot always be dismissed as simple scribal errors, and may occasionally represent deliberate manipulations of the hieroglyphic script. \).0 For example, in the Book of the Earth of Ramesses IX, the divine name Osiris, employed as an epithet of the deceased king, occurs with the spelling l.I. m On the one hand, the sedge, might substitute for the seat, .il, replacing one tall, thin sign with anomer as a variation on the normal writing of Osiris's name, 1.136 On the other hand, the normal phonetic values of C!P--, jr, and :t, sw, might easily be interpreted as a perturbation of Wsjr. 1l7 Finally, the group +,!, without the initial , can be read njsw(.t), "king." Thus, the complete group l.I might in fact represent a compact writing of Wsjr njsw(.t), "the Osiris, king (Ramesses IX)."''' J

+,

§3.6

SUPERFLUOUS SIGNS

3.6.1 Plural Strokes Superfluous signs abound in the Book of the Earth. The most common of these are the plural strokes 1 1 1 (rarely 0 0 O},139 which can appear with virtually part of speech. l40 This superfluous use is usually easy to distinguish from plural strokes employed as a writing of the stative ending =W. With respect to nouns, however, the

Cenotaph of Seti I at Abydos); and c£ also the simplification of the last two signs to .-......II, discussed in Fischer 1978, 12. Note that the consonantal similariry of (jw and dj , enhanced by the collapse of the dentals, i.e., g(w) > 4 > d < dV), might also have facilitated the use of ~ for C:::::) (see Fairman 1943, 236, nr. 239) . extended to ...........a on analogy with the shape of the former sign. 128. E.g. , Scene 67. caption 2. The confusion of these twO signs has been amibuted traditionally to their similarity of form, esp. in the hieratic (thus, e.g., G£f/, 539, ZII; c£ Moller 1965, sign nr. 564; for other apparent mistakes from the hieratic, see above, §3.4), but has been linked more recently to a consonantal shift from wn > wm (Kammerlcll 1999,83-93; with additional uscful comments on the ambiguous signs' roles as semograms and phonograms in Schenkel 2002, 59-65, siding ultimatdy against Kammerzell's wn > wm hypotheSiS). 129. R6.A.4.30.29, col. 5; this unusual variant may stem from confusion in the hieratic, i.e.,"ii1 = ~ (MaUer 1965, 1:51, nt. 540) reinterpreted as ,-, + ~ > ~ (I :32, sign nos. 33 1 and 335); possibly also from a cursive variant, such as EJ (last sign after Fischer 1976b, 41, col. 3a; for the use of cursive hil":roglyphs in archive copies of religious texts, see Berger-EI Naggar 2004, 85- 90). 130. R6.A.1.56.9, col. 2. 131. R7.B.1.59.8, col. 2 132. R6.B.l.38.45, col. 18; R6.B.2.70.58, cols. I and 3. This substitution is attested from the Middle Kingdom and later (GEG3, 480, M13; also cf. Wb 1, 394). 133. Scene 74, capdon 5. 134. When substitutions of this kind appear to operate on multiple, deliberately contrived levels, the line between simpl e orthographic variation and true cryptography becomes decidedly indistinct (see §3.8.1, below). 135. R9.B.2.75.12, col. 24. _ 136. But c( also the variant tJl (R9.A.2.12.2, col. 7). which utilizes both the sedge and the seat. 137. For the use of perturbation in cryptographic texts, see Darnell 2004, 14; for sporadic cryptic orthographies from the present corpus. see below. §8.4. 138. For similar spellings of the epithet Wsjr njsw.t, "Osiris, king," from the tomb of Ramesses IX, see Abitz 1989b, 2 139. The plural dots are particularly characteristic of the Book of the Earth of Ramesses IX. 140. This phenomenon is also common in neo-Middle Egyptian texts of the Third Intermediate period (see Jansen-Winkeln 1996, 24. §29).

ORTHOGRAPHY

81

addition of plural strokes can complicate the distinction between singular, plural, and (rarely) dual forms. In these cases, the only clues as to the number of the noun in question must be derived from context or the associared vignene.

Ex. 1. R6.A.5.32.32, cols. 6--8

~~~~I ~-~ ~ ~ \-jIii1'?J-~I?', ntr. tj su'" ·sn !Jbsw "The two goddesses, they protect the hacked out (heart)." The plural strokes following the dual ending of ntr.tj are clearly superfluous.'" In the last word, the q uail chick of tJbsw marks the imperfect passive participle,'" literally, "that which is hacked out." The heart that follows is not the usual determinative of the verb bbs. 1« Instead, it serves to specify the nature of the participle's antecedent,145 which is not named in the text but is indicated clearly in (he vignette: two goddesses standing with their hands extended down tOward a giant heart. Because the text and image compliment each other in this fashion, a plural reading, i.e., *!Jbs. w, can be ruled our confidently,l-4(i It is possible that the draftsman, misinterpreting the participial ending -was a plural marker, then felt obliged to "correct" the word with the more explicit plural strokes. In certain instances, a series of plural nouns or pronouns appear to affect nearby wo rds. resulting in the mechanical repetition of superfluous plural strokes. "Pluralized" in this manner. the word(s) in question might also be hypercorrected with an additional w (generally ~), as a phonetic compliment. This latter change approaches standardization in the case of the preposition (m)-lJt, which very often exhibitS the characteristically late form /}tw. '" Compare the following:

Ex. 2. R6.A.1.25.3, cols. 4-5

;:::::

;;;::: -

Ll..n.::; ~ ~ ~

I Ill I I--ill I II I I 0

~ I I I~

sn r"snl~8 ('q=sn otw=! "they enter after him"

Ex. 3. R6.A2.3.63.42, col. x+I2- I5

---'-~./l, ~ - =Jin ll I ~o iiiiiiO./l,iiiOoi I l'-o,lIiii_ ,!!,v==.1Jn l 1iii sn r·sn cp.sn tJtw.Jlp. wt·sn mn.tj m s. wt·sn "while they fly after him, their corpses having remained in their places."

141. For the gemination of HW, "to protect," in the subject + s4m~f construction, see below, §3.6.3. 142. The text refers to a representation of t\\IO goddesses, aU other figures in the relevant tableau being male (see ch. 5, scene 32). 143. S" GEe?, 275, §358; MEG, 135; AME, 322, §23.5, m. 4. 144. fJbs is determined most often with {he hoc, "'", and its variations (Wb III, 256). 145. S" GEe?, 271. 146. Contra Piankoff 1953,59, n. 8, who tentatively translates, "Ies morceaux coupes (?)"j cf. Hornung 1972, 478, who deems the word unclear. 147. See discussion below, at ch. 4, M.4. 148. The n that follows rzsn is superAuous (Piankoff 1953, 43, n. 4; see GEe?, 53, §62); for me grammar of the sn r:sn construction, see ch. 4, §4.3.2.

82

THE ANCIE NT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF T HE EARTH

Ex. 4. R6.B.I.68.50, cols. 5-9

~~~I'=!l~i:: Iii ~ I I '1ii~(~\1ii -= ;;::t-?I "jw W rj,wj=j r=sn bJ. w·sn '[J=sn m-YI=j "Re calls to them and their bas fly after him."

,

In cases such as th ese, the grammatical number of th e affected verb, noun, preposition, etc., remains unchanged, and so the plural strokes remain unexpressed in the transliteration.

3.6.2 Superfluous w,j, y, and I In addition to the false plurals discussed above, other superfluous signs also occur. The tedundant use of semivowels w (us ually ==> (shape substitution from the hieratic) see above, §3.5; cf. also R6.B.3.47.23, cols. 11-12: nir. wt jmn~t(;). For the Old Egyptian 2cs/3fs/3fp stative ending ~t(;), see AdG, 584; ). Allen 1984, 385-86.

86

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OFTHE EARTH

In classical Middle Egyprian, 3ae-inf. verbs can exhibir occasional geminarion in rhe srarive, alrhough rhe reasons for this behavior remain undear.175 W ith the exception of these examples, ('PV) behaves otherwise as a typical 3ae-inf. root throughout the present corpus. 176 The final instance of unexpected gemination is somewhat more problematic: Ex. 7. R6.A.4.31.30, col. 6-7

!~ ~~~~&7~n=~~ ~",~vn IJrw R' pw sgm{mlw?} nn n ntr. wI "The voice of Re is whar these goddesses hear" Morphologically, the verb sgm, with reduplicated m, can only represent the archaic, passive future co nStruction known as the s4mm~f, m but such an interpretation makes little sense, in this context. ln One possible alternative is to interpret s4mm as a defective spelling of the imperfect relative form. Given this interpretation, two suggestions may be offered, with respect to the unexpected gemination: 1) The second m might be a dittographic error, perhaps resulting from the confluence of nasal consonants m and n between the relative form and the following demonstrative, or else simply influenced by the reduplicated relative forms of the weak and geminate verbs. 2) More likely, rhe second may represent ~ < 't>, [0 be read sgmw, reflecring rhe final w which can appear with imperfective relatives of the 3-lit. rOot class. 1N On the other hand, one might instead interpret ~~ as a writing of the stjm.n=/ relative form, substituting.::::=:::: for ~ and reading brw RC" pw srjm.n nn n ntry. wt, "The voice of Re is what these goddesses have heard." ISO

==

§3.7

MISCELLANEOUS

3.7.1 Pars pro toto Substitutions Substitutions in which part of a sign stands for the whole are a regular feature of the cryptograph ic corpus. lSI In the noncryptic portions of the Book of the Earth, substitutions of this rype are much less common, occurring in only a handful of isolated examples. 182 A notable exception to this general rule is the "strong" arm, ~, which almost always appears in place of the striking man, ~. This feature becomes common in hieroglyphic texts as early as the Eighteenth Dynasry.1Hl Consequently, rare uses of the older striking man in the present corpus should probably be regarded as examples of deliberare archaism.'~

175. GEC?, 236-37, §31O; AME, 203, § 17.3. Also see Edel 1959, 105-8, citing evidence against the existence of a distinct, geminated stem. 176. But c( also a possible crypwgraphic example of the geminated stative cpp=w, in Cenotaph.2, col. 16. Aha see R6.A.5.32.32, cols. 10-13 (st/=w, from 3ae-inf. stj). 177 . For which, see GEG3, 343; J. ABen 1984, 349; Vernus 1990, 138-42. 178. I.e., *"It is the voice of Re. these goddesses will be heard," or the like. 179. GEe?, 297;AME, 348. 180. For the m > n interchange, see above, §3.3.1, n. 26. 181. Darnell 2004, 8; and see below, §3.8.3 . 182. See, for example. R6.A.S .32.32, cols. 10 and 11 ( _ _ for "'t, in Slj, "to shoot"); R6.A2.3.63.42, col. x+ 17 (~ for ~, used alphabetically for k; also see §3.8.4, below); Scene 29, caption 1 (all version) (~ fo r ~,in nr(.r)y, "He of the vulture/the terrible one this last orthography is also common in other contexts, for which see Wb II . 277-78). H

;

183. GEe?, 444 (A24). 184. Two examples, both from the hieratic annotation to scene 19 in the tomb of Ramesses IX: R9.B.2.19.7, col. 1; R9.B.2.19.8 , col. 1.

ORTHOGRAPHY

87

The only other pars pro toto substitution occurring with any regularity in the present corpus is the use of the pupil, 0 , for the eye, ~, in the verb mn, "to see."185 Written in this fashion, the aleph-vulture also tends to be omitted as a phonetic compliment, while the pupil appears twice.l86 1he pupil, therefore, serves both as the determinative and to indicate the gemination of the second radical."7 Compare the following:

Ex.!. R6.A.2.14.21, col. 10

09"- 't1'!\\JR~~"'" mn.j J:zrjw,n jln=! "when he sees the light of his disc"

Ex. 2. R9.B.2.19.7, cols. 8- 10 1,,0 on=/\~~ 0 .-/ '-- ~_)J'I I I QO

*.I'l Sti

mn.jjmn.w wnw. wI " ... he regards the ones who hide the hours." Likewise, a passage that occurs in parallel versions from the tOmbs of Ramesses VI and Osorkon II includes two different spellings of the geminated infinitive mn following the negative relative adjective jwlj. The parallel passages confirm the reading of "these gods who do not see " Occasionally, m" may also exhibit a hybrid orthography, which combines elements from the more traditional and variant spellings. Tn these cases, the eye is retained as the verb's determinative, but the pupil still appears in place of the aleph-vulture, ro indicate gemination of the second radical, as in the following two examples:

185. This substitution also occurs in New Kingdom crypcographic texts (Darnell 2004, 8, n. 29) and survives into Ptolemaic Egyptian (Fairman 1945, 101); also see following note. 186. Wb II, 7, indicates that similar spellings occur since the New Kingdom; from [he Third Intermediate period, see also Jansen ~ Winkeln 1996, 17; for examples in Persian and Ptolemaic Egyptian, see Engsheden 2003, 43, n. 180; p. Wilson 1997,393-94; and Meeks 2004.187, §508. 187. Bauman 1998, 18, n. 20. Note, however, that no examples with a Single pupil, which might represent ungeminated ml, are attested. 188. Substituting'fl for (sim ilar shape; §3.5). 189. Lit., "who their seeing him is not."

i1

88

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

Ex. 5. R7.A.l.62.4, cols. 4-5 ;::::; __r" ""'" ;::::; ~ I I I I I I ~ I I II I 10110 I

sn mu;sn J:uj R' "they seeing'~ the light of Re," Ex. 6. R6.A4.31.30, cols. 5-6

~~tti I i~~61 i\ jwtj

mJNn

htf4wj

"the ones who do not see the light" Examples such as these also help ro explain othet nonstandard spellings, such as .>.>~ for m33'j,''' in which the reduplicated m,.-sickle likewise denotes the gemination of the circumstantia1.

3.7.2 Class Substitutions The most frequent source of orthographic variation in the Book of the Earth is the substitution of one sign for anomer of the same general class, but of a different form. l 9:l This type of substitution is also a staple of the cryptographic corpus,'" and one of the major factors at work in the alphabetic orthography of Ptolemaic Egyptian.19~ In the Book of the Earth, class substitutions typically involve the replacement of onc human sign for another (e.g., variations of the seated god), or of one bird for another. Somewhat less often, individuaJ glyphs in other categories will also interchange in this manner. In theory, any twO signs within the same semantic category could be exchanged, but additionaJ characteristics will often link the expected or intended sign with the new glyph (e.g., one crested bird for another, or variations of the seated man holding various objects in his lap). The following [able presents a selection of typical class substitutions encountered in the noncryptic portions of Book of the Earth, along with a representative example(s) of each, and a short comment on the shared characteristics linking the expected sign with its replacement,lff The examples cited are by no means exhaustive.

190. For the prodilic pronoun construction (sn stjm"sn), see ch. 4, §4.3. 1. 191. R6.B.1.38.46, col. 8. 192. In addition (he examples from (he New Kingdom and la(er (sec following twO notes). class substitutions also occur in earlier periods. e.g.• in the occasional use of 1) for ~ in inscriptions of the later Old Kingdom and First Intermediate period, noted in Brovarski 1981, 28; or the substitution of the fully-grown SJ-duck, ~, for the more usual fledgling, b, in the title IJly, "vizier," from a private inscription discussed in Fischer 1976a, 74, n. 32. 193. See Vikentiev 1943, 118-19; Hornung] 979-80, 2:146; Darnell 2004, 16. 33, and passim; also see below, §3.8.3. 194. Fairman 1945,65. 195. Additional examples have been treated in the notes to the individual texts in ch. 6.

ORTHOGRAPHY

89

Table 3.7.2. Noncryptic class substitutions.'% Expected sign

~

Replaced by

Select examples

Class

in

R6.A.4.31.30, co l. 20

A2

Seated men

~

R6.A.1.74.12, col. 4

1

~

R6. B2. 1.53.74, col. 2

A30

A4a

~

\1i \lJ

Al

m

An

Prais ing men

R6.A.3.35.26, col. I '~

A40e

A47

R6.B.3.26.61 , col. I

Seated, robed men with objects in lap

A49?

~

R6.B.3 .26.61, col. 5

~

R6.B.2.70.58, col. 2

A295

B7

~ BI

Ji

R6.A.1.25.2, col. 1 R7. B.1.59.9, col. 2

\E

R6 .A.4.31.30, col. 7

Seated women

B7c

B7e

D4

®-

-..J

~

D36

D41

D6

R6.A2.2.58.38 , col. x+7 R4.0.1.2.2, col. 2

Eyes Arms

,~

\96. For substitutions from the cryptographi c corpus, sec 3.8.4 , below.

197. Sim ilar examples, but with one knee raised, occur already in the Old Kingdom (see Fischer 1968, 79-82, nr. 5. Mrrl. Sn-mjSw-I, and Mry-PIM

198. The seated god holding an ankh first becomes popular as a determinative for gods names in the Twelfth Dynasty (Fischer 1976b, 34); for other variations of the "herdsman" sign, see Fischer 1996, 177-79; 1978, 12. 199. From the Old Kingdom, ~ occurs with the value (' in the dual r.wj, "rwo arms," and homophones such as "wj, uproducrion" (Fisch" 1996, 160).

90

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

Expected sign

,

Replaced by

Select examples

11

Kh.1.4.2, col. 4

Leg pairs

~

~

R6.B.1.51.49, passim200

Arm pairs holding objects in each hand

D34

D371

~

~

GI

G43

~

~

A D54

D56 + D56

G4a

~ Gl7

Class

R6.A2.2.49 .37, col. 4~'

Scene 52, Rarnesses lX, caption 2

Tall birds

GI

~

R6.B.1.68.52, col. 4

GI

~


. 3-4 (SPT'})' 119. According to Baumann 1998, 65-69, this last observa60n also holds true for the Underworld Books generally. 120. Hornung 1975-76, 1:11 and 2:102 (32); with discussion in 1:52 and 2:112 (122). Piankoff 1948,172, notes that at least one apparent instance of din the Litany ofRe, as identified in Naville 1875, 57, was actually a mistake for the enclitic particle rf. 121. Darnell 2004,123, 15? 122. Fifteen from the tomb of Ramesses VI, plus one from the tomb ofRamesses VII and one example in the cryptographic script from the cenotaph of Seti I at Abydos (see refs. at n. 127, below). 123. Piankoff 1948, 172, following Naville 1875, 56, "une conjonction signifiant lorsque, quand," (italics original). 124. Note that Baumann 1998, 159- 160 and n. 379, has suggested that dis actually an inflected form of the proclitic particle ti, which exercises a similar grammatical function (see GEG3, §243; AdG, 431-432). However, compare R6.A.3.35.26, coL 3 (not included among Baumann's examples), which employs before S;;=$n, indicating that the particle was not inflected (i.e., as *t(j)=sn s;;"sn); for inflected ti, cf. Kh.2.3.6, cols. 3-4: t(j)=sn s;;=w sj, "while they are protecting him" (discussed below, §4.9, ex. 3; for examples of inflected rj in other Underworld compositions, see, e.g., Hornung 1979-80, 1:265 (d:jt:p=j); 1975-76, 1: 109-10 (ti=k Mn=k); et al.). 125. For the syntactic environments of (j)rf as an enclitic particle, which tends to follow the first word of its sentence as closely as possible, see GEe', §252; Malaise and Winand 1999, §312; and Shisha-HaJevy 1986, §§2.0.1-2.6. 126. This spelling is easily explained as a shape substitution as a result of confusion from the hieratic, between and =::::> (Piankoff 1948, 172; sec above, ch. 3, §3.5); also see the possible etymological derivations of d suggested (and discarded) in Piankoff 1948, 174. 127. Cenotaph. I, col. x+2; R6.A.1.25.2, col. 1; R6.A.1.25.4, col. 1; RG.A.1.74.12, col. 2; R6.A.2.13.19, col. 1; R6.A.2.14.21, col. 9; R6A3.35.26, col. 3 (aST}), coL 16; R6.B.1.38.45, coL 1 (" rj); R6.B.1.5 L49, coL 4; R6.B.2.70.57, coL 2 (as rj); R6.B.3.24.59, coL 1 (a, rj); R6.B.3.26.60, co!. I (as rj); RG.B.3.40.G2, col. 3 (a., rj); R6.B.3.47.63, col. 4 (as rj); Scene 19, Ramesses VI, caption 7; R7. B.l.l l.G, col. 5 (as rj). 128. R6.B.2.20.56, coL 3 (" rj).

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OFTHE EARTH

118

Ex. l. R6.A.l.74.12, cols. 1-2 ~"2i==:> 0 ::=::>+==~n.n ""

Ll./l.aolll=~=",==:>~An=)?

"'=-

\\

""

nV9 Ail 0

::5

)]~~9 Illti_='"'=

==""=

"'==- Ll ~_~=I I I 'q b,. wI st .2;>'¥" '< \ \ n,.;;., ~ Ji' II ~ UIII "'=- "'=-"'=-"'=- u, JR ~ 0 "'=jw nlr pn " mdw=j n=j if m".j htjw jln=j "This Gteat God speaks to him, when he sees the light of his disc." Ex. 3. R6.B.3.40.62, cols. 2-7

Q'='

X

=,

n + =~ 0 ~ - . * LlA .0 '="

jmj(.I)-r> pr(.w) mjtn r wnw.t 'q=s kkw "speech having emerged from the disc at the hour of 'She Enters the Darkness,'" In example 1, the seated woman crowned with a disc, Ji, which determines the last group, indicates clearl y that r'p=s kkwj represents the name of the aforementioned hour, and nOt an additional clause of circumstance. H1 Example 2 does not include the seated woman determinative. but the sense of the passage seems reasonably clear in light of the preceding parallel. The groups 'pf \ \ ~ "';;" """=

an.

~

CO>

=

C)

~I I~ o II~ oofJ ~ 0 -1 >......!J iii T \\!

prr s!/.. wI j '" nbj. W l!J.I'" m SU.I r. W/ 69 jnml70 ssp=sn sw "When the flames of this uraeus emerge the fires of this mysterio us horizon, the two hidden arms, they receive it."17l Likewise. a litany from the sarcophagus chamber of Ramesses lX172 provides several examples of circumstantial use of the NOUN + stjm=/ co nstruction. In this text, the introductory refrai n,j hy (p.n=j dWJ.l, "Oho! I have traversed the Duat," always functions as the litany's repeated element (theme), followed in each case by an emphasized adverbial adj unct, representing the new informatio n (rheme) . The emphasized element ge nerally takes the form of a circumstantial s4m.n~f or subjunctive stjm:J. less often a simple adverbial phrase or stative. However, in four of the litany's twenty-fo ur couplets, the NOUN + srjm=/ construction follows the emphatic verb and is, therefore, probably equivalent syntactically to other emphasized clauses of circumstance occurring in this same position,m Ex. 5. R9.B.2.75.12, cols. 7-8

~ru~~in~-~*~:r!r~ ~III~~ ~ in : ~iI ~ru~~in~ -sfl*c';~~~~~~sfI j hy 'p.n,j dwl.i jrnj. w· sn I;kn.sn n.j j hy 'p.n,j dWl. t bI. w· sn 'p.sn tJt(w).j

col. 5. For continuative noun + sgm-f and its equivalence with continuative sgm.n=f in narrative, see GEG', 367; Doret 1980, 42-43; Malaise and Winand 1999, 346-47; with addidonal useful comments in J. Johnson 1980, 71-73; and Si lverman 1986b, 40. n. 10. 166. Thus also Baumann 1998. 148-49 (Citing ex. 4, above, ~t al). 167. The unusual occurrence offour consecutive water signs is a graph ic error for;"::: (Piankoff 1953. 43, n. I; for the correct spelling, c[ parnlld R6.A.1.25.G, col. 3). 168. Wich superfluous dual Strokes in place of the more usual "house" determinative, n. 169. Substituting 0 for Cl ~o I

bI. w=sn cp=sn m-bl=f

h,. w/=sn mn(=w) m S.I=sn h;p ·lJr Sl kkwj "Their bas, they follow after him (i.e., the passing sun god), their corpses having remained in their place. Then, darkness inevitably conceals them." The preceding example co ncludes a description of the sun god's interaction with a group of demons and the bas of the dead, which attend them. It is followed by (/dw R', a "speech of Re," which marks the beginning of a new narrative sequence. In some cases, the srjm.ljr=/ follows immediately after jr-m-!Jl + subjunctive or a nom inal form of the sgm=f,'~ as in the following:

Ex. 2. R6.A2. l.l 5.35, cols. 19-22

n=--»-

~9

0

~ 1'

1 - ,,'It> ~

0

~-"="~

~=OCl~D~II_~llliiio\l!o ~ D &=>llliii~o

jr-m-IJI 'p nlr pn 'I /pp.lJr'" sn kkwj

I

~r=sn

"Now, afterward, this Great God passes above them, then darkness inevitably conceals them." The sgm.!Jr=f functions here as me second member of a protasis/apodasis complex. ' !18 However, its role as a main clause representing the inevitable conclusion of a sequence of events remains essentially unchanged. 189

185. For the different verbs used with the scjm.tJ.r:fin the various Underworld compositions, see Barta 1994, 140. Piankoff 1953, 6, n. 9, and 49, n. 12, nOtes a number of similar examples of /:Bp.tJ.r SI kkw from the Book of Caverns; from the eighth hour of the Amduar, cf. also Ipp.tJ.rzsn m-lJr rpp~f J:lr~sn, "Then they are covered after he passes above them" (Horn ung 1987-94,609). From the present corpus, the sgm .lir-f also occurs once with the verb rp(]), "to pass" (R6.A.1.25 .3, cols. 7-8) and twice withjmn, "to hide" (R6.B2.1.75.75, cols. 15- 16; R9.A. 3.60.4, cols. 11- 12), versus eleven occurrences with /:lJP, " [0 conceal" (R6.A.2.66.23, col. II; R6.A.4.30.29, col. 4; R6.A2.1.1S.35, cols. 19- 22; R6.A2.3.43.41, col. 20; R6.A2.3.63.42, cols. "

* 0

""

~ ~

Ip.t "Opet." dW1y.1 "She who praises. "

2. Behind the last towing ba-bird, near the end of the rope: ~

~~

S[l

"One who tows,"

£\...

Pedamenopet captions: 1. The batque crew, from left to right (second goddess, scarab, third goddess): o ~ Ip.1 < ljprj > i%0 "Opet." ~ ""

b

dW1y.1 "She who praises."

84. The use of X for SI' is characteristic of the New Kingdom (Wb IV, 351.13-17); cf. Khonsumcs, caption 2, below. 85. The first seven groups arc spaced apart, so that they appear above the seven towing ba· birds as faux labels. The remainder of the text wraps over and behind the solar barque. 86. Substituting ~ for h (class substitution; see ch. 3. §3.7.2i thus also Piankoff 1957a, 206) . 87. Rebus from SRI, "sistrum" (GEe?, 535, nr. 8)? For SSS. I, "path," see Wb IV, 296.12 (usage listed as Greco-Roman). l'iankoff 19 57a, 206, leaves chis clause umranslated. 88. Cf. the spelling ofnww given in Wb II , 202.7. 89. Piankoff 1957a, 206, translates this last clause as "They live on green growth. 90. Perturbation of p and r (§3.7.3)j cf. Pedamenopet, caption 1.

THE VIGNETTES

141

Horira'a captions: I. The barque crew (excluding the ram-headed sun god), right to left:" wtj'y.t

~ ~ "She who judges." 'j~ ""

Wg:

[;S ""

Ijprj

jmn.t dw1.i

"Khepri."

"The West, She who praises."n

f:lr n.fr(y.t) Horus of the rudder."

2. Surrounding each of the seven towing ba-birds: ~

~

sUY "One who cows,"

t~ The present tableau depicts the towing of the solar barque toward the "cavern of Nun" (qrr.t Nnw), represented in scene 5. The boat is pulled by means of a tow rope attached on the underside of the prow and lifted by a group of seven ba-birds, whose (human) heads turn back toward the craft. In the version of Djedkhonsuiusankh the lead bird stares straight ahead, having ceased to grasp its end of the toW rope. Their number appears 93 to be significant, inasmuch as both the New Kingdom and Late period versions consistently maintain it. In the version of Mutirdis, only a small portion of the tow-rope and a single pair of grasping hands are still preserved. Nevertheless, the correct identity of the badly damaged scene may be established with confidence through comparison with the versions of Khonsumes and Pedamenopct. as discussed in §2.2.11, above, and §3.4, below. The form of the barque in the Ramesses VI version is identical to that found in scene 20, albeit rather more

carefully executed, as shown by the detail on fore and aft lotus blossoms, and the wrapping around the oars. On the Twenty-First Dynasty funerary papyri, the treatment of the boats is more cursory, omitting [he internal

detail of the blossoms and the cording around the fore and afi sections of the boat. In addition, the version of Khonsumes also omits the vertical oar posts.

The crew of the barque, from right to left, consists of: falcon-headed Horus, manning the oars~ (as in scene 20); a human-headed female, identified as the ''Adorer'' (dw;y.t), whose arms extend down" toward the 96 criocephalic sun god; the latter figure, surmounted by a disc and holding a was scepter and ankh; Khepri in

91. Horira'a's tableau is oriented opposite the Ramesses VI version, pictured above. 92. The addition of the house determinative suggests that Horira'a's scribes may have reimerpreted the tide as "She of the Dua!" (thus, Buongarzone 1998,46). 93. Compare, for instance, the variable number of stars represemed in the earlier and later versions of scene 19. 94. In the version of Horira'a, the falcon-headed god is designated ~r njr(y.t), "Horus of the rudder" (for nfry.t as a designation of the rudder/tiller of a ship, sec Jones 1988, 171-72, nr. 87) 95. Note that the term ksw generally denotes a "bowing" posture, with hands held downward, while dWJ more often indicates that the hands are held up, before the face (Dominicus 1994, 25; Brunner-Traut 1977, 577-78c); compare the atypicaljJw-posture from scene 60. The Djedkhonsuiusankh papyrus also includes a small serpem rising from the head of this figure. 96. The disc is omitted in the version of Horira'a.

142

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

full y scaraboid form ;" and two additional human-headed women, designated Opet" and the "She Who Judges! Divides" (w4~y.t)J'19 who attend the sun's scarab hypostasis.

,

4. Aker Group 2 (fig. 5.4)"·

Five occurrences: Ramesses VI (pictured). Funerary papyrus of Khonsumes (app. 2, plate 20). Pedamenopet (app. 2, plate 23). Mutirdis (app. 2, plate 27). Padineith (probable, now destroyed). '" Text: Kh .I-3 .4. 1- 2; Pa.B.1-3.4. 1-2, Pa.B.3.4. I I; Mt.A. 1.4. I &messes VI captions: I. Far left group, left to right (standing mummy, uraeus, kneeling figure, uraeus) :

rt

~

WJWJY

V

"He of flam e.,,'m

~

~

wps.t "She who burns."

~

~

~

~~d"~

jJY

nsr.!

"He who praises."

"Flame."

2. Middle group of three figures, left to right: [il hJy.t "She who hails."'"'

il

bgsy "Begsy."'~

~~ c

sn{W, "He who weeps."

'.wj Gb 4'Arms of Geb."

II

q l Khomumes captiom: I. Four praisi ng figures, male and female, Ranking the mound, left to right: ",y",

~

~~

~Jy.t(j)

"He of lament."

tjsy. t "She of the wailing cry."

2. Alongside the left and right giant arms: wj /:!r(j) "Two arms of the olle above ."

t::: '.

tiW

",y",

~

~~

("y.t "She of lament,"

tjsy.t(;) "He of

me wailing cry."

'.wj "Two arms."

3. Above the recumbent mummy: 180............. R~,IOS ""

105. Perturbation (ch. 3, §3.7.3). It is conceivable that mis spelling was intended also to suggest rr, "he who ascends," an appropriate epithet fo r the solar mummy.

144

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

Pedamenopet captions: 1. Far lefr group, above the uraeus on the right:

11 ~~:~e."

-

2. Middle group, standing female on the left, kneeling male:

a~~Ul ~i.:': who hails."

J~~~

b[g ?]sy'" "Be [gl sy. "

Scene 4 represents a mixed group of chthonic deities. over which the solar barque passes (scene 3), prior to entering the body of Aket (scene 5) . Insufficient space on the right wall of Ramesses VI's tomb necessitated leaving the right half of the scene incomplete, as illustrated by the unfinished arm, which abuts the edge of the partially excavated wall on the right. lo7 The missing portion of the scene, including two additional praising figures on the far righr, may be reconstructed from the papyrus copy ofKhonsumes and the Saite period tomb of Mutirdis. The right-hand group includes a burial mound, within which reSts a large weeping eye and four "flesh" signs. The version of Mutirdis omits the objects inside the mound. A bearded mummy lies atop the mound, embraced by the "arms of Geb" ('. wj Gb).''' The mummy is identified as Re in the version of Khonsumes, and as "He Who Weeps" (sntw) in that of Ramesses VI. A text on the Khonsumes papyrus explains how the god goes to rest in the arms of Geb, staring "the two arms guard the corpse of this god, which has not emerged from rhem.',l09 A pair of praising figures, male and female, flank either side of the burial mound. The figures' captions ("He/she of the wailing cry"; "He/she of lament") identify them as mourners on behalf of the recumbent mummy, whom they attend. In the versions of Khonsumes and Mutirdis, the right half of the tableau, featuring the burial mound and its attendants, was placed adjacent to scene 9. The left half of the tableau appears in recensions of Ramesses VI and Padineith, with the latter preserving only this portion of the scene. Two praising figures sit in a distinctive, hunched position, elbows resting on one upraised knee, hands before their faces, facing one another. Two praising women, identified as "She who is sacred of Flame" (4sr.1 nsr.l) and "She who hails" (h,y.l) flank the hunched figure on the right, while a pair of coiled uraei, "Flame" (nsr.t),'" and "She Who Burns" (wps.t),'" flank

106. Cf. Ramesses VI, caption 2. 107. This observation demonstrates inCidentally that the execution of the decoration on the right hand wall must have proceeded from left to right, as shown also by the displacement of the third register (on the unfinished state of Ramesses VI's sarcophagus chamber, see ch. 2, §2.5 .6). 108. I.e. , the personified eanh-a concise metaphor for the state of interment (see Zandee 1960, 95). 109. Kh .1.4.2, cols. 2-3: r.wj S]rsn bM ntr pnjwt.t pr.n.,s !.Jr:sn. 110. Nesrer, the personification of Bame, is attested from the Early DynastiC period through the Greco-Roman era, and may assume the form of an anthropomorphic goddess or a rearing cobra (U'GG 4,353-54); in Coffin Text Spell 335 (CT 4:260/61c = BD 17), the fi ery serpent nsr.t interchanges with the goddess Sakhmet (B. Ahenmuller 1975, 195); she appears throughout the Underworld Books as one who punishes the enemies of Osiris and illuminates darkness, often in conjunctions with wps.t (see following note). Her name may be used as a designation for a number of other goddesses, including Mut, Baster, Hathor, and Isis (see LAGG 4,35 3- 54, for addidonal references). For the general association of serpents and fire, see Ritner 1990,34-39. 111. The demoness wps.t is attested in a wide variety of religious and magical contexts, from the Middle Kingdom (e.g., cr 1:37879b), through the Greco-Roman era; ~ he frequently appears in later representations as a rearing cobra, a goddess with a cobra atop her head, a lion-headed snake wearing the crown of Hathor, or even as a knife-wielding hippopotamus with the head of a cOW (LAGG 2, 267). In the first hour of the Amduat, she is charged with the task of illuminating darkness together with nsr.t, "Flame," and eleven other cobra goddesses (Hornung 1963-67, 29); likewise, in the sixth division of the Book of Caverns, where they set fire to the enemies of Osiris (P;ankoff 1945, 14 and plate 97, 9).

-

THE VIGNETTES

145

the corresponding figure on the left. A standing mummy, "He of the Flame" (WJWJY) ,'U appears on the far left, facing the preceding figures. In the version ofPadineith, only portions of ,his standing mummy and one coiled UIaeus have been preserved. Nevertheless, the placement of these figures [Q the immediate left of the great Aker tableau (sce ne 5), as in the tomb of Ramesses VI, confirms the damaged group's identity.

5. Aker Group 3 (fig. 5.5)'"

Seven+ occurrences: Ramesses VI (pictured). Funerary papyri of Djedkhonsuiusankh (app. 2, plate 18b) and Khonsumes (app. 2, plate 20a). Pedamenopet (app. 2, plate 24). 114 Mutirdis (probable. now destroyed).lIs Horira'a (app. 2. plate 33).116 Padineith (app. 2, plate 30). Sarcophagus of Nakhcnebef (app. 2, plate 35). Text: R6.B.4.5.66-68; Dj.2.5 .2; Kh.1-3.5. 1; Pa.B.3 .5. 12; Nakhcnebef.1-3 Rnmesses VI captiom: 1. Left-hand (day) barque, above the two human-headed ba-birds, left to right: ~~~ bJ [ljpr)j 1:--. I ~ bJ (l)tm r~~ Ea of [KheprJi." ~Jf'",..Ea of Atum ."

2. Right-hand (night) barque, above the two human-headed ba-birds. left to right: ~ WI ~, bJ ljprj ,1:--. I ~ bJ (l)tm ~ erc.b "Ba of Khepri." 6Jr ~ "Ba of Arum."

r

3. In front of the two praising/elevating figures beneath the left and right barques, respectively: 000 Nnw TJ-tnn c:::::::g "Tatenen."

=

::

=

"Nun."

P--r

-. . 4. Between the gian t, cen [ral arm pai r: r. wj Nnw II 9 "Two Arms of Nun."

it:::

=

000

. -. .

112. The WJWJy firc~demons appear already in the Coffin Texts, where they are associated with the rage of the gods (Cf I:378-79d and 382-83c); in later magical contexts they personify poison, act as the c=nemies/devourers of Apep, and are named as guides (s!m. WI) . which were identified with Weretheka u-n~ ty. ( (LACe 2. 244).

113. Hornung 1981. 226; 1972.443-45; Piankoff 1957a. 207-8. 213-14: 1953.23-25. and 70-74: 1954,344-46. 114. The plate depicting Aker, in Dilmichen 1884-94, 3:plate 27 (reproduced in app. 2. plate 35) does not derive from this tomb. but from the sarcophagus of Nakhtnebef. now in the Berlin Museum (see ch . 2. §2.7. n. 328. above). 115. See below. §5.4 . 116. Buongarwne 1998, correcting PM III, 588.

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

146

Fig. 5.5. Aker Group 3 (tomb of Ramesse, VI; after Piankoffl954. fig.lOl). Reproduced by permission of Princeton University Press.

5. Above the six mummies to the left and right of the giant. central arms:

~ ~

~ ~

~ ~

;1 d;1

4.. 4.. 4..

mwjwNnw "Watery one of Nun."'" (6x)

-------- =---- =-= = = = -- -- -- -- -- -~~. ~~. ~~. . -. . -. . -. 000 000 000

4..~ 4..~ 4..~

-.

000 000 000

-. -. -. -.

6. In front of the two lions' forequarters. left and right: ~

~

/J" ,kr M. ''Aker.''

,kr "Aker."

Djedkhomuiusankh captiom: 1. Above the twO praising/elevating figures beneath the left and right barques. respectively: dw, n!r nbl.t'" 51; "Praising the great god. possessor of mystery."

dw, nlr nb.1 'nil "Praising the great god. possessor of life." 2. Between the giant. central arm pair (rerrograde): ,....",- =""= b, mw wbn dr i':1\ c:::=:, ,{J "The ba of the waters that rise and expel."

=

l~

L0

J 17.

I. e., the blessed drowned; see Piankoff 1953. 24, n. 5 for references.

118. The feminine gender of nb.t refers

to

the owner of the papyrus, Djedkhonsuiusankh.

THE VIGNETTES

147

Khonsumes caption: 1. In front of the praising/elevating figure beneath the barque:'" ~

T3-tnn "Tarenen."

Pedamenopet caption: 1. Above the six mummies to the left and right of the giant, central arms:

=. =. =.

-. -. -.

~~~

~_~ ~_~.

•• ~

~~~

mw(jw) Nnw "Watery one of Nun." (6x)

Padineith caption:

1. Above the six mummies to the left and right of the giant, central arms:

=. =. =.

Pi •

~

mw(jw) Nnw "Watery one of Nun." (6x)

Nakhtnebef caption: 1. Above the heads of the three standing mummies on the left:'w

===

~ 000 ~ 000 ~ 000

~I

~I

~I

UW jm(j) Nnw "Those who carry (up) from Nun." (3x)

~~=~~=~~=

The central vignette of [he "Aker group" depicts the passage of the sun god aboard his night barque into the body of Aker, followed by his subsequent reemergence aboard the day barque from the other half of the god's body. A major focus of the tableau is the figure of the earth deiry, who appears as a giant double lion,'" each of whose heads is labeled unambiguously as "Aker" (,kr), in the version of Ramesses VI. Only rhe left and right forequarters of the creature are visible: shortly after passing over the lion's head, the path on which the solar barque travels angles sharply downward to the lower register line. The shape thus formed resembles a reversed m or gs sign c=, the interior edge of which marks the end of the visible portion of the double lion's body.'" The

119. Khonsumes includes only the first half of the tableau, with the night barque, etc.

120. Nakhtnebef includes only the second half of the tableau, with the day barque, etc. 121. Cf. representations of Aker with twO human heads in scenes 1 and 2, and in fully human form in scenes 49 and 57; representations of Aker from the third division of the Book of Caverns (Piankoff 1944, plate 27) and fifth hour of the Amduat (Hornung 1972, 102- 3, fig. 5; 1963- 67, 104-6) depict the deity as human-headed (see notes to scene 2 for additional references). Two-dimensional representations of Aker as a double lion, as in the present scene, are much less common. The god's name is determined once with the hieroglyph .£::1., in the pyramid of Pepi II (PT §2255a, in AEPTS, 77), but the association of Aker with the double lion does not appear to predate the Old Kingdom (Hornung 1975a, col. 114); later amulet Hsts provide the more generic term !)ns, "one who goes in two directions," for amulets exhibiring the double-Han form (Hornung 1975a, col. 114; Ogdon 1986, 131-32; also cf. De Wit 1951,91); in the Coffin Texts, the name of Aker (and that of the rdated earth divinities, the Akeru) is often determined with the Seth animal, and the compound name Aker-Seth occurs in spell 365 (CT 5:27d), suggesting an additional connection between those two deities (B. Altenmiiller 1975, 13), although it remains unclear whether this relationship is one of form or function. 122. The rules of spatial disttibution in Egyptian two-dimensional art (see Schafer 1986, §§4.3-4.4) complicate the interpretation of the truncated double lion in the present tableau, such that once cannot say with certainty whether the path physically bisects the body of a single, double-headed animal or merely conceals the hindquarters of twO complete lions placed back to back (cf. the double lion Rw.tj

148

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

truncated halves of the lion. in turn. recall two ~,.t hieroglyphs placed back to back. ~~.OD Understanding these images as two "front" (~,.t) ends. with no visible back. the solar barque may be said to pass from "beginning" to "beginning" without end, w forming a concise represen"tarion of the perpetual journey of the sun.125 As such, it is identical in function, if not form, to the concluding representations of the Amduar, Book of Gates, and Book ofCayerns.1 2~ This association becomes explicit on the fimerary papyrus of Djedkhonsuiusankh, which juxtaposes the present scene with an abbreviated version of the Amduat SchlujSbild. placed directly above it (see app. 2. plate 18b). The complete Aker tableau. including both the left and right halves of the god's body. appears in the versions of Ramesses VI, Djedkhonsuiusankh, and Pedamenopet. The versions of Nakhtnebef, Horira'a, and Khonsumes include only one half of the double lion. in lieu of the complete tableau. The papyrus of Djedkhonsuiusankh also incorporates an additional group of figures-including a third lion- to the left of Aker. which is not found in any of the other versions of the present scene (see scene 5b. below). In the versions of Ramesses Vl, Djedkhonsuiusankh, Pedamenoper, and Padineith, an upright sarcophagus appears within each half of Aker's body. Inside each of the two sarcophagi stands a bearded male. garbed in a kilt. facing outward. '" The accompanying text identifies these figures as the "corpses of Shu in his (Aker's) breast."'" In the version of Ramesses VI, the sarcophagi fit easily within the spacious forequarters of the lion. The sarcophagi in the versions of Djedkhonsuiusankh. Pedamenopet. and Padineith. on the other hand. fill virtually all of the available space within the creature. The version of Khonsumes places the sarcophagus just outside of Aker's body, above his front paw. while that of Nalthtnebef om irs both the sarcophagus and its occupant altogether. Between the two halves of the double lion. a large pair of arms rises up from the earth. holding aloft the solar disc. As the disc emerges, it proclaims co the denizens of the Underworld: "Your corpses are established in your placeCs)."129 Programmatic images of paired arms raising the disc appear with great frequency in comb inscriptions, on papyri and coffins, as a means of representing the cyclical motion of the sun between the Underworld and sky.'" The position of the arms mimics the "embracing" hieroglyph (D32). which is used frequently to depict the intimate relationship between the king and a protective deity. l3I The arms are identified in the version of Ram esses VI as the "arms of Nun" cr. wj Nnw), suggesting that Aker's body serves as a portal co

O.

represented in the vignene to BD 17), as suggested perhaps by the complete lion form employed in a variant of the present tableau from the sarcophagus of Naklunebef, discussed below. 123. Piankoff 1947b, 76, indicates that the paired lions' forequarters in the early Saite period romb ofPedamenopet face one another, i.e., ~J) . A survey of this monument by tne author in 2008 has now shown this description to be in error: Pedamenopet's lions face ourward, in the usual mann er; for lions facing one another, cr. the fu nerary papyrus ofDjedkhonsuiusankh, discussed below. Note that the latest version of the scene, from the sarcophagus ofNakhrnebef, includes the complete lion's body: ~. 124. For the use of f/J.t as either a spatial or temporal "beginning," as contrasted with its "end" (Pl}. wj), see Wb Ill, 19- 20. 125. Hornung 1981, 226, connects this image, vis ~a~vis the arms that lift the solar disc from between the rwo halves of the double lion, with the many represemations of paired arm.s passing the disc between the heavens and Underworld, as symbols of the sun's perpewal motion. Cf. (he discussion of the paired lions in BD 17 as a pnpttuum mobile in Derchain 1975-76, 156; Piankoff 1957a, 23, already expressed a similar view, with regard to the double lions and paired arms on a Twenty~Firs( Dynasty funerary papyrus of Hor~Weben. 126. See Hornung 1981, 226. Compare also the modified Book of Caverns Sch/ujtbi/d (scene 22, below), which includes the figure of a bearded deity arched over an oblong cumulus, mimicking the posture of the sky goddess Nut. 127. I.e., the god faces the approaching night barque, on the right, and watches the departure of the day barque, on the left. Compare the pair of figures that flank scene 19 on a Late period cartonnage pectoral (app. 2, plate 34), but face inward. 128. R6.BA.5.68, col. 2: bJ. wI Sw m snb.14 The pairing of Shu and Aker can be traced back to the Coffin Texts (IT 6: 140), and Pyramid Texts (PT §325a), where the two gods represent the earth and air naversed by the justified deceased (8. Altenmiiller 1975, 13; Hornung 1975a, 114). 129. R6A.5.67: bJ. wI-In mn-Ij m s.(w)t-I(n). This short text appears directly above the disc itself. 130. Hornung 1981, 220-22; also compare scenes 25-27. 131. Wilkinson 1992, 51 . The goddess Nut often appears with her arms held in a similar fashion, embracing the solar disc (thus, also the deceased!), on the underside of coffin lids.

-

THE VIGNETTES

149

the primal waters, into which the sun god must plunge, in order that he might emerge rejuvenated. III The version of Padineith also alludes to this equation through a unique variation on the Aker motif in which the double lion's body transforms into vertical waves of blue-green water, which begin just behind the creature's haunches, connecting the paired forequarters and crossing the entire central portion of the tableau. In the version of Ramesses VI, this region is identified as the "Place of Destruction" (/:lImy. I),'" alluding to th e dissolution of the god's nocturnal form inside Nun, which must take place before assuming his rejuvenated, diurnal manifestation. As a depiction of the reborn sun's emergence from the symmetrical, leonine boundary of the primordial waters, J34 the Aker tableau may be conceived of as a sort of chehonic counterpart to the terrestrial horizon. This interpretation is supported by the text that accompanies the image on the sarcophagus ofNakhtnebef, which explains: "How he emerges from the horizon is in the arms of his father, Nun,"13S On either side of the giant arms of Nun stand twO groups, each of which consists of three male mummies and a praising figure wearing a distinctive long kilt, which reaches all the way to the ground, past the ankles. 1'16 The praising figure on the right, labeled as Tatenen, the anthropomorphized primordial mound, receives the night barque into Aker's body.ll7 His counterpart on the left, identified as Nun, pushes the day barque out of it. The figures agai n represent the revivification of the sun through immersion in chaos: the night barque descends from the preceding underworld pathway, down through the original mound of earth, which has emerged from the primordial ocean. The sun god then leaves the ordered cosmos for a brief sojourn in the unknowable, watery expanse of Nun. The papyrus of Djedkhonsuiusankh identifies the solar deity (equated with th e deceased) at this critical juncture as nb sO, a "possessor of mystery."138 The infinite and undifferentiated character of the primordial ocean that receives the sun god is not often depicted explicitly in two-dimensional art. 139 As a result, the solar barque passes temporarily from view at the center of the tableau. 1olQ After an undisclosed period of time,HI the day barque then erupts forth from the primal ocean,'" propelled by the vety water itSelf, as personified by Nun in anthropomorphic form. On the papyrus of

132. Thus, Djedkhonsuiusankh, caption 2, refers to the giant arms (of Nun} as: bJ mw wbn dr, "'The btl of the wafers that rise and expeL" For egress from {he ordered cosmos, remrning to the scate of precreation, as a necessary component of rebirch, see Hornung 1996, 16 1-62. 133. R6. BA.5.66, col. I. C( the simi larly comported "arms that destroy, which are before the Place of Destruction," from scene 26 (R6.B.3.26.61 , cols. 1-2: r. wj Jpmy. w ~nlj I)lmy./). 134. For the association of Aker with the double lions of the horizon, see De Wit 1951, 94. 135. Nakhmebef.3: pr(r)sJ m JI}.I m-I}nw r. wj jl~f Nnw. 136. These are the only two figures in the any of the Underworld Books to be dressed in this fashion. The kilts worn by male figures in these compositions typically stop before the knee; even the long kilts worn by the Nubians and Libyans in the fifth hour of the Book of Gates Stop JUSt above the ankles (see Hornung 1979-80, 2: 134-35; color reproduction in Hornung 1990a, 147, fig. 105; cf. also the long Egyptian kilts in Bonnet 1917, plate 7 (42 and 49), which also Stop at the ankJc}. The long garment from the present tableau is not ind icated in the two Twenty-First Dynasty fun erary papyri, whose figures are rendered in oudine only. 137. Note that the position of the night barque on the left of the tableau, as well as that of the day barque on the right, reflects the Egyptian connection between right (jmn)/west (jmn.r) and left (jJby)/east (jJb.t). However, this observation only holds true for the versions of Ramesses VI, Khonsumes, Pedamenopet, and Padineith , which show the night barque moving from right to left; the parallel versions of Djedkhonsuiusankh, Horira'a, and Nakhtnebef all depict the night barque as it travels from left to right (see §3.4, below). 138. Djedkhonsuiusankh, caption 1. See DuQuesne J 993, 25- 28, for insightful discussion of the causative formation s!1J and the concept of mysteries and esoteric knowledge in ancient Egypt. \39. But cf. the concluding representation fro m the Book of Gates, which depicts the emergence of the solar barque from Nun in some detail (see Hornung 1979-80, 2:289-92). 140. For a possible representalion of the hidden events that transpire during the sun's sojourn in Nu n, see scene 57. below. 14 1. This is the only instance in the Book of the Earth in which the passage of time is clearly indicated, as shown by the different stages of the sun god's movemenr through the scene in multiple images (for representations of multiple stages of action via the repetition of images, see Schafer 1986, 227- 30). 142. It seems likely that the night barque must phYSically transform into the day barque while inside of Nun, JUSt as the elderly sun god transforms into his own, rejuvenated form.

150

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

Djedkhonsuiusankh, the Great God, formerly a "possessor of mystery," now acquires the epithet nb ('no, "possessor oflife.,,143 The sun's disappearance into the primordial waters may recall eschatological themes alluded to in the Book of the Dead. !oU Such texts serve as a reminder of the delicate balance struck between ordered existence and dissolution into chaosHS_a balance predicated upon the continued rej ~vena[ion of the sun within the same chaotic waters that will ultimately reabsorb the world. '" It is precisely in regard to rhis theme that the Aker tableau sp oaks .'" The two groups that stand on either side of the arms of Nun are differentiated in the tomb of Ramesses VI by the incteased level of internal detail applied to the figutes on the left, vetsus th e more summarily executed figures on the right. The captions employed in versions of Ramesses VI, Pedamenopet, and Padineith identify each of the mummiform figures as a "watery one of Nun" (mwjw Nnw). The number of the various central figures included in the later versions varies considerably: Djedkhonsuiusankh includes only two mummies on the side of (he night barque. and omits the solar disc above the ceneral pair of arms. In the contemporary recension of Khonsumes, the tableau stops entirely after the first praising figure, shown receiving the night barque. The sarcophagus of Nakhtnebef presents the most innovative variation, showing two mummiform figures on the "day side," and three on rhe "n ight side,"'~ but omitting both of the praising figures. In addition, [wo large fig utes of Isis and Nephthys have been added on either side of the arms of Nun-the former on the "night side," the latter on the "day side."1.9 These two goddesses extend their arms above the central arm-pair and its disc, elevating a second solar disc, within which hovers a winged scarab. ISO Yet another variation appeared originally in the vers ion of Horira'a, which has not survived intact. Enough traces remain, however, to confirm that, for the first time, [wo praising figures were shown benearh the night barque, although the names of neither of these figures have survived.151 In addition, an image of the deceased was, for the first time, added to the right of rhe scene. The iconography of the [wo solar barques is particularly noreworthy, as this is the only place in the Book of the Earth where the morning and evening boats!51 are represented as distinct from the lotus-prowed solar vessels found elsewhere in the composition. !5J As opposed to the latter craft, the stern of the morning and evening boats recurve much more dramatically, forming a semicircle, which terminates in a point, rather than a lotus blossom. 15~ The most noteworthy addition, however, are the large reed mats, which hang from the prow of each

143. Djedkhonsuiusankh, caprion 1. 144. E.g., ch. 175b: "This land shall recurn into [he Deep, into the Rood, as it was aforetime. (Only) r [i.e. , Re] shall survive together with Osiris, after I have assumed my forms ... which men know not and gods see not." (translation after T. G. Allen 1974, 184). 145. The idea of a "balance" between order and chaos is echoed, e.g., in Kemp 1989,4; for an interpretation of the supposedJy "thermodynamic" relationship between creadon and chaos as a form of entropy, see van Walsem 1997. 146. S. Morenz 1973,167-68. 147. Assmann 1969,68, nr. 30 and n. 118, citing also Schott 1965. 148. I. e., the reverse of the Djedkhonsuiusankh variant. Nakhtnebef's inclusion of three figures on the "night" side is also noteworthy, inasmuch as the night barque ir.sdf has been omirced. For the identification of the "day" and "night" halves of the Nakhcnebcf tableau, see below, scene 6 and §5.4. 149. For the directional associations of these two goddesses, see scene 14, n. 300. 150. For this and other programmatic representations of the passing of the solar disc, see scene 10, n. 249. 151. The anthropOid figures stand on either side of the descending pathway of the solar barque; the figure to the right receives the barque, while the one to the left occupies the position held normally by one of the forequarters of the god Aker (see app. 2, plate 33). 152. The traditional names of the night and day barques, mskr.t and m(nfj.l, do not occur in association with this scene (for references, see Jones 1988,246, nr. 43, and 247, nc. 52); the iconography of the two vessels, however, is fully consistent with other such representations from the New Kingdom and later (see Roulin 1996, 1:74-78; and Assmann 1995,49-50, n. 63; for possible precursors in the iconography offuneral boats from the Old Kingdom, see also H. Altenmtiller 2004). 153. Compare scenes 1, 2, 3, and 9. Only Nakhrnebef (app. 2, plate 35) employed the more generic, lorus-type vessel in his version of the present scene; the forms of the barques in the versions ofPedamenopet and Padineith cannot be reconstructed with any confidence. 154. The recurve of the prow in the version ofHorira'a (app. 2, plate 33) is less pronounced.

THE VIGNETTES

151

of the (\Va vessels. ISS This motif occurs most often in other contexts with the evening barque, but can also appear with the morning barque during the first and laSt hours of the day.'" Roulin has suggested that the mats might serve to protect the boat from winds, which assail the craft at the border of the Underworld. 157 In addition, Goebs has explained the variable complexity afits decoration as a means of representing the increasing luminosity of the solar vessel as it approaches the moment of sunrise. ISS Atop the reed mar at the front of the craft rests an inverted semicircle. In the evening barques of Ramesses V1 and Khonsumes, this area is occupied by a human figure / S9 seated with his hand to his mouth, in the posture of the "speaking man" hieroglyph • .1!l!. The use of this gesture might indicate the figure's role as lookout. tesponsible for warning the crew of dangers in the boat's parh,l60 but might also refer to the recitation of protective spells and formulae.161 In the version ofDjedkhonsuiusankh, a solar disc replaces the seated man. In representations of the evening barque from other compositions. this position is frequently filled by the "child" hieroglyph. ~ ,162 which probably represents the king as a manifestation of the sun god. l63 In the corresponding position on the morning barque, Ramesses VI shows traces of a wr-swallow, ~, the usual daytime counterpart to the seated child.'" The swallow was regarded as the hetald of the dawn.'" which explains its presence on the day barque as it emerges from the body of Aker.'~ In the version ofDjedkhonsuiusankh the swallow has been omitted. and the prow of the day barque remains vacant. The crews of the day and night barques also serve ro distinguish these two craft from the vessels found elsewhere in the Book of the Earth. Gone ate th e anthropoid figures of Horus. Khepri. and the various attendant deities. Gone also is the anthropoid form of the sun god with his usual trappings. the ws scepter and ankh. Appearing now in his nascent form, the sun prepares for birth as a ram-headed scarab---a form that, prior to

155. The so-called Treibtafoln, or propulsion mats, most likely represented by the Egyptian term SJ (Goebs 1998, 59; but cf. also Jones 1988, 189, n. 159: "finalis (?) of hull, 'end_pieces.'''). 156. Goebs 1998, 59; compare the representations of the day and night barque (each with elaborate Trtibtaftln) from the tomb of Mutirdis (Assmann 1977, 91, fig. 41). 157. Roulin 1996, 1:74-75; Landstrom 1970, 118-19, also assigns a protective function to the object. 158. Go,bs 1998. 64-65. 159. The crewman who stood at the prow of a boat was designatedjry 1)J.t, literally "keeper of the front" Uones 1988, 64, n. 67); cf. Assmann 1995, 49-50, n. 63, who links the seated figure in the prow of the solar barque with the "helmsman in the Boat of Millions" mentioned in a stela of Ptahnefer (Cairo JE 12/24/66). Properly speaking, the position of "helmsman" should designate the one who phYSically steers the craft, as indicated by his Egyptian designationsjry nfry.t andjry I)m.w, "oar keeper" Uones 1988,64-65, nos. 66 and 68). 160. See, e.g., the standing "pilot" figure in the bow of a vessel represented in the Old Kingdom tomb chapel of Kaipura, who advises the trimmer to mind the sails in the face of approaching winds (Silverman 1997, 175). 161. Compare the role of the "reciter" magician, who also sits hand-to-mouth in the prow of the vessel. in several fording representations of (he Old Kingdom, discussed in Rimer 2008, 227-88. 162. In the version of Horira'a: A. 163. Dorman 1999, 90; Goebs 1998, 65, citing Feucht 1984; the sun god in the form of a child is designated by the term fJy in the morning, becoming nfJb, the "old man" each evening (van Dijk 1979-80, 17). On the semantic range of the child hieroglyph as an iconographic motif generally, see Wilkinson 1992, 21. 164. Assmann 1995,49, n. 63. 165. T, Void, 1972; Wilkinson 1992. 153; 1994b. 23. 166. Goebs's comment (1 998, 65) chat, "on the Trdbtaftl of Ramesses VI, the swallow appears to coincide with sunset," fails to take into account the significance of the Aker tableau as a perpetuum mobile, summarizing both the nocturnal and diurnal aspects of the solar journey; in point of fact, the clear emergence of the day barque out of Aker's body could scarcely allude to the sun god's rising with more clarity.

152

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE E{\RTH

the Twenty-First Dynasty/67 only appears otherwise in the concluding representation (0 the Book of Caverns. 1bll Flanking the god in his transfigu red state are two ba-birds/69 identified in the version of Ramesses VI as the bas of Khepri and Arum. These twO figures correspond with the forms of the risi ng and setting sun, respectively, 110 as indicated also by their placement on the left (= morning) and r~ght (= evening) of the ram-headed sun god.'" By alluding to the forms assumed by the sun through the course of the day, even as plunges into the deepest pit of the underworld at night, the role of the Aker tableau as a summary of the entire solar journey is further reinforced. m

Scene 5 represents one of the most detailed images of solar revivification through emersion in chaos known from ancient Egypt. As an explicit depiction of the solar barque's transit through the primordial waters, the Aker tableau may be compared with the final scene from the Book of Gates.'" Like the latter concluding representation, the Aker tableau encapsulates the most important features of the solar journey as a form of perpetuum mobile. 17~ On the one hand, the image represents a locale in the very depths of the underworld, a sort of underworld horizon, from which the preborn sun emerges. On rhe other, the explicit presence of the day barque, the identification of the vignette as an 11;.1 in the version ofNakhtnebef, and the characteristic arm-pair, which raises the solar disc, all serve to link the tableau with the sun's ultimate rising from the eastern mountain of the terrestrial horiwn and his subsequent passage through the daytime sky.11S The association of this image with the concluding representations from the Amduat, Book of Gates, and Book of Caverns is nor, however, a merely fortuitous or academic comparison. By the Twenty-First D ynasty, the Egyptians themselves began to juxtapose the Aker tableau from the Book of the Earth with the final scenes from the Amduat and other Underworld Books. The moSt striking example of this phenomenon yet identified occurs on the funerary papyrus of Djedkhonsuiusankh. There, one nnds the standard Amduat-style conclusion after a number of scenes from the "Book of Aker" group,l76 including the present tableau, directly above which was placed a second, abbreviated version of the Amduat SchlufJbild (app. 2, plates 18- 19). Another combination of the Amduat conclusion with the Aker motif

167. See A. Niwinski 1987-88, 104-5, who characterizes this image in the early Third Intermediate period as a "the most compact form [of] the idea of the Supreme Being," whom he identifies as Re-Horakhty-Atum-Khepri, noting also that the figure's assumption of Osirian trappings (such as the auf crown in p. 105, fig. 20) reRects of the union of me solar and Osirian divine principles; for the union of Re and Osiris, see scene 68, below. 168. See Piankoff1945, plate 121. 169. The bo-birds are replaced by [\vo uraei on the sarcophagus of Nakhtnebef. 170. The same [\vo gods accompany the solar barque in scene 1. Compare also the representation of the triple sun god Khepri-ReArum, from the introductory scene to the Litany of Re (Hornung 1975-76, 2:28-30 and 55; and Piankoff 1964c, 22-23 and place 3), with references to the mree gods as fo rms of the sun in the Pyramid Texts, Coffin Texts, and Book of the Dead, discussed in ]. Allen 1988, 10- 12. 171. The right- Ieft/west-east orientation of the Aker tableau reflects the Egyptians' Nile-centric worldview: facing south, the sun rises from an observer's left and sets on their right (see, generally, J. Allen 2003, 29; also cf. Fischer 1976c, 127-28, who notes a general tendency in Egyptian an to locate the more important elements of a scene on the left, which was equated with Upper Egypt as the "from" of the country); on the left/ right dichotomy as represented in three dimensions, vis-a.-vis tomb architecture, see ch. 2, n. 74. In. Hornung 1981 , 226, nOtes the thematic similarity be[\Veen this image and the SchLujfbild from the Book of Gates, in terms of their representation of the sun's elevation via the "arms of Nun" from the primordial waters and the scenes' shared function as summary representations of the solar journey. 173. For which , see Hornung 1979- 80,2:289- 92; in the Book of Gates, the primordial waters themselves are depicted in place of the god Aker, together with their personification as rhe god Nun, who raises the barque, as in the present scene. 174. On the complex iconography of the various Schlulbildu, including the present tableau, as summary representations of the solar journey, see Hornung 1981, 217- 26. 175. 1his location is speCifically identified as (jw jJb, "mountain of the east," in the concluding representation of the Book of Caverns (Piankoff 1945, 47), which shares irs image of the sun god as a ram-headed scarab with the Aker tableau from the Book of the Earth; in addition, the annotation to the following/adjacent scene 6 also names its location as (jw pn jJbu, "this eastern mountain" (R6.B.4.6.69, row 1). For the use of (jw jJb in the context of temple "transfigurations" (Verkhrungen), cf. Assmann 1969, 93. 176. Scenes 3-9; see §5.4, below.

THE VIGNETTES

153

occurs on a contemporary papyrus of Gaursushen (app. 2, plare 38a).'" There, rhe Amduat-sryle concluding scene at rhe end of the papyrus adds a pair of recumbent lions, placed back ro back, from the midst of which emerges a large solar disc surrounded by a protective serpent. Within the disc stands the ram-headed sun god, leaning heavily upon a staff. in geriatric fashion. On one level, this image might simply be interpreted as a variant of the "Two Lions" (Rw.tj), inserted appropriately near the concluding scene as a semihieroglyphic label designating the location as the horizon .'n On the other hand, the bodies of the lions have been placed so closely rogether as to appear virtually jOined at the hip, while their recumbent stance differs from the sitting posture that Rw.tj typically assumes, for example, in the seventeenth chapter of the Book of the Dead, as well as in contemporary Mythological Papyri.'n In addition, the clearly aged form of the sun god, whose stance resembles the hieroglyphs Jj\ and ~,I80 seems somewhat unusual here, at the very edge of {he underworld, only moments from the paine of rebirth. ISl Taken together, it seems quite plausible that this constellation of images may have been intended to evoke the Aker tableau, with its combination of chthonic and horizon imagery linked with an Amduat-style conclusion, as in the much-expanded version of Djedkhonsuiusankh. At the same time, a representation of the union of Re and Osiris (scene 68), which occurs beneath Gautsushen's double lions, also recalls the juxtaposition of that scene with another Aker tableau (scene 2) in the tomb of Ramesses VI.l8l This may suggest an attempt by the authors of the Gaursushen papyrus to synthesize the originally distinct representation of Aker from the present tableau with that of scene 2. The representation of Aker as the paired forequarters of cwo lions recalls the image of the god as a bisected. double sphinx from the Cavern of Sokar, in the fifth hour of rhe Amduat. '" However, the fundamental equation of the double sphinx in the depths of the Underworld with the twin lions of the visible horizon may be traced back at least as far as the Middle Kingdom, to an apotropaic knife of the later Twelfth Dynasry. ,.. At the precise midpoint of this atypically symmetrical 16S artifact appears the image of a double sphinx above a scarab

177. Gautsush en A, currently housed in the Metropolitan Museum (MMA 25 .3.31); published in Piankoff 1957a, 181- 84. 178 . Thus, also the accompanying caption: "Coming out of the Western (sic) Mountain, going to rest in the Eastern (sic) Mountain, every day" (Piankoff 1957a, 182; for examples of the possibly intentional textual interchange of west and east, as an expression of (he perpetual motion of the sun, see Derchain 1975-76, 157-58). 179. E.g., papyrus Hor-Weben A (Cairo, or. 133, in Piankoff 1957a, plate I). Note that there is no apparent overlap between Ruti and Aker in the Coffin Texts (see B. Altenmiiller 1975, 13- 14 and 121-23, respectively), although the roles of these two gods as guardians begin to overlap already in the Book of the Dead (De Wit 1951, 94; Hornung 1975a, cols. 114-115). 180. The rear line of the figure's back, left arm, and left knee each exhibit a sharply defined, obtuse angle of approximately 130, conveying an overall sense of decrepitude, which may suggest the more infirm jJW sign (A 19; for an elaborate. "realistic" variant, see Fischer 1963,23- 24), rather man Gardiner's "less senile" form (A20). Fischer 1976a, 87- 93. has demonstrated the use of HI in the Old and Middle Kingdoms for a range of terms including wr, "great (:::senior)," j;w(w), "old," smsw, "eldest," and (:;, "great." The Underworld Books repeatedly refer to the sun as nIr (), the "Great God," and it is perhaps to [his epithet that the form of the deity on the Gautsushen papyrus alludes (for r:; as a term denoting age, see p. 90). 181. The concluding scenes of the Amduat and Book of Gates each depict the sun in his rejuvenated, scarab form as he approaches the edge of the Underworld (see Hornung 1963-67.2: 19 1; 1979-80, 2:290), while the corresponding Book of Caverns Schlujfbild represents the god as a ram-headed scarab (Piankoff 1945, 45). 182. Cf. app. 2, plate 9, and the individual scene entries for 2 and 68; scene 2 depicts Aker as a double sphinx with two human heads (as opposed to the fully leonine a5pect from the present scene), beneath the solar barque. 183. For which, see Hornung 1972. 113-14 ("Aker, der das geheime Fleisch hiiret"); 1963-67, 2: 106. Note that Aker appears as a human-headed double sphinx in the Amduar representation . 184. British Museum or. 18175, published in H. Alrenmiiller 1965, 2:50-52. Altenmiiller has dated the piece on srylistic grounds to ca. 1850 B.C., roughly contemporary with Senwosret III. A detailed examination of the iconography of the knife, in relation to (he memes discussed in the present work, may be found in Roberson 2009a, 427--45. 185. In general, the apocropaia tend to exhibit a more overtly knife-like shape, which may have been intended to echo the weapons held by the apotropaic demons inscribed upon them (Ritner 2008, 235); the number of symmetrical wands, on the other hand, is comparatively small (H. Altenmiiller 1965, 1:31, n. 2; six examples cited from a corpus of 132 objects, or roughly 5%).

154

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE URTH

beede (app. 2, plate 38b). The lattet figure is extremely uncommon in an apottopaic context.'" Its juxtaposition beneath the double sphinx recalls the consistent placement of the solar beede alongside Aker, as found later in the Undetworld Books.'" In addition, two lions appear at either end Of the magical knife, facing outward. The lions at either end of the piece identify clearly it as a horizon in minia[Ur~. I88 The knife's upward-pointing, symmetrical curve further reinforces this association, evoking both the paired ~oun(ains of the horizon and the distinctive, semicircular border of the Undetworld itself. At the same time, the placement of Aker and the scaraboid sun god at the center of this miniature horizon, which also happens to be the lowest point of the wand's arc, suggests that the iconography of the two gods must already have developed many of the mythological characteristics associated with them in tableaux such as those found later in the Amduat, Book of Caverns, and Book of the Earth. ,.. In addition to the mythological significance of the present scene generally, the version ftom the tomb of Ramesses Vl is also highly unusual in that it also interacts to an unparalleled degree with other Earth scenes on the same wall. While scene 5 appears at the center of the bottOm register on the right wall, a complementary image of the solar barque atop Aker, in the form of a double, human-headed sphinx (scene 2), appears in the upper register of the same wall, directly above it. Becween these paired Aker tableaux are a representation of the solar disc above the mummy of Re-Osiris (scene 68) and a single large column of text containing the name of the deceased king. This group combines to create an unmistakable vertical axis on the right wall, bounded by the two forms of Aker at either end (see app. 2, plate 9).1 d (§3.3.1). 194. Piankoff 1957a, 206, translates tenratively, "Lord of heads, who guards (?) his body." 195. For nn sw? The sense of the last column is unclear.

156

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

6. Above the barque:

-=f'1 ~="U:1

m

Wsjr ant} stl !lw.t nb nr.t·f "Osiris, who is before the mystery of the temple, (namely) the master of his terrifying (Iand)."'% ,

\\ 0

On the far left, a lion's forequarters, facing right, mark the beginning of the bottom register. Before this figure stand, from left to right, a hawk headed mummy, a figure with two serpent heads, a serpent balancing on its tail, a crocodile-headed figure, and barque. The barque contains a small baboon, which sits atop a tall pedestal, flanked by a rarn-headed bird on the left and a praising, human-headed ba-bird on the right. The entire group immediately precedes [he left side of the main Aker tableau (scene 5), on the ri ght. The present figures constitute

the latest known additions to the Book of the Earth corpus of vignettes.

6. Aker Group 4 (fig. 5.6)'" Five+ occurrences: Ramesses VI (pictured). Funerary papyrus of Djedkhonsuiusankh (app. 2, plates 18b- 19a). Pedamenopet (app. 4, p. 25). Mutirdis (probable, now destroyed). '~ Padi neith (app. 4, plate 31). Sarcophagus of Nalthtnebef (app. 4, plate 35) . Text: R6.B.4.6.69-70; Dj.2.6.3- 4 Ramesses VI captions: I. In front of each of rhe seven towing serpents on the left: jdb(.t) "(She) of the shore."

2. In front of each of the seven towing serpents on the right:

-

7f.

ssmw(.t) "(She) who guides."

f\... Pedamenopet caption: 1. In front of each of the four towing serpents preserved on the left: jdby.t n n "She of the shore." orr

=

A group of coiled uraei with human (female) heads and arms'~ pull a tow tope that is fastened to the day barque, as it emerges out of the body of Aker (scene 5). The figures all sit facing the barque, which they

196. Cf. also Piankoff 1957a, 207. who translates. "he who resides in the mysteries of (he castle aHear."

197. Homung 1972. 444-45: Piankoffl957a, 206: 1953,25: 1954,345 and 347. 198. See below, §5 .4. 199. Serpents with human female heads are not uncommon in three-dimensional art (e.g., Silverman 1996c, with additional parallels at n. 1); such pieces appear often with head adorn ments and regalia associating them specifically with various goddesses, such as Renenutet, Meretsegcr, Hathor, or Isis, although any goddess could, in principle be associated with the serpent form , as indicated, for example, by the

THE VIGNETTES

157

Fig. 5.6. Aker Group 4 (tomb of Ramesse, VI; after Piankoff 1954, fig. 105). Reproduced by permission of Princeton University Press.

pull coward rhemselves. passing the tow rope over their heads, to coil up behind them as the barque is drawn closer. There are fourteen towing figures in the version of Ramesses VI. The number of figures on the papyrus 2OO Djedkhonsuiusankh has been reduced to twelve, as found also in the version of Padineith. The version of

Rames,e, VI includes a short speech by the towing goddesses in which they marvel at the sun god's beauty as he passes by. A much longer speech by these same figures-now addressed directly to Re and solar disc--{)ccurs in the version ofPadineith. Unfortunately, the latter text is badly damaged and only partially reconstructable. An abbreviared, hybrid variant of the present scene occurs on the sarcophagus lid of Nakhmebef, which replaces the towing serpent figures with a pair of human-headed ba-birds, recalling the figures that tow the night barque in scene 3. Despite this similarity, [he overall configuration of the Nakhrnebef variant corresponds more

closely with the present rableau. The ba-birds from scene 3 walk forward, dragging the barque behind them, with only their heads turned back toward the craft. By contrast, the Nalthmebef variant depiCts the ba-birds as faCing the barque itself, which they pull up and out of the body of Aker, toward themselves. In addition, the solar boat that emerges out of Aker (i.e., the day barque) from the preceding scene (5) is always physically connected to the tow rope, whereas the night barque invariably abandons its connection to the rope as it descends into Aker. The Nakhmebef variant, like those of Ramesses VI and Djedkhonsuiusankh, clearly depicts the rope as connected to the emerging craft. 7. Aker Group 5 (fig. 5.7t'

Three+ occurrences: Ramesses VI (pictured). Funerary papyrus of Djedkhonsuiusankh (app. 2, plate 19a). Pedamenopet (app. 2, plate 25). Padineith (probable, now destroyed). Text: R6.B.4.7.71 -72; Pa.B.3.7.13 Ramesses VI captions: 1. Above the hawk- and human-headed, standing mummies, respectively: o /J f:lr dw1.t 1.--.. I "=' b, /J jmn ~ "Horus of the Duat." 61f" ~ "Ba of the Hidden Land."

n*

2. Above the

twO

sarcophagi, left and right:

/1"=, ~ I ......-::.. M. '-' ~

S/J-' "Mysterious of arm."

jmn-(' "Hidden of arm."202

use of the serpent as a generic determinative for nIr.l, "goddess" (Wb II, 362; Martin 1986; S. Johnson 1990, 8); the latter, more generic use was probably intended here. 200. Possibly reinterpreted to represent the twelve hours of the day? In the Padineith version , [he figures are oriented into six groups of twO abreast. The version ofPedamenopee preserves only the lase five figures, arranged single fi le; for Nakhtnebef, see below.

201. Homung 1972, 446; Piankoff 1957" 208-9; 1953,26-27; 1954,349. 202. Cf. Amduat, ninth hour (Hornung 1987-94, 3:661, nt. 632). This name may he contrasted with the god mJ (, "Visible of arm" from the Amduat's first hour (nr. 29).

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

158

Fig. 5.7. Aker Group 5 (tomb of Ramesse, VI; after Piankoff1954, fig. 106). Reproduced by permission of Princeton University Press.

Djedkhomuiusankh captiom; 1. [n front of the hawk-headed, standing mummy on the right:'" ~

f:lr dw,.tl~ "Horus of

me Duat."

2. Above the sarcophagi, from left to right: b, njmn "Ba of the hidden one."'"

t

~~

st;J

"Mysterious of arm."

=""=

Pedamenopet captions: 1. In front of the hawk-headed, standing mummy:

A

*

f:lrdwHj"" "Horus of the Dum."

II

~

2. Above the sarcophagus on the left:

=

~

513-'

"Mysterious of arm."

203. The orientation of Dj.'s tableau is reversed from that of Ramesses VI. 204. The sedge plant following dwqi led Piankoff 1957a, 209, to the tentative translation, "Horus of the Southern (?) Netherworld." "fhe Underworld is frequently described in terms of an "upper Duat" and "lower Duat" (see Leitz 1989) but a "southern" vs. "northern" dichotomy would be unexpected. In addition, onc cannot rule out a paleographic explanation fo r the final sign, e.g., possible confusion between ... and 3 (Ij) from the hieratic (cf. Moller 1965, 2:nos. 289 (Harris Th.] and 401). Also cf. Pedamenopet, below. 20S. In (he version of Ramesses VI, (he same caption labels me adjacent standing, human-headed mummy (unlabeled on the papyrus). 206. The 6nal sign appears to represent a miscopying o r the hieratic original sim ilar to thac observed on me papyrus of Dj edkhonsuiusankh; the specific sign form em ployed here may have been influenced by spellings of fms. w ljr, the "followers of Horus" (Wb IV, 486.16-19).

THE VIGNETTES

159

This scene depicts a group of chthonic deities located beneath the serpent ine crew, which toWS the day barque above ir (scene 6). Two bearded male deities wearing short kilts lie face-down inside oval sarcophagi. The figures' epithets, "Hidden of Arm" Urn/! r)"" and "Mysterious of Arm" (stJ r), refer perhaps to theit unusual posture, in which only the left arm is clearly visible.'M To the left of the sarcophagus stands the falcon-headed mummy of "Horus of the Duat" (f:lr dw,.t). O n the right stands a bearded, male mummy identified as the "ba of the hidden land" (b, t; jrnn).'"

8. Aker Group 6 (fig. 5.8)'"

Numerous+ occurrences: Multiple royal and private sarcophagi (app. 2, plate 37a [Djedhor 2]). Ramesses VI (pictured). Funerary papyri of Djedkhonsuiusankh (app. 2, plate 19a) and Khonsumes (app. 2, plate 20a).'" Pedamenopet (app. 2, plate 24). Mutirdis (app. 2, plate 27).'" Padineith (probable, now destroyed).'" Text: Kh.1. 8.3-4; Mt.A.1.8.2; Sarcophagus.2-3 Ramesses VI captions: 1. Inside the twO upper sarcophagi, top to botrom: A'~ A'~ b,. wj

&ft&"i!.&

"Double ba."2]~

OF""

111 a

b,·tj "He of the corpse."

2. Between the upper and lower pairs of sarcophagi: ~ I""

-,......

j,.t.sn "Their mound."

I I I

3. Inside the lower two sarcophagi, top to bottom: _(i0 0 U 0. Tfn .t ru \? """"'""'" "Tefnut."

=000

Nw.t "Nut."

207. The same epithet labels figure nr. 632, from the nimh hour of the Amduat (Hornu ng 1963-67, 1: 15 7; 1987-94, 3:661) . [Q rhe left and just visible behind it. 209. Cf. Djedkhonsuiusankh, caption 2. 210. Hornung 1972,450; Piankoff 1957a, 205, 213; 1953,30,73-74; 1954,351. For the sarcophagi versions, see Manassa 2007, 42-44; von Bergmann 1885, 153-58 (Ramesses lIt, Djedhor 3, Pirkap, Nesshutefnut); and Maspero 1914-39, 1:79-80; [2 0 ] (Djedhor

208. The corresponding right arm is held parallel

1); 2;1 2-13 (2 o J (Djcdhoc 2). 211. Also note three additional funerary papyri (P. Louvre 31391Paris 39; P. Louvre 3110/Paris 17; P. Musee Barely 295/Marseille 3), which incorporate variants of the present scene into "Amduat-scyle" concl uding representations, mgether with excerpts from the Book of Gates and Book of the Dead, as discussed in Niwinski 1989, 206-8 (figs. 79-81); and see also a contemporary papyrus of the scribe Amenhotep, which includes three human-headed ba-birds perched atop burial mounds containing recu mbent mummies (apparently derived from the same Book of the Earth tableau; thus, Piankoff 19 57a, 189, n. 3 and pl. 26), employed once again in conjunction with an Amduat-style concluding representation. 21 2 . Assmann 1977, 72, n. 60 (thus, also Manassa 2007. 29, n. 113), recognized that the traces of this scene in the comb of Mutirdis probably related m the Book of the Earth, but incorrectly sought to connect the bent ~:1-plants/shades with the bent sunshades of scene 10. The scene's correct identity may be confirmed by reference to the funerary papyrus of Khonsumes and the tomb of Pedamenopec, which include identical sequences of figures (see §5.4 , below). 213. See below, §5.4 . 214. The archaizing spelling of the dual through the repetition of the entire word reflects the pairing of the ba-figures atop the sarcophagus.

\

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

160

4. Between the lower two sarcophagi:

!.~Id~o~~ ~F=++

,

nn n ntT.ty m sar pn, "These two goddesses in this form." Khonsumes captiom: 2U I. Inside the four oval sarcophagi, from left to right: II /J" /J" b,. wj'" bl.. b.l... "Double ba."

---'1

(!})uj "He of the corpse." ~~oo

0000

TfnW.t,117 "Tefnur."

Nw.t, "Nut."

Pedamenopet captions: 2. Inside the four oval sarcophagi, from left to tight: ~_? [b'.wj?J, "[Double ba?]." %

Q ~~

/» .tj, '" "He of the corpse."

:'::> 00

Tfnw.t, "Tefnur."

"=0000

Nw.t, "Nur."

Sarcophagus captions: I. Inside the four oval sarcophagi, left to right: ~ ~~

rsy, "He who awakens."

< Wh1Y>, "." §'SY, "H e who travels."

Fig. 5.8. Aker Group 6 (tomb of Ramesses VIi after Piankoff 1954, fig. 108). Reproduced by permission of Princeton University Press.

jmty, "Formed one."119

Four oval sarcophagi are grouped in two pairs,22 (J)tmw ~ "Arum."

~4f

The bearded figute of Arum lies supine while a second bearded male, identified as both "the Westerner" and the "corpse of Osiris"287 emerges from his lower body, 288 To the left stands "Horus of [he Two Arms," hands exte nded protectively over Arum's travailing form. Following Piankoff's unfortunately vague description of the caption texts, subsequent treatments of the present scene co nSistently misidentify the supine figure as Osiris, the emerging figure as Horus, and the standing figure as Arum. 28'1 Fonunately, the correct attributions of these three figures may be deduced from the original placement of the (no longer extant) captions, as indicated in Champollion's hand copy. A group of si_milarly named and comported deities, with minor variations in posture,

28t. R9.A.2.12.2, cols. 3-5: nIr.lj n4r. W smy. t~sn hJ mw jmj jr.tj n nn n n[r.tj m snty. w~sn m snf w dWJ.tjw srq(. w)jm~s(n) , "It is the goddesses who pull their hair, when the water that is in the eyes of these goddesses falls as their tears, as the blood of the Duat-dwellers, who breath by means of them." 282. For the correct identities of the figures in the present scene, see below at nn. 288-291. Also see, with caution, Abitz 1995, 151, twO

161-62 (05); 1989c, 124 (5); Homung 1972, 466-67; Piankoffl953, 45-47; 1954,362-63. 283. The text describing the present tableau appears at the end of the p receding register (see Piankoff 1953, 45; Hornung 1972, 5 13,

n.13). 284 . The names of all three gods are now lost; the transcriptions here follow ).-F. C hampollion 1884, 1:604. 285. Possibly to be unders{Qod as lfr-jw, " Horus the Heir" (LlrGG 5, 246), although the placement of a similarly named god's arms in scene 2 1 appears to be sign ificant, inasmuch as they actively grasp the arm of the Arum. 286. The orthography suggests a d eliberate pun on the rootjmn, "to hide." The accompanying text refers repeatedly to Osiris, who is the sole object of the sun god's speech (R6.A.2.13.19) as he passes by. 'The "Westerner" is also identified as one of the many form s of the sun in the Litany of Re (Hornung 1975-76, 77, n. 291; with additional references in UfGG I, 359) and is also likely related to the com mon Osirian epithet tJntjjmn.tjw, "Foremost of the Westerners," and its variants (for which , see LAGG 5,783-86). 287. R6.A.2.13. 19, col. 1. 288. Manassa 2007, 139, compares the present tableau and that of scene 14 with a group of three figures from the Book of the Night (see Roulin 1996, 1:221; 2:plate 10, bottom right), which she interprets as "the emergence of living matter ... from inan imate flesh." Stricker 1963-89, 2:87 interp rets the present scene, together with scene 14, as representations of the seed ("het zaad") that is the product of the male sex organ, which he believes to be depicted in scene 74. The basic identiry of Horus as the seed o r issue o f Osiris is mythologically sound, but cf. the unambiguous representation of divine seed that emerges as flame from the ithyphallic god, "He who hides the hours," in scene 19. 289. Thus, e.g., Manassa 2007,139, n. 339; also cf. the various studies cited with caution in n. 282, above.

THE VlGNETTES

171

Fig. 5.13. Birth of the Corpse of Osiris (tomb of Ramesses VJ; after Piankoff 1954, figs. 114-115). Reproduced by permission of Princeton University Press.

occurs as a separate scene in the tomb of Ramesses VII (scene 21, below) .290 In addition, an interesting mythological sequence may be observed in the relationship between the present tableau, in which Osiris's corpse emerges from the solar creame Arum with Horus's assistance, and scene 14, in which the corpse of Horus emerges from that of Osiris with the assistance of Isis and Nephthys. The relationship between these two scenes in the tomb of Ramesses VI is further underscored by their placement next to one another on the left wall.291 To the left of the first group292 appear seven partially ovoid or carrouche-shaped burial mounds293 arranged in two rows (three above, four below) . Inside each of these enclosures stands an anonymous,2~ naked, male figure with a frontal face, resembling the I}r hieroglyph ~. The conspicuous repetitio n of this frontal element might

290. Abitz 1995, 16 1--62 (following Piankoff 1953, 47) , also draws a comparison with a group from the Book of Caverns, which depicts Horus and Anubis as they minister to the corpsc= of Osiris (fourth division, upper register; see Piankoff 1944, plate 38). The comparison is actually more apt than Abitz himself realized, given that author's misidentification of the supine figure as Horus. 29 1. Second register, first and second scenes, respectively (see app. 2, plate 7). 292. Both Hornung 1972,466. and Abitz 1989c, 11 9, interpret these two tableaux as a single scene. 293. Words employed to desc ri ~ similar struc(Ures includejJ.l, "mound" (scene 76. R6.A.5.76.34. col. 1), 41n.t, "sarcophagus" (scene 17, caption 4) and possibly also)tr, "chapel" (scene 16, R6.A.3.16.24, col. 3). The parallelism between);,.l and rj.bn suggests that this type of struc(Ure represents a variant of the more common, fu lly ovoid sarcophagus c:=l, which may be described as either a "mound" or "sarcophagus" (for )J. t, see scene 8, Ramesses VI, caption 2; R6.B2.1.75.75 , cols. 3, 10j R6.A.3.16.24 , col. 2; R9.A. 1.54. I, col. I ; for (fbJ.t, see R6. B.4.7.71. col. 3j R7.A.1.37.2, col. 2j R9.A.3.37.3, coL 3). Occasionally, )J.( and (/.bl.t may interchange with one another within a single text (e.g., scene 47, caption 2; also cf. R6.BAA7.73, cols. 1-5; likewise in the fifth division of the Book of Caverns (Piankolf J 944, plate 53,1, as noted in Darnell 2004, 291, n. 75). In one case (scene 16) , the partially and fully ovoid shapes are juxtaposed with no apparent difference in meaning. For theju-mound as a place of burial in the Underworld Books generally, see Darnell 2004, 291 and n. 75, citing Assmann 1979, 62, 11. 75. 294. Hornung 1972, 466, suggests that these figures may be the "Ones Who Axe Mysterious of Forms" (SH.wt )rw.w) mentioned in R6.A.2.13.19, col. I.

T HE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOO KS OF THE EARTH

172

function a tacit indicator of the solar prese nce in a sce ne wh ere Re's usual ram-headed hypostasis is otherwise absent. 29S

14. The Birth of Horus 1 (fig. 5.14)'% One occurrence; Ramesses VI Text: R6.A.2. 14.20-22 Captiom: 1. Beneath rhe hands of rhe goddesses on rh e lefr and righr, respecrively: rtf!:' 1".1 JS. I Jm(y.I) Po !!J.I Nb.I-lpv.1 o~ "The corpse ofIsis-of-rhe-Amyt. "m "The corpse of Nephrhys."

i

r

00 2. Above rhe hands of rhe hawk-headed figure:

.nnJ Q fi!:' X

!!J I

f:I?"

"The corpse of Horus."

3. Above rhe stomach of rhe recumbent figure:

o

[!!J.I)m Wsjr

-

"The [corpse) of Osiris."

~ Two goddesses, identified as Isis and Nephrhys,"" minisrer to an irregularly shaped oval, wirhin which reclines a large male figu re, rhe "corpse of Osiris." The head and feet of rhe larter figure curve upward, recalling

295. For the solar connotations of frontal imagery in Egyptian art, see Favard-Meeks 1992. Also note Stricker's intriguing suggestion (1950-89,2:87) that the seven ~r-faced figu res withi n enclosures (i.e., hw.wr) might evoke the seven Hathors (Jjw.wt-J:lr) as the womb of the god Horus (for which, see Troy 1986, 55). Th is interpretation would strengthen the scene's connection with divine birth generally, although the god emerging here is the Western er/Osiris. not Horus. In addition, we must note that the term ~w. t, "'enclosure, mansion ," does not otherwise appear in conjunction with this type of ovoid structure in the Book of the Earth, which instead prefers the terms jJ .t and (/.bJ .t, discussed in scene 14, n. 293, above.

296. See Abitz 1995, 161 -62; Homung 1972, 468-69; van Dijk 1979-80, 20-21; Piankoff 1953. 47-48; 1954. 364-65. 297 . Wb 1,185.4,9, identifies the ("mJ.t/rmy.t as a body part of Osiris. Understand perhaps "that which was swallowed," in reference to the god's phallus, which was consumed by the oxyrhynchus fish and recovered by Isis? 298. The final r of Horus's name is written with the rampant serpent, 1.nn., a value which does not otherwise become common prior to the Ptolemaic period (Piankoff 1953, 48. 11 . 1; see Fairman 1943, 229, nr. 194; 1945,74). For the use of the serpent for r in cryptographic texts already during the New Kingdom, see Darnell 2004, 46; cf. the spelling of Rn, "R(e)," in scene 2, Ramesses IV, caprion 3, above. 299. Thus, Piankoff 1953, 48; the signs have mOSlly faded, bur ~ is still partially visible in Piankoff 1954 , plate 131. 300. Note that the placement ofIsis on the len ('" east) and Nephthys on the right (:: west) appears to reverse the more usual directional associations of the twO goddesses (i.e., Isis/west and Nephthysfeast; see refs. in Assmann 1969, 341, n. 19). However, inversions of the normal relationship between left/cast VJbyIjJb.I) and right/west Vmnljmn.t) arc attested elsewhere in conjunction with images of the two goddesses, e.g., in the fromispiece to the Litany of Re from , e.g., the comb of Ramesses X. in wh ich Isis appears on the left (= east) and Nephthys on the right ('" west). as in the present tableau, but with labels identifying them as the horizons of the "wes£" and "east," respectively (Rambova 1957,31-32; see also the directly analogous disposition of the twO goddesses and their directional labels on the foot end of a Late period sarcophagus discussed in Darnell 2004, 390, n. 86) . When representations of the goddesses occur on opposite sides of a comb's major axis, what might at first appear to be an inversion of the goddess' symboliC directions can result fro m the ancient perception of "left" and "right," according to which the observer stands at [he rear of the tomb, looking out (see ch. 2, n. 74) . In examples such as the present tableau, where the goddesses' locations do not correlate so obViously with the opposite sides of the tomb itself, Rambova (I 957,

THE VIGNETTES

173

Fig. 5.14. The birth of H orus 1 (tomb of Ramesses VI; after Piankoffl954, fig.U6). Reproduced by permiss ion of Princeton University Press.

the twin mountains of the horizon from which the sun emerges lO1 and forming a mirror image of the arching, sptead-eagle posture of the sky goddess Nut, who gives birth to the sun on the ceiling, above."" The hawk-headed "corpse of Horus," with a small disc behind his head, emerges from the center of Osiris's body.~ Regarding this last figure. the text states unambiguously: "the Behderite (i.e .• Horus),304 he emerges from the corpse of his farher,"305 The oval, within which Horus's birth takes place, is identified in the annotation as nnw. I, a word that originally Signified th e dung ball of the scarab beetle.'" Its use here was doubtless meant to evoke the beetle's perceived parthenogenesis and the associated concept of solar rebirth. Va n Dijk has suggested that the representation in the Book of the Earth was meant to convey the notion of Osiris's resurrection through the birth of his son, pointing out the relarively passive role played by the dead god in the vignette and the accompanying text.'"

30-38) has proposed a mythological fusion of east and west, mean[ to emphasize the unity and perpetuity of the sun god's cyclical journey from Underworld to Sky (thus, also Hornung 198 1, 217-26) . The latter situation predominates in the Book of the Earth, wherein Isis and Nephthys appear most often on the left and right, respectivciy (thus, e.g., scenes 5 (Naklltnebef variant), 9 (Khonsumes variant), and 56 (sarcophagus variant, fig. 5.5Gb), in addition to the presenr tableau), while the opposite arrangement occurs only in scene 1.

301. Noted already in Stricker 1963-89,2:88. 302. With thanks to David Silverman for this last suggestion. Compare the sim ilarly com ported figure raised by Isis and Nephthys in the fourth division of the Book of Caverns (Piankoff 1944, plate 38, first register; with additional comments in Abin 1995, 161 - 62). On the relationship between Nut and Osiris as the horizon of solar rebirth, see Billing 2002, 115 (including discussion of the present tableau). 303. The feet of the hawk-headed figu re are not visible; see the discussion of the "sunken" figure in scene 48. 304. Specifically, H orus of Edfu (Wb 1, 470.10; with additional references in L4"GG 2, 814-16; P. Wilson 1997, 326; for the original association of Horus of Behdet with a cult center in the Della and its subsequent equation with the "'Southern Behder," i.e., Edfu, see also Gardiner 1944). 305. R6.A.2.14.21, col,. 4-5, b~d.(j pr·fm ~,.(j(-f 306. Wb II, 217.9. On rhe translation of this word, see text notes to R6.A.2.14.21, col. 2. 307. van Dijk 1979-80, 20-21, "It is remarkable that [text R6.A.2.14.20] is not addressed CO the body of Osiris ... Re' does noc speak to, but on behalf of Osiris" (italics original); cf. the apparent reticence of Osiris as contrasted with the loquacious speeches of the sun god in the Book of Caverns, discussed in Onstine 1995, 69.

174

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

Fig. 5.15. The birth of Horus 2 (tomb of Ramesses VI; after Piankoff19S4, fig. 109). Reproduced by permission of Princeton University Press.

15. The Birth of Horns 2 (fig. 5.15) '"

One occurrence: Ramesses VI Text: R6.A2.1.15 .35'm The ram-headed sun god stands to the right of the scene, holding a was scepeer and ankh. He receives praise from a bearded male figure in front of him, identified in (he accompanying text as Arum. After this group come two pairs of anonymous deities, the first group ram-headed, the next with the heads of serpents. These two groups £lank a disc, from which emerges the falcon head of "Horus of the Duat" (ijr-dwJ.tj)."· It is the chthonic aspect of Horus's birth that is being stressed here, as indicated both by the ophidian character of the guardians on

the lefr,311 and [he text itself, which describes the god "when he emerges from his mystery. which is in the Duat."112

16. The Birth of Khepri 1 (fig. 5.16)'"

One occurrence: Ramesses VI Text: R6.A.3.16.24-25 Captiom: 1. The four mummies, counter-clockwise, from upper left to lower right: ~ ~

:;J

kJ jrnn.t "Bull of the West"

~

/:ISJ

~

"Ferocious."Jl~

Ifl

308. S'e Hornung 1972. 453; Piankoff 1953.33-34; 1954,354. 309. Note that this text has been switched with the narrative from scene 18, directly above it (Hornung 1972, 453). 310. R6.A2. 1. I 5.35, col. 6. For this name, see scene 9, Ramesses 6, caprion 3, n. 23 1. 311. The "goddesses (sic.?) who guard him" (n[r.wt SJ(J).wt sw). mentioned in cols. 13-15 ofche text, presumably refer these two serpent-headed figures and their ram-headed counterpartS. 312. R6.A2.1.15.35, cols. 7-9: pr=/m su-/jmj dW3.t. 313. See Hornung 1972,471; Minas-Nerpal 2006, 220-21; Piankoff 1953. 51; 1954, 367. 314. Wb Ill. 161.1-6 (said of lions, fal cons). It is very likely that "crocodile" was the intended sense here. reHecting the mummy's animal head, as in the other three examples (cf. Greco-Roman n-I;s:J, "mouth of the ferocious one," said of lions and crocodiles, in Wb II, 398.4-5). Alternately, it is possible that the signs J:!-S-3 simply represent a perturbed writing of msJ:!, "crocodile," in which the aleph-vulture substitu tes for the tn-owl (§3.7.2).

THE VIGNETTES

175

Fig. 5.16. The birth of Khepri 1 (tomb ofRamesses VI; after Piankoff 1954, fig. 119). Reproduced by permission of Princeton University Press.

nmy "He of Serpent."m

b3y "He of the ba."

The scene begins with the ram-headed sun god in his nocturnal form , holding a was scepter and ankh. In front of him, a large pair of arms, belonging to "He of the Earth" (t3Y), rise from the ground in an attitude of praise. Facing the arms is a carrouche-shaped burial mound (j,.t),JI6 within which stands the vulture(?)-headed deity, "He of the ba(-bird)."'" The central group consists of a large disc, from which a winged scarab emerges, pushing a smaller solar disC318 and Ranked by two uraei with praising arms. The scarab, Khepri. represents the nascent form of the elderly sun god,Jl9 who stands to his right. The former god appears at the very moment of unveiling his newly created wings, which he now stretches [Q their fullest extent. l2O The accompanying annotation explains: "he emerges, having come into being as 'He-of-his-light: his two arms having become the twO offspring of Khepri. who is

315. Compare Wb n, 276.5: ll~~L'-Wel.. "Name einer Schlange." 316. R6.A.3.16.24, col. 2 (for jJ.l as a burial mound, scene 13, n. 293). A later reference from the same text (col. 3) mentions jtr. wj, "two chapels," but it is not immediately dear how this term relates to the various ovoid mounds in the present tableau. It is possible that the "two chapels" refet instead to the paired mounds, which appear directly above the present tableau, in scene 66 (see also app. 2, plate 7). 317. This name, which also serves as a designation for the god Amun (LA"CG 2, 732), appears in the sixth division of the Book of Caverns (Piankoff 1945, plate 147, 13); the forty-seventh address of the Great Litany, in the Litany of Re (Hornung 1975-76, 2:68; for additional references, see LA. CC 2,732). 318. Backes 2005, 360, describes this as an image of the solar journey, comparable to the represema.rion of a scarab pushing a disc between double uraei, depicted already in the Book of Two Ways (spell 1098, SIC; see CT 7:plate 1). 319. Stricker's suggestion (l963-89, 3:270) that this image, together with scene 17, represent the spontaneous generation of the animal sou l ("dierlijke ziel"), as opposed to the vegetable soul ("plantaardigc ziei," on pp. 233) supposedly represented in scene 66 finds no suppOrt in the Egyptian texes, being based entirely upon much later Greek concepts. 320. Compare the fully extended posture here with the V-configuration exhibited in scene 17, wherein the god prepares to take flight.

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

176

pleased on account of his twO wings."m On the scarab's left appear two additional cartouche-shaped mounds beneath a fully ovoid sarcophagus. Within the twO mounds st"",d [he mummified bodies of "Serpen[" (nmy; cobra-headed) and the "Ferocious (one)" (~S3; crocodile-headed),m while inside the sarcophagus stands the bovine-headed mummy of the "Bull of the West" (k; jmn.I) .'n

17. The Birth of Khepri 2 (fig. 5.17)'" One occurrence: Ramesses VI Text: R6.A.4.17.27 Captions: I. Inside the four sarcophagi on the upper left, from left to right:

tfi!!:"

III

D

1;,.1 ;s.1

tfi!!:"

"Corpse ofIsis."'"

III

~

D

1;,. ( Nw.1

"Corpse of Nut."

2

I==::J Oc.

c.

o

tfi!!:"

tB. 1 Tfnw.I

ff!:'

1;,.( ljprj

III D c.

"Corpse ofTefnut"

III Q

"Corpse of Khepri."

--

--='"

!Il

90

~d

Oc.

2. Inside the rhree sarcophagi on the lower left, from left to right: A I;;.t In(pw)'''' tPc!::' 1;,.1 ijr'''-I;ntj Q~o "Corpse of Anu(bis)." I~ "Corpse of Horus the Foremost."'"

~

\i 1;,.1 Hr-dw;.t "Corpse of Horus of the Duat."

-

M

1 10

321. Text R6A.3.16.24 , cols. 6-8 , pr.Hpr(.w) m p(,)-n-My-j'. wj.fj bpr(-w) InS. wj n ljprV) btp(.w) n dm'.lj-fj. 322. The term }:ISJ occurs as a deSignation of the "Butcher" (mnlJ) in a ritual scene from Esna, and is also applied to the king as the "Ferocious One with upraised arm" (l.AGG 5, 478). 323. The "Bull of the West" occurs with some regularity in a wide range of religious compositions, beginning ar least as early as the Coffin Texts (LAGG 7, 251). In the Underworld Books, the name also occurs in the fouah and fifth divisions of the Book of Caverns (Piankoff 1944, plates 46,8 and 53, 3). 324. Hornung 1972, 474; Minas-NerpaI2006, 221 - 22; Piankoff 1953,54-55; 1954, 370- 71. 325. The corresponding figure is male (sic.). 326. Following Piankoff 1953,55, n. 4. 327. \fJ is a cursive variant of the "road" hieroglyph (N3 )), f;i . On the use of the laner sign for IJ.r, see Darnell 2004, 66. 328. This manifestation of Horus occurs later, from the Saite period through the Greco-Roman era, when it was associated with a variety of animal fo rms (see LAGG 5, 279).

THE VIGNETTES

177

Fig. 5.17. The birth of Khepri 2 (tomb of Ramesses VI; after Piankoff 1954, fig. 122). Reproduced by permission of Princeton University Press.

!• •

3. Inside the twO upper, middle sarcophagi, from left to right:

t

~

~.t~ "Corpse of Geb."

~ ]

J

bJ.t Wsjr "Corpse of Osiris,"

~

4. Inside the two lower, middle sarcophagi, from left to right: ~ bJ.t tjbJ.tj ~ ~aJ "Corpse of He of the Sarcophagus."

p

bJ.tSw "Corpse of Shu."

~

0 \\

=:> 329

Four upright, cartouche-shaped sarcophagi are arranged in two pairs on the far right, one above the other, l3O Two anonymous mummies--one with a human head, one with the head of a shrewmouse-stand in the upper pair of sarcophagi , facing left.

331

In the lower pair stand a hawk-headed mummy and a second mouse-

headed figure. Both anonymous figures face to the right. m To the left of the first group of sarcophagi stands the criocephalic sun god, holding a was scepter and ankh. Directly in front of him stands a second set oHour upright sarcophagi, all of whose occupants appear fully human and face to the left. The focal point of the tableau is a large solar disc, from which emerges a winged scarab, which pushes a smaller disc before him. The scarab's wings pitch forward as he prepares to take flight and a short hieratic text within the large disc explains: "this Re has come into being as great Khepri in the West.

nm

The four mummies between Re and Khepri are identified as the

corpses of Geb, Osiris, Shu, and "He-of-his-sarcophagus." After this image, seven additional sarcophagi appear,

329. For [he relacionship berween me {fbI. i-sarcophagus andjJ.l-burial mound. see scene 13, n. 293. 330. The upper figures rest on a secondary register line, presumably representing LWO paraUe! rows of sarcophagi, arranged one in front ofrhe ocher (see Schafer 1986, 166-67. 189- 205,218--24). 331. Piankoff 1953, 54, incorrectly identified the mouse-headed figure as a catfish (see Brunner-Traut 1965, 148, n. 3). The Egyptians conceived of shrewmouse (Egy. rmrm / rn), along wim the ichneumon. as one of the sightless gods associated with the blinded Horus of Leropolis (Brunner-Traut 1965, 145-57; 1980, col. 1160). Mouse-headed figures also occur in scenes 55 and 73. 332. These are the only LWO figures in me present tableau turned away from the central image of the scarab rising from its disc. The orientation of the figures. like their stacking, may reflect the distribution of the sarcophagi in three dimensions, relative to the larger figures (see n. 330). 333. R6.A.4.17.27, cols. 4-5: W pn bpr(-w) m Ijprj rJ mjmm.t.

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

178

, 1

, I

,

1 1 I I I

1

I

b ,

fig. 5.18. The birth of Khepri 3 (tomb of Ramesse, VI; after Piankoff 1954, fig. 109). Reproduced by permission of Princeton University Press.

arranged into a row of four above a row of three. J)· Each of the figures within these seven sarcophagi face

[0

[he

right and is labeled as the "corpse" (lp./) of a different divinity. The figures in the upper row consist of a scarab-headed mummy, identified as an additional manifestation of Khepri, followed by two female mummiform figures, identified as Tefnut and Nut, and a bearded male mummy, identified surptisingly as the goddess Isis.'" In the lower sarcophagi, from right ro left, stands the hawk-headed mummy of Horus-of-the-Duat,'" the ibisheaded "Foremost of Horus" (IJntj Ifr) , and a human-headed figure identified as Anubis.n>

IS. The Birth of Khepri 3 (fig. 5.18)'" One occurre; ice: Ramesses VI Text: R6.A2.2.1S.36 Captiom: 1. The two anthropoid deities on the left, from left to right: ~ A1l'f Sw ~ ~ "'xL ~ "Shu,"

t£

(J)lmw "Atum,"

~

2. The serpent, scarab, and far right ~ r' l39 Jpp

o~

''Apep.''

ba, respectively: ljprj "Khepri."

334. Sec n. 330, above.

335. Thus, Hornung 1972. 474: "Isis (a1s mannliche Gortheid)." Piankaff 1953, 55, suggestS that it is the masculine beard, rather than the name of the goddess, which is in error. The bodies of the various mummies betray no other oven indications of gender (see Piankoff

1954, plates 13/-132). 336. For this name, see scene 9, Ramesses VI, caption 3, n. 23L above. 337. This is a rare anthropomorphic image of the funerary deity sam his characteristic jackal head. Compare the fully humanoid Anubis from (he second hyposryle hall of the temple of Ramesses II, at Abydos; for other examples, see LAGG 1, 391 (a).

338. See Hornung 1972, 452-53; M;na.s-N"paI2006, 218-19; P;ankolf 1953, 33; 1954,353-54. 339. Determinative transcribed incorrectly as -=::::::11> in Piankoff 1953, 33 (cf. Piankoff 1954, place 127).

THE VIGNETTES

179

sl;mjmnt.l "The power of the West."

The ram-headed sun god stands at the head of th e scene, on the right, holding a war sceptet and ankh and pteceded by a medium-sized solat di sc. In front of this figure, facing the disc, a human-headed ba-bitd, "The power of the West," perches atop a construction made of sricksU),HO with arms raised in adoration toward the sun god. At the center of the scene rests the setpent Apep, the front and back thirds of its body bent sharply upward. The great serpent is the only figure shown facing away from the sun god in the present tableau. From the middle of Apep's arching body rises the sca rab Khepti, atop whi ch stands a second praising ba-bitd (anonymous), also otiented toward the sun god. The inverted arch of Apep's body recalls the posture adopted by the pro tective Mehen- setpent in the "Birth of the Hours" (scene 19), a theme that also tecurs in scene 7 1. ~' Such patallels need not suggest any benevolent aspect of the great solar enemy,342 but may represent the regenerative aspect of chaos, which constitutes a necessary component of solar rebirth. J43 Following [he central tableau, two fully anthropoid figures, Arum and Shu, stand with their arms extended downward, " [he face of Apep, who is in front of his cavern. Khepri emerges from his coils."w

19. The Birth of the Houts 1 (fig. 5.19)'" Five+ occurrences: Cenotaph of Seti J (probable, now destroyed).'~ Merneptah (probable, now destroyed).'" Tawosret (app. 2, plate 2). Ram esses III (destroyed).'" Ramesses VI (pictured). Ram esses IX (app. 2, plates 14, 16-1 7). Ram esseum cartonnage (app. 2, plate 34) . Text: R6.B. 2. 19. 53; R9.B.2.19. 7-9

Tawosret captions:3• 9 I. Three standing mummies beneath the head-end of the se rpent (on the tight), left to right:""

c::::J {J

Sl' jb "Mysterious of heart."

340. Thus Hornung 1972, 452: "einer Stangen- Konstruktion"; Piankoff 1953, 33, interpreted the object as a stick shelter ("un edicule compose de bitons"); for the general shape, cf. the W[S-suPPOrt,l (GEG, 521, U39) and certain wooden vase stands attested from the Eighteenth Dynasty in Killen 1980, 1:70-71. 341. Cf. also the similarly bent form of Osiris from scene 14, which serves as the locus for the divine birth of Horus, paralleling the emergence of Khepd from Apep in [he present tableau (with thanks fO Roben Ritner). 342. Thus. also Minas-Nerpel2006, 218-19. questioning Barta's earlier assessment (1985a, 127) of [he scene as a rare depiction of the serpent's "positive role." For a more traditional representation of Apep as a slaughtered enemy, see scene 76. 343. This theme is explored in greater depth in scenes 5, 28, and 29. 344. R6.A2.2.18.36, cols. 9- 14: < r > I)r ("(;)pp GnU qrr.t4 Tjprj pr~f m qlb. w~f 345. Abi" 1992, 180; 1990, 34-35 (21); V,n Dijk 1979-80, 12-15; B"gu

tw(t)jlW. w "Hem who assembles the forms." 498

1119

495. The t ex tS are oriented away from the palms of their respective hands. 496. See Assmann 1969,66-67, who defines this attribute as the effective force of the god's visible man ifestation, i.e. , the unique form Urw) that distinguishes onc god from another. 497. It is su rprising that both captions referring to the (normally feminine) urad appear to employ grammatically masculine constructions. 498. Thus, also Manassa 2007, 56. Cf. Wb V, 259.7 (said of the limbs of Osiris).

THE VIGNETTES

203

Sarcophagus captiom:'~ 1a-b. In front of the standing mummies, far left and right:"· jrnyW' / 'I;; (J:zr)'" / wsr jrw. w "Formed one / Warlike (of face) / Powerful of forms."

n'wj / [wI jrw. w / "1m wnw. wI "He who travels / Assembled of forms / Destroyer of houts."

At rhe center of the tableau stands a bearded, mummiform god. A disc sits atop his head, and larger disc floats directly above. A pair of coiled utaei flanks rhis central figure. Behind each of the cobras, a human head in profile sits on the register line; from each of these heads emerges an arm, supporting a smaller, male figure in a kilt, who holds a tiny jar or disc downward, toward rhe ourer edge of the scene. On the far left and right edges of the tableau stand rwo additional bearded, mumm iform deities, each of whom beats a disc atop his head. In all of the sarcophagus versions, a stream of water is shown descendin g from rhe discs held by rhe smaller gods, onto the discs atop the heads of the outermost pair of mummies. 5 In the earliest version, that of Ramesses III, the water pours from a nw-jar, 0, suggesting that the disc was a later development, based on the similar shape of the rwo objects. By the Late period, the rwo upraised deities might hold orher small vessel forms, less obviously connected to the shape of the solar disc. 5G4 The disposition of the giant arms also varies from version to version. Both Ramesses III and Ramesses IV depict the arms as nearly parallel. Bur whereas the former shows a slight indication of an elbow, the latter is rigidly straight) with no bend evident. The elbow is also absent in the version of Ramesses VI, a1though the arms now converge much more dramatically at the top, forming an inverted funnel shape. 5°S Osorkon II shows the arms rising nearly parallel, before bending sharply inward at the elbow. All of the Late period sarcophagi also show a clear bend in the arms. However, unlike the earlier versions, which bend inward, the later recensions al l bend back and ourward, with varying degrees of physical improbability. 0]

499. Following the version of Djedhor 1 (CG 29302); see discussion in §6.19. 500. The six epithets refer to various figures represemed in the tableau, as indicated by the parallel captions from the tomb of Ramesses VI, which were written as discreet groups, placed near their respective figures (thus also Darnell 2004, 156, n. 536, contra MySliwiec 1981, 100-10 1, who interprets each column from the sarcophagus caption as a Single epithet). 501. Manassa 2007, 57. 502. Ramesses IV, et aI., include before the seated god determinative. 503. Mana.~sa 2007, 57 (following Beinlich-Seeber 1998, 25) suggests, "The pouring water is a manifestation of the light of the sun, which is the means by which time is measured." 504. Manassa 2007, 57, n. 315, citing also one late variant, which substitutes ankh-Signs fat the vessels. 505. Compare the unrestricted funn el shape of the Penshetay region. represented in scene 19.

T

204

T HE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

Fig. 5.27. Creation of the Solar Disc 3 (tomb of Ramesses VI; after Piankoff1954, fig. 93). Reproduced by permission of Princeton University Press.

The rwo mummies located at the edges of the tableau are identified as "Warlike of Face,"~ while the central figure bears the ominous epithet "Destroyer ofHours."S01 1he latter designation may be contrasted with the ithyphallic figure of "He-Who-Hides-The-Hours," represented in scene 19."" The region of Penshetay, depicted in the latter scene, assumes a characteristically funnel-shaped configuration. The inverted funnel created by the 509 twO giant limbs in the present scene may recalls this form . in reverse. An accompanying text identifies the limbs as the "two arms that destroy, which are before the Place of Destruction."SlO The Place of Destruction is eq uivaJenr co the d3 .t bry.t, or "Lower Underworld" and rep resents the area of the eastern horizon in which the Damned receive th eir punishment. 511 This same region is associated also with the primal waters of Nun, which the sun god must enter in order to be reborn. m The present tableau, however, is not equivalent to that region but, rather, "before" it. It is the hours, and not the D amned, which are destroyed here and, like the sun god, their destruction presumably precedes their ultimate rebirth. This location, therefore. appears to represent (he inverse or destructive co unterpart to Penshetay, where hours are created. m

506. Zandee 1960, 206, notes the occurrence of these guardian demons already in the Pyramid Texts (PT §269b). In spell 168 from the Book of the Dead, the (~BY. w ~r. w offer cool water to the deceased (see T. G. Allen 1974, 166 and 173). The same epithet occurs in the eighth hour of the Book of Gates, which also depicts them as bearded mummies (see Hornung 1979-80, 2:20 1- 2), and in the Book of Qererets (BD 168) as a designalion of the eighth deity from the tenth cavern, where they grant refreshment to the deceased ( Piankoff 1974, 77 and plates 13, 26; T. G. Allen 1974, 166). From the present corpus, the plural designation (I)Jy. w I)r(. w), "O nes Warlike of Face(s)," also occurs in conjunction with scene 51 (for additional references, see LACG 2, 186-87). 507. Incorreccly label ed "H e who hides the Hours n in Piankoff 1954, 342 (the correct hieroglyphic transcription appears in Piankoff 1953.21). 508. Contra Manassa 2007,57, whose suggestion that "hiding the hours is tantamount to destruction ," does not follow from either the iconography or annotatio ns to scene 19 (see n. 389, above). 509. Thus, also Manassa 2007 , 57. 510. R6.B.3.26.61, cols. 1-2: (.w) I)tmy.w I}ntj ~rmy.t. 5 11. Darnell 2004, 376-78; and Zandee 1960, 169-70; the Place of Destruction is also personified in the Book of the Earth as the "Annihilator/She Who Destroys," for which see scene 72. below. 5 12. See scene 5, above. 513. For an interpretation of the present tableau and the related scene from the second shrine of Tutankhamun as signifying the

-

THE VIGNETTES

205

27. Creation of the Solar Disc 3 (fig. 5.27)'" Two occurrences: Ramesses VI (pictured). Osorkon II (app. 2, plate 2Ib). Text; none

Ramesses VI captions:

I. Above the heads of each of the two mummies on the left: [zpry.t "Manifestation,"

2. Text flanking the two mummies on the left:

F

m /13(w.t) kkwj "The god(dess) in this form, when the corpse(s) guard the darkness."

nir(.t) m s[zr pn

@

-= o

--

3. Above the mummy on the right: dm4 f-".t "He who reassembles the corpse."

4. Text in front of the mummy on the right: ntr pn m sor (pn) s;,,1 kkw/" "This god in (this) form,'" when he guards the darkness."

connection between the lowest realms of the Underworld and the sky (contra also the earlier interpretation of Mysliwiec 1981, 91 - 106)

sec Darnell 2004,158-59.

514. Raulin 1998,247-48: Abitz 1995, 144, 149 (A6): 1989c, 128 (6): Homung 1972, 436- 37: Pi,nkolf 1953, 15- 16: 1954, 337- 38: Monter 1947, 55- 56. 515. Kkw} is written logographically; cf. caption 2. 516. The introductory formula (§4.2) is oriented away from the mummy, toward the sunken, giant figure with upraised arms, while the following circumstantial clause is oriented in the opposite direction. Thus, n{T pn, "this god," probably does not represent the antecedent to the 3ms agent of SJJ~f.

206

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

5. Above the left and right hands of the giant figure, respectively: JJbt. t " lmnt. t

L t c:=::;

"East."

1)"

,. "West."

~

6. Above the head of the central goddess:

M

c:=; [l, Q

J'

~tmy.1

"She who annihilates."

7. Text between me central goddess and the left arm of the giant figure: nir(.t) m sfJr pn pr·s m kkwj c> "The god(dess) in this form, when she emerges from darkness."

F

=::;,.

@

=""=

I I I

-o. L:J

-d

f\...

n

On the right, twO arms rise up from the register line,SS2 supporting a crescent-shaped cauldron,5SJ which contai ns two human heads and a pair of hearts. ss, Beneath the cauldron, a third head hovers slighcly above the register and emits a tendril of flame from its mouth, which extends up toward the cauldron above it. A bearded, knife-wielding attendant stands to the lefr.m At the center of the tableau, cwo goddesses /lank a gigantic "heart,'" toward which they extend their hands, palms downward. The accompanying text identifies the organ as "the hacked-out (heart)."S87 To the left of this ceneral group appears a second cauldron and arm-pair with attendant, essentially identical to the group on the right. 5B8 1he text describes how the various deities shoot forth tongues of Aame to heat the cauldrons, instilling terror into the dismembered "rebels" (sbj. W). S89

58 1. Substituting d for t, either as a result of phonetic change (ch. 3, §3.3.1) or the substitution of ~ for Similarly shaped ;::::::::l (§§3.4-5). 582. Contra Stricker 1963-89, 3:285, there is absolutely no reason to associate the arms depicted in the present tableau with the four elements of the Greeks-a concept mat Stricker himself admits (1994, 103) the Egyptians never referred to in their own texts (also note that recourse to Greek and Roman authors in Stricker 1963-89, 2: 143, n. 1258, hardly constitutes "proof" of me concept's ex:istence in ancient Egypt). The suggestion in 5:680, that one should equate the form of the arm-pairs with the "granary" hieroglyph,.ill. (GEG, 498, nr. 0 51, due to the fact that both are larger at the base than at the top), also appears highly spurious. 583. Cf. the use of cauldrons or crucibles to affect the "sympathetic" destruction of enemies, in Ritner 2008, 157-59. 584. Although the hearts do no exhibit me characteristic morphology of the sign employed in the hieroglyphic script, 0, the text (cols. 3-4) refers to the cauldrons' contents collectively as "limbs and heans" (~r. w Iptj. w); the shape might instead represent an elaborate version of the generic "flesh" determinative, ~ (GEG, 467. or. F51). Cf. the cauldrons containing shades and pustules, in scene 74. 585 . The accompanying text (cols. 2, 5) identifies the attendants as "knife-wilders" (nmy.w) and "cauldron keepers" (ktw .tyw). 586. Stricker 1963- 89,3:285, suggestS that the placement of the hean between the various symmetrical figures may reRect the disposition of the akhu hieroglyph, [Q). although one must question how a mutilated heart, apparently earmarked for destruction, would become equivalem to the solar disc. 587. See n. 579. above. 588. Note that the colors of the various figures in the two groups are reversed: on the right, the heads and heam are red, while the knife-wielding attendant is solid black; on the left the heads and hearts are black, while the knife-wielding attendant is red, with black hair and yellow clothing. 589. Cols. 13-14. The term sbj seems to imply participation in some sort of criminal activicy, particularly in reference to treasonous

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OFTHE EARTH

218

33. The Damned 4 (fig. 5.33}'"

Two occurrences: Ramesses VI (pictured). Ramesses VII. Text: R6.A2.3.33.39-40 Ramesses VI captions: 1. Three captors. from left to righr: l' I:zrj. w rwtj(. w)

"They who preside over rhe bond(s)."

= 'X l'

=

=

I:zrj. w rwtj(. w) "They who preside over rhe bond(s)."

I I I

I I I

l'

r::::=:.

PO

I:zrJ. w rwtj. w "They who preside over the bonds."

I I I

r::::=:. 9)

'@fM ~

2. Before each of rhe bound caprives: @ amy "One who is destroyed."

Ramesses VI! captions: 1. The ram-headed deity to the far left (Ramesses VII only): o (.J)tmw nb ml'.t

~

::=:::::,

''Atum, Possessor of maat,"

rrz.t.! "The springing forth of one who is in his mound."

f'...

Af [Q

c=

-='

685. Robecson 2007, 93- 112; Abitz 1995, 149,171 (A8); 1989c, 129 (8. +11); Homung 1972. 440, 443, ,nd 446; Pi,nkoff 1953, 19,22- 23, and 27; 1954,340,344, and 349. 686. For cryptographic principles employed in the present corpus, see ch. 3, §3.8. 687. Or: s?J.Y.t:j jl.t, "His august lady of the mound" (note that t;!b3.t!j;.t appears to have been hyper-corrected with a second t, for which, cf. Ramesses VI, caption 2). 688. With m inor orthographic variation throughom (see Piankoff 1954, plates 116, 188; Roberson 2007, plates la-b).

236

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

2. Inside each of the mounds, three basic variants: s'/:ly.1 )m) ),.I./" ''AuguSt lady who is in his mound." s'i}y.I),.I.j "AuguSt lady of his mound."

s'i}y(.I) rjb,.I.j "August lady of his sarcophagus."

The present scene depicts a series of semicircular tumuli, representing burial mounds 0'1.t).69O Within each of the mounds lies an ovoid sarcophagus, containing a recumbent goddess, the "august lady, who is in his mound."'" A male head with praising arms literally "springs forrh" from the rop of each of the mounds.'" In the earliest version, from the cenotaph of Seti I, only a single mound, goddess, and praising figure have been preserved.'" In rhe sarcophagus hall of Ramesses VI, a series of seven mounds appear on rhe left half of rhe right wall, spread between [he second, third, and fourth registers. 694 A solar disc follows the three mounds in the third register. The last two mounds, in the fourth register, omit the head and praising arms due to space restrictions from the text directly above them. 69S However, captions naming the omitted figures were still included. The latest known version, that of Ramesses IX, included five mounds, also on the right wall of the sarcophagus hall.'% In the last of these, on rhe far left, the oval sarcophagus and its goddess stand upright, paralleling rhe upright sarcophagi from scene 75, which was placed beneath it. Textual evidence indicates that the latter scene was originally included beneath the present tableau in the version ofSeti I, as well. 697 A similar arrangement may originally have been planned in rhe sarcophagus hall of Ramesses VI, in which the upright sarcophagi appear on the adjacent rear wal1. 698 If so, this arrangement would indicate that the present tableau was always viewed as a unit with the figures from scene 75. fHI

689. For the cryptic 3ms suffix -f, see ch. 3, §3.8.4. 690. See the discussion ofil.l-mounds and gbJ.t-sarcophagi at scene 13, n. 293, above. 691. For the apparenc alterations to the syntax of the Ramesses VI caption from the earlier Cenotaph version, see Roberson 2007,

94-97. 692. Von Eggebrecht 1966, 155-63, draws a plausible analogy be(Ween the form of (he figures in the present scene and the image of the deceased rising from the shrine-shaped "mound of Abydos" VJ.t Jtxjw) as depicted in the Book of the Dead, spell 17. Eggebrecht links these and other images of deities within or emerging fromiJ.t-mounds with the prototypical cube statues of Ihy and Hetep from Saqqara (early Middle Kingdom), which he identifies as representations of the deceased as "Osiris, Lord of the (WoiJ.t-mounds." For reservations on trus interpretacion. see also Schub 1992, 747-54, who indicates mat only the statues of Hetep exhibit all of the characteristic features that Eggebrecht describes, nocing also that none of the (Wo-dimensional representations from the later religious texts show an emerging figure with crossed arms, as found on the cube statues. For divine movement relative to mounds generally, cf. also Saleh 1969. 693. A short, curving line in froO[ of {he preserved mound seems ro show the rear outline of a second rumulus, no longer preserved (see Frankfort, et al. 1933, plate 87). The parallels from the tombs of Ramesses VI and lX suggest that between five and seven mounds were included originally in the cenotaph version. 694. Two in the second register, three in the rhird, and two in the fou rth (see app. 2, plate 9). 695. See the phorograph in Piankoff 1954, plate 118. 696. The central mound and its occupants have been destroyed (Abin 1995. 171. n. 330); only a small segment of the leading edge of the central tumulus was SttH preserved when GuilmaO[ (I 909, plate 92, second register, far left) documented the tomb's decoration. 697. Roberson 2007, 105; for the texts in question, see ch. 6, §6.2, Cenotaph.4, and §6.9, R9.B.2.75.I2. 698. fu discussed in relation to scenes 8 and 9, above, the tableaux on the rear walls seem to have been shifted from the adjacent sidewaHs, due to space restrictions following a decision to stOp excavation of the sarcophagus hall; also see discussion at scene 75, below. 699. Contra Piankoff 1954, 340, who suggested that the mound scene might have been part ofthe so-called Book of Akcr (scenes 3-9); note that scene 47 only appears in close proximity to that group in the tomb ofRamesses VI; none of the Late period papyri or tombs that included the Book of Aker appear to have incorporated scene 47 in this fashion.

THE VIGNETTES

237

o Fig. 5.47. M ound scene 1 (tomb of Ramesses VIi after Piankoff 1954, fig. 100). Reproduced by permission of Princeton University Press.

48. Mound Scene 2 (fig. 5.48)""

One occurrence: Ramesses VI Captions: I . In front of the upper left and right sarcophagi, respectively: /:lbs(j) d' J)/:lwtj Q "He of the Shroud." -+'"Thoth" o

l

~

II

A ram-headed deity stands

to

1

the right side of the scene, holding a was-scepter in his right hand and an

ankh in his left. A small disc placed between the scepter and the figure's body identifies him as Re. In front of this figure, two upright, ovoid sarcop hagi appear one atop the other. ro, A human headed, bearded mummy stands in the upper sarcophagus; a mummy with a nb-basket for a h ead7(ll stands in the lower one. Both mummiform figures face to t he left. At the center of the scene is a low mound, within which a bearded deity stands facing ri gh t, his feet hjdden beneath the register line.7OJ Bent at the waist, his hands extend toward the ground in front of him. Behind this figure appears a second pair of stacked, ovoid sarcophagi. The figures within this second gtoup appear identical to the first, but face right. The caption identifies the human-headed mummies in th e two upper sarcophagi as the "H e of the Shroud," on the right, and Thoth,'~ on the left. Two thin lines extend down from a column of text located above the present scene (R6.A.3.35 .26), separating it from the followi ng scene 35.

700. Abitz 1995. 139. 145.152.157. I 65-j56 (DID); 19890. 125 (10); Homung 1972. 471-72; Piankoff 1953. 52; 1954. 368-j59. 701. One could, perhaps. argue that this image was intended to represent coffins lying end -to-end on the ground, in which case the mumm ies inside of them would acmally be lying down. rather than standing. However. the occu rrence of multiple horizontal sarcophagi. both end-to-end (scene 7) and stacked (scene 8), suggests that, if the anists wished, they could eaSily have expressed such an arrangement in the present tableau as well. The stacking of the sarcophagi more likely served as an indication of depth, with the upper figures located fanher from the observer (see Schafer 1986, 189-98). 702. Perhaps signifying either the "lord" or "all" of the mummified dead. 703. Stricker 1963-89, 5:670, suggests that the apparent placement of the figure's feet beneath the ground indicates a "plantlike" state, in which the figure grows up and out of the eanh; cf. the similarly disposed figures in scenes 14, 19. 42, 49, 6 1. 62. 72. "Sunken" figures do not figure prominently in the Amduat. Book of Gates, or Book of the Solar-Osirian Un ity. but do occur twice in the sixth division of the Book of Caverns (see Piankoff 1945. 3-4, and plate 43). 704. The representation ofThoth as a human-headed mummy is rather unusual (see Bleeker 1973, 108- 11; for the Amduat, also see Hoffmann 1996,32). LAGG 7, 640 (A), lists only two other examples ofThoth as a fully anthropomorphic mummy; Alb (enthroned) and Afg (standing, ithyphallic); in addition to the present tableau.

238

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

,

Fig. 5.48. Mound scene 2 (tomb of Ramesses VI; after Piankoff1 95 4, fig. 120). Reproduced by permission of Prince ton University Press.

49. Mound Scene 3 (fig. 5.49)'"

Three occurrences: Rame"es 2VI (pictured). Ramesses VII (app. 2, plate 12). Funerary papyrus of Khonsumes (app. 2, plare 20a). Text: R6.A2.2.49.37 + enigmatic tituJary~ Ramesses VII captiom: 1. The four figures, from left to right:

A

Ip .1 srqy(.I)

bl SI/:l nb ml ~~ ~ I I I ~ ~ ~ "This god in this form i(l this, the mound of hidden darkness / This -=" @ @ @ god in this form in this, the mound of darkness / This god in this form,

~ ~ ~ cons isting of the protected corpses that are with him."

=+ II II

II

----

000

= ""

~

1=

t; class substitution, §3.7.2). 738. Following the version of Dj edhor I (CG 29302; see ch. 2, §2.7 and n. 313).

THE VIGNETTES

245

Fig. 5.52. Mound scene 6 (tomb of Ramesses IX).

~

o

~ ~ ~

sspy "He who receives,"

~

o

~ ~

sspy.t "She who receives."

'IIi

A recumbent, ithyphallic deity739 ejaculates fire 741.l within a crescent-shaped cauldron. In the version of Ramesses IX, rhe bottom of the cauldron disappears beneath the register line. The sarcophagus of Ramesses III, on the other hand, depicts the entire crescent, while the Late period sarcophagi omit the feature a1together. The m cauldron serves typically as a crucible for the destruction of the Damned. In this instance, however, it appears to function as a protective enclosure for the potentially dangerous, procreative energies flowing from the ithyphallic god.'" Flanking the recumbent figure, just outside of the cauldron, stand two praising goddesses, "She who praises" and "She who adores." In the version of Ramesses IX, the goddesses' feet remain hidden beneath the lower register line. On the sarcophagus of Ramesses III, as well as four of the Late period copies,743 the irhyphallic figure is represented as headless. Headlessness is well-attested in a wide variety of textual sources as a punishment of the 744 Damned in the Afterlife. The praising stance of the surrounding figures is, however, wholly uncharacteristic of scenes of punishment: every representation of the guardians of the Damned in the present corpus shows their arms held downward. Hs In addition, the clear sexual potency of the ithyphallic figure suggests the restorarion of

739. Manassa 2007, 37-41, offers a number of plaUSible iconographic and textual parallels pointing co the identity of the recumbent figure as Osiris. Cf. also Raven 1998, who discusses a group of teHacotta figurines depicting an ithyphallic, nude, male deity, associated plausibly with the Osirian festival of Khoiak, as depicted in the Greco-Roman period at temple of Dendara. 740. Compare the procreative fire that issues from the ithyphaJlic deity "He-Who-Hides-the-Hours," in scene 19. 741. See Zandee 1960,142-46; Ritner 2008,157- 59; and cf. also scene 32, above. 742. In this regard, the truncated shape of the cauldron in the version of Ramesses IX may recall the funnel-shaped depression of Penshetay, which serves a similar purpose (Le., containing procreative fire) in the scene 19. 743. Manassa 2007,40 and n. 200; Manassa does not discuss the headless aspect of the figure present already on the sarcophagus of Ramesses Ill. 744. Zandee 1960, 16, 149- 50; Ritner 2008,168- 71; cf. the headless Damned in scene 30. 745. Compare scenes 30-33; also see, for example, the ram-headed "guides" of the Burning Ones, from scene 35.

246

T HE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

the functions of life after death.r~6 which would be inconceivable for one of the Damned, whose bodies are subj ect only to total annihilation. 1~1 , Given these faces, it seems likely that the ithyphallic deity instead tepresents the headless Osiris-an aspect of the creator, assimilated ev.entually with the dwarf god Bes and identified in Greco-Egyptian magical papyri as Akephalos theos. ". The ithyphallic figure, cauldron, and twO goddesses are all enclosed within a large, rectangular StrUCture with rounded corners. In the version of Ramesses IX, the enclosure rises from the ground like a burial mound; on the sarcophagus variants it is shown in its entirety and was probably intended to represent a sarcophagus.H9 Flanking this central image, two pairs of figures , male and female, stand with their arms held upward. The hands of the male figures receive the fire that erupts as twin dotted lines from the center of the mound/sarcophagus.

-, ~~.~ }: •••. I

53. Mound Scene 7 {fig. 5.53)'" One occurrence: Ramesses VI Text: R6.B2.1.53.74 Two human heads hang from the upper register, facing each other, recalling the form of the p.t-hieroglyph, representing the sky.'" Beneath the heads, a solar disc appears inside of an elongated mound. A bearded, praising figure stands beneath the disc, gazing upward. A narrow, vertical border separates the present scene and its text from the adjacent tableau on the left {scene 77).'"

=,

Fig. 5.53. Mound scene 7. (tomb of Ramesses VI; after Piankoff 1954, fig. 108). Reproduced by permission of Princeton University Press. 746. Zandee 1960, 61. 747. Zandee 1960,14- 17. 748. Thus, e.g., Ben 1992, 103: "Headless One, who created earth and heaven, who created night and day, you who created light and darkness; you are Osoronnophris (Osiris-Wenennefer), whom none has ever seen," with additional references on p. 335 (" H eadless one"), For a discussion of funerary masks as a representadon of the headless Osiris, including references to earlier Egyptian mortuary literature, see Meeks 1991 (with thanks to Roben Ritner). For the sexual pOlency of the headless god, see also Berlandin i 1993. An interpretation of the figure from the present tableau as the Akephalos theos is adopted also in Manassa 2007, 40-41. Cf. a number of lesser deities from the various Underworld Books, whose heads are allowed to leave their bodies in order to follow the sun god, as discussed in Darnell 2004, 111-17. Along somewhat different lines, nme also an unusual mythological allusion, in the context of a magical spell, in which Horus requests that Isis and Nephthys exchange their heads for his in a moment of distress (P. Leiden J 348 (8), translated in Borghouts 1978, 31, n. 45). From the present corpus, see also the goddesses, who "rejoice when their heads are given to them," from scene 40, and the mummiform figures from scene 75, who place "their heads before their mysteries, receiving the light of Re" (R6.B2.1.75.75, cols. 3-5). 749. Manassa 2007, 38, n. 188, Citing the textual interchange of jo, "mound" and rjbJ.t, "sarcophagus," for which, also see scene 13, n. 293, above.

750. Abhz 1995, 141 ,153 (B4b); Homung 1972, 451; Piankoff 1953, 31; 1954,352. 751. A similar group occurs also in scene 9 (cf. , with additional references); for the use of the p.t sign as the "sky" in rwo-dimensional art, see Schafer 1986, 254. 752. Both Piankoff and Hornung discuss the present tableau in conjunction with scene 77; the present study follows Abitz's interpretation of the two as separate scenes.

THE VIGNETTES

247

Fig. 5.54. Mourning women over a sarcophagus (tomb of Ramesscs IX).

54. Mourning Women over a Sarcophagus (fig. 5.54)'" One occurrence: Ramesses IX Text: R9.A.1.54.1

Four women tear at their hair in an attitude of mourning. 754 The women stand along an uneven register in twO opposing pairs, Ranking an oval, which encloses a bearded, male mummy. The accompanying text identifies [he oval as the "mysterious mound ofOsiris-Deba-Demedj."755 A solar d isc hovers overhead. The female mourners recall a pair of similarly comported figure that appear in conjunction with scene 12.756

55. Mummiform Deities with Discs (fig. 5.55)'"

Four octurrences: Rame,ses III (largely destroyed; app. 2, plate 5b) . Ramesses VI (pictured). Mutirdis (app. 2, plate 29b). Padihotre,net."" Text: Me.A.2.55.S

753. Abin 1990, 34 (5). 754. For me iconography of the hair-pulling goddesses, see scene 12, nn. 274-77. 755. Cols. 1-2: ji.t 1t[:1J .[ n.[ Wsjr db:1 df1uj.. The epithet Deba ~Demedj designates the unified Re~Osiris, for which see Hornung 1975-76,2:99, nr. 16, who suggem the translation, " Der den Vereinigten umhiillt," i.e., "He whom the united one envelops." For an recent discussion of the term's religious significance, see also Manassa 2007, 430-35. 756. Scene 12 appears beneath the present tableau in the tomb of Ramesses IX, but lacks the mourning women found in the versions of Ramesses VlI and the various sarcophagi (see app. 2, plate 13). 757. Abitz 1995, 149 (A4); 1989c, 128 (4); Homung 1972,434; Bmnne ~

Ll ./).

I*

3. Lower left disc, flanking [he central ram-headed figure:

i "[. .] I ~

[... ] nnwlj Heoftheoval."m

~ 4

-

II

dw, [.. . ] uPraise ... "n6

0 0 ? 0

At the center of the scene stands a bearded mummy, crowned with ram's horns and twin plumes.

777

Two

smaller, bearded mummies flank [he central figure. All three Osiride figures hold a small disc in [he middle of [heir bodies. Each of the smaller figures stands atop a larger disc, with an additional disc above their heads. Each m of the four discs contains an additio nal rrio of small divinities. The figures in [he upper discs are all inverted . The two discs on the left each co ntain a central mrnnmiform deity- falcon-headed above, ram-headed belowflanked by two praising male figures. The praising figures on tOp appear murnmiform, while the two on bottom

wear kilts, with their feet held apart. The two discs on the right each include a central mummy with the head of

773 . Text corresponding to Ramcsses V1, caption 12. 774 . Cf. Ramesses VI, caption 7 . 775. Cf. Ramesses VI, caption 8. 776. Cf. Ramesses VI, caption 9. 777. For which, see Abubakr 1937, 38--46. The ho rned, double-feather crown (!w.lj1 is an emblem of Anedjry, (he god of the Eleventh Lower Egyptian nome, but was associated early on with the elder Horus, appearing also in representations of the king from the Fourth Dynasty (reign of Snefru) and later. 778. Lefebure's hand copy (reproduced in app. 2, plate 5b) suggests that the four discs in the version of Ramesses III did not include these smaller figures. However, a survey of thi s tomb by the author in the 2008 observed traces of the inverted trio in the partially preserved, disc on the upper right.

252

THE ANCfENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF T HE EARTH

a shrewmouse,"' flanked by two smaller mumm iform figures. The smaller figures in the disc on the upper right afe also shrewmouse-headed. Their counterparts in the disc on the lower right have human heads. In the previously unrecogni zed version of Murirciis/so the large central figure is mostly preserved, from the waist up, and appears to correspond closely with the earlie( variants. The upper disc in front of the central deity is also partially preserved. The leftmost inverted mummy inside the disc has been preserved from th e leg down, indicating that the Mutirdis version followed the more detailed template of Ramesses VI, rather than the abbreviated Ramesses III variant. In addition, the legs of one of the small figures from the disc on the lower left are also visible in Assmann's copy of the scene; the remainder of the figures appear to have been obliterated completely,781 One notable difference between [he version of Mutirdis and the two Ramesside variants was the addition of a single column of text (largely destroyed) between the central figure and the discs, which flank him. The version of Pad ihorresnet, by contrast, has been destroyed almost entirely. Only the disc on the lower left has been preserved, although the captions within it appear to correspond closely to those of Ramesses VI. Perhaps the most significant feamce of the Padihorresnet tableau is its placement alongside scene 70, as found also in the mrnb of Ramesses VI. m Ramesses VI's caption indicates that the head of the left-hand fi gure is "in the Upper Regio n (~rj.I), his two feet (in) the Lower Region (!Jr. I)," referring to the upper and lower Duat, respectively.'" No scenes of punishment appear to be associated with the present tableau/84 so it seems unlikely that a specific connection between the Lower Underworld and the "Place of Annihi lation" (~lmy.l) was intended in this instance.'" Rather, it would appear that th e entire region of the Beyond, from the height of the sky to the depths of the chthonic realm, was intended. 786 The falcon- and ram-headed mummies in the upper and lower discs on the left recall the diurnal and nocturnal forms of th e sun god, mirroring the dichotomy between the Upper Region as the dayti me heavens and the Lower Region as the nocturnal Underworld. >V Additionally, each of the discs on the left-hand side of the tableau is identified as nnw.t, "oval" or "egg."788 The semantic range of (n)nw.f89 encompasses a complex of ideas ranging from the dung ball of the scarab beetle to the disc of the sun, the burial mound of Osiris, the "oval" of Sokar, and

779. Brunner-Traut 1965, 148; identified incorrectly as an "ichneumon-headed entity" in DarnelJ 2004, 32 1, n. 204. Confusion between the shrewmouse and ichneumon in modern works is not uncommon (Brunner-Traut 1980, col. 123, Citing, e.g., Cooney 1965,

102). 780. Cr. k>mann 1977,74. 781 . See app. 2, plate 29b. 782 . Note thac, in the tomb of Ramesses VI , scene 70 appears on the left and scene 55 on the right; th is order is reversed in the tomb of Padihorresnet. 783. Darnell 2004, 375-77 (citing parallels from the Book of the Osirian-Osirian Unity, P. Leiden I 348, Coffin Texts, et al.); see scene 56, in which the "Mysterious Lady" (Nut) is said to stand with her head in the Upper Ouat ( this (Ramesses IIO I. justified, might resc {in} the body of Nut." 929. Abitz 1995, 149; 1989c, 128; Homung 1972, 434- 36; Piankoff 1953,14-15; 1954, 335-36. 930. With the exception of the caption texts (see below), the scene is destroyed almost entirely; see Graefe 2003, 2:plates 41a and V23b.

THE VIGNETTES

275

Ramesses VI captions: 1. Above rhe heads of rhe four smaller mummies, left ro right:

ggg

~W

Nnw "Nun."

0

r~

Sw

Tfnw.t "Tefnut."

"=.

ljprj "Kbepri."

"Shu."

00

2. Columns flanking the five mummies: n!r pn m sly pn m t3 n b3 / nlr pn m sor pn 1)3. w(t) m t3 b3 'p·fkkwj "This god in rhis form in rhe land of rhe ba I This god in rhis form , rhe corpses being in rhe land of rhe ba when he crosses rhe darkness." (3x)

IF

D~

-.

0 ,......

=-=-@ @

=c:::::::::?

~ L...

l'I...D

~

=""=

-0.

-0.

I I I

0

-.

=@

-= -= 9>

=""=

~

~

II

=""=

I I I

0

-. I I I

I I I

~

-0.

=0 0 I I I I I I =- =- =""= @

~

~

~ L...

~ L...

l'I...D -="

~

l'I...D -="

~

I I I

-0. =c:::::;;? -.

~

Padihorresnet captiom: 1. Flanking rhe central mummy: ~ • [... ] m t3 [b3]~' 'p·fkkwj / [... ] [kk]wj ~ in rhe land of rhe [bal. when he traverses rhe darkness 1[ ... darkne]ss."

=-

"[ ... ]

c::::::::::?

'T'

931. Graefe 2003. 242, T378. transcri bes the sign renmiveiy as a ~r-face. foUowed by a stroke. The epigraphic copy on p. 4 15, V23b, shows a vaguely uape'"LOidal shape wirh a small, disconnected bit above. In the Ramesses parallel, IJ is followed by bJ, employing the standard writing with incense brazier, b; bird. and a moke, in each of four columns. The sign before che make in the Padihorresnet text should also represent b;; in this regard, the brazier-hieroglyph corresponds most closely with the earlier parallel, whi!e also fitting the preserved traces on the wall.

276

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

A bearded, mummiform figure, identified in the text as Atum,932 stands in the midst of four smaller mummies. In the version of Ramesses VI, a solar disc appears over thf cen tral figure's head. Two of the four smaller figures are male, one is female, and one has the head of a scarab. In the version of Ramesses III, the figures are arranged from left to right. as follows: (I) male; (2) male; (3) larger. central figure; (4) scarab; (5) female. The order is altered somewhat in the version of Ramesses VI, which also provides names for th e figures, from right to left as: (I) male. "Shu"; (2) female. "Tefnut"; (3) larger central figure. anonymous; (4) scarab. "Khepri"; (5) male, "Nun ." The annotation to the Ramesses III version names them collectively as the "great Ennead" who speaks to "the one who is in the Sacred Land."m The "Sacred land" (tJ 4sr) can refer to th e necropolis and the land of the dead generally. but also occurs with specific reference to Abydos. the sacred site of Osiris.'" Tn the versions ofRamesses VI and Padihorresnet. the gods are also said to inhabit the "land of the ba" (t< bJ). The version ofPadihorresnet is almost entirely destroyed, but the preserved traces of the scene and its annotation closely parallel those of Ramesses VI. In addition. both of those tOmbs employ scene 70 alongside a versio n of scene 55. although the orientation of the two scenes is reversed in the earlier and later versions. m

71. Serpent Guardian (fig. 5.71}''' One occurrence: Ramesses IX Text: R9.A.3.71.5 A gigantic serpent arches its body into the shape of twO large mounds. A goddess stands in the depression between the two halves of the serpent's body, clutching a smaller, human-headed serpent, crowned with a disc,9J7 in each hand. n. An oval sarcophagus appears beneath each of the "mounds" formed by the serpent's body. The sarcophagus on the right contains a single. bearded mummy. lying face down. The interior of the left-hand sarcophagus is largely destroyed. but originally contained two mummiform figures. m The entire lower half of the scene has been destroyed, and only a small fragment of the original annotation has been preserved. ~ Abitz indicates that this scene is without parallel. lU I However, the configuradon of the giant serpent, and the placement of the central deity are clearly reminiscent of the Birth of the Hours tableau (scene 19). which figures prominently on th e opposite wall.

932. R6.B.2.70.58.001. 2. 933. R3.B.2.70.9, col. 1: 4d mdw jn psg.! rJ(.t) njmj !Nj.~r. 934. Wb v, 228.6-9; as the "necropolis"/realm of the dead generally, see PT §§58Ic, 1552c, et al. (HAWbl, 1404); cr 5:165a; 6:354j; and VII, 112k (B. Altenmuller 1975, 331); for material relating specifically to the mortuary landscape of Abydos, see, e.g., Simpson 1974, 12- 13. 935. In the tomb ofRamesses VI, the larger, central figures in both scenes face right; in the tomb ofPadihorresnet, the major figures face left. In both version s, scene 55 appears "in front" of the present tableau. 936. Ab;n 1990. 34 (10). 937. The disc over the human-headed serpent on the left is no longer extant; c( Guilmant 1909, plate 91. 938. Or, possibly, a double serpent with twO human heads; cf. the double serpent from the Mesopotamian-in8uenced "master of animals" image, which survives in the hieroglyphic script as the emblem of the city ofCusae, W (Fischer 1977b, col. 1189). 939 . Both mummies' feet arc visible in Guilmant 1909, plate 91. Cf. scene 77, which includes a representation of two mummies within a single (uprighd sarcophagus. 940. The badly damaged text mentions the central goddess as well as the twO gods and refers to something being "in the capacity of their guardian" (col. 4: m sJJ~sn) before breaking off completely. 941. Ab;n 1990. 34. n. 90.

277

THE VIGNETTES

................... , .... ... .... ... ,'" ..." ......... , .... ,', .... ...,,, ....,,, ......... ............... ..........,', ..,., .. ....... ,", ...." , .. "

,

"

Fig. 5.71. Serpent guardian (tomb of Ramesses IX).

Fig. 5.72. She Who Annihilates (tomb of Ramesses VI; after Piankoff 1954, fig. 126). Reproduced by permission of Princeton University Press.

72. She Who AnnihiIates (fig. 5.72)''' One occurrence: Ramesses VI Text: R6.A.4.72.31'" Captions: l. Inside the coffin of the giant goddess:

o

nn Al l\,

~

Q

""",=r rM..u, X I I I

ff?iJ 0

b'.t ~tmy.t "The corpse of She-who-annihilates."

942. Homung 1972, 478-79; Piankoffl953, 60; 1954,375. 943. The present scene and its capti ons occur in me middle of the fifth/bottom register, but text 31 was placed at the end of the four th register, presumably for reasons of space (Hornung 1972, 478; Piankoff 19 54, 373).

278

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

Fig. 5.73. Shrewmice greet the Sun God (tomb of Ramesses IX),

=

2. The three praising goddesses on the left, from left to right:

r

~

~

IJlm(./)-lJr "Face-destroyer."

~ ~

sny.1

"She of the cabin (1)."-

CO>

sl'.1 "She of the mystery. "

3. The thtee praising gods on the right, from left to right:

.d =;=I ~ .e:::::=:=.

IJlm-lJr

"Face-destroyer."

n

snY·I(j)

~ "He of the cabin (')."

~~ SI,.IV) "He of the mystery."

A giant female mummy, the "corpse of She-who-annihilates," lies within a semi-ovoid sarcophagus with a clearly defined foot end.'" fu noted by Stricket, She-who-annihilates is the largest single figure in Ramesses VI's Book of the Earth.9-46 In addition, her conspicuous placement at the center of the bottom register of the left

sidewall places her directly beneath the giant solar disc in the uppermost register (sce ne 25),''' perhaps suggesting

944. Referring, perhaps, to the surrounding enclosure? For sny.t as a variant of snLY. "cabin," sec Wb III , 458; rv. 179.16. 945. This is the only instance of a sarcophagus incorporating anthropoid features in the Book of the Earth, all other examples being either true ovals or upright ovals truncated at the foot end. AnthropOid wooden coffins begin to appear sporadicaHy in the Middle Kingdom (Willems 1988,47; A. Niwinski 1984. col. 434). becoming conSiderably more popular in the New Kingdom. when the form begins to be imitated in stone (Brovarski 1984a, col. 477). 946. Stricker 1963-89, 3:286. 947. Likewise. the largest such disc in Rarnesses V1 's Book of the Earth.

THE VIGNETTES

279

a connection between these two scenes. 948 This suggestion is strengthened by the occurrence on the opposite wall 9SO of a very clear, centrally placed vertical axis, 949 which links scenes 2, 5, and 68 as the path of solar ascenr. Six smaller oval shapes 951 enclose praising figures above the giant sarcophagus, which obscures the bases of the smaller structures and the feet of [he individual figures within them.952 Three praising men stand in the ovals to the right; three praising women stand in the ovals to the left. The two groups face onc another. The same three names-"Mystery," Senyt, and "Face-Destroyer"-appear over both the male and female figures.

73. Shrewmice Greet the Sun God (fig. 5.73)'" One occurrence: Ramesses IX

Text: nonc On the right side of the tableau, seven deities with the heads of shrewrnice stand with their arms raised in adoration, facing the approaching sun. The ram-headed sun god, holding a was-scepter, faces the mouse-headed figures. Immediately behind him stands an ichneumon-headed deiry, arms held downward.'" The pairing of shrewmouse and ichneumon reRects the association of those twO creatures as the blind and seeing aspects of Horus of Letopolis. m A large solar disc appears behind of the ichneumon deiry, followed by two bearded, humanheaded figures. The latter pair holds their arms upward, in the attitude of jubilation or mourning,956

74. Shrine of Osiris with the Damned (fig. 5.74)''' One occurrence: Ramesses VI

Text: R6.A.1.74.12-18 Captions: I. Three figures beneath the cauldron on the left, from left to right: '?? kty.tj IL-. 'm b3. w

~ ~

110

"He of the cauldron."958

rII

"Swallower of bas."959

I I I 948. Stricker 1963- 89, 3:286. 949. See Abitz 1989c, 127-28; Barguet 1978, 52 950. See the individual scene entries, mentioned above, for discussion of the vertical axis on the right hand sidewall. 951. Probably equivalent to thejJ .wt, "burial mounds" or tjbJ. wI, "sarcophagi," for which see scene 13, n. 293, above. 952. Stricker 1963-89, 3:286, notes correctly that the lower parts of the smaller figu res may be either hehind or in the larger figure, but speculates later (1994, 10l) that the large female deity is the earth itself and that "Out of her grow her children, as if they wert plants" (see also the discussion of the "sunken" figure from scene 48, above, described likewise as "plantaardige" in Stricker 1963-89, 5:670). 953. Abitz 1990, 34 (14). 954. Cf scene 46. Two-dimensional representations typically differentiate the ichneumon from the shrewmoust by the more stubby snout ofthc former and the absence of whiskers on the tip of the nose (see Brunner-Traut 1965, 148-49, n. 3, and, figs. 2-3), although there is also evidence for confusion between the iconography of the two creatures. 955. Brunner-Traut 1965, 153- 57; LACG 5, 262-263 (!:ir-Mbnty-(n)-irty [8]); for the ichneumon cult in the Delta during the GrecoRoman period, see now Leitz 2009. 956. Cf. scene 41. 957. Abitz 1995,151,159- 60 (Dl); 19890, 121- 23; Homung 1972, 458-61; Piankoff 1953, 38-41; 1954, 357- 59. 958. From ktw.t, "cauldron" (Wb V, 145.3); this and the following epithet appear to have been reversed; cf. caption 3, below. 959. For the destruction of bas in cauldrons, cf. the baboon-headed krwy.1 dn.1 bJ. w, "She of the cauldron who cuts up bas," (Hornung 1963-67, nr. 144, hour 2).

280

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

Fig. 5.74. Shrine of Osiris with the damned (tomb of Ramesses VI; after Piankoff 1954, fig. 357). Reproduced by permission of Princeton University Press.

THE VIGNETTES

281

('m 1)3. wt

"Swallower of corpses."

2. Inside the shrine, before the figures on the left- and right-hand mounds, respectively: !F(.I) Gb ~ b3 Wsjr m~ Imnt.1 "The corpse of Geb." () "The ba of Osiris in the West."

:J

l

~ jr

3. Three figures beneath the cauldron on the right, from left to right:

\

Fig. 5.78. Two gods praise the solar disc (tomb of Ramesses VI). Left: variant A (pillar 3a); right: variant B (pillar 2b).

Variant B captions: 1. Text above the left-hand god, around the disc, and above the right-hand god:

~9L... Q ~C.~1

*

234

~JIl "'=-~ ° 0 ' 0°, ~ c-:J -

60

~

[Re?]' he praises them on their behalf. Re [ ... j them on Re's behalf Where they travel is to the Upper Region [... J. in the body of Nut. where the Osiris-King. Lord of the Two Lands. (Ramesses III)I. justified. tests in the body of Nut.

-

d-I I I

I

0

lIt

-

-nJl...f --... ' --

IL..!-. II 9

l%!i

"6'1

R3.A.2.S6

Text 3"

J jn nlr. W dWJ. w dWH pr(=w) m [.. . J

4,

4? [ •••

[... J by the gods who praise the Duat. they having emerged from [ . .. j

57. Retrograde text.

58. Substituting.:::=:= for ",."... . 59. Substituting ~ for ~.

60. Lit" "their arms," For the idiom Isp ~. wj,

"to

grasp/hold hands," see Wb IV, 532.3.

61 . The original (ext appears [Q have included four columns, of which Lefebure copied only the fim half the column on the far lett, followed by "etc.," without additional comment.

312

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

Text4~

RJ.B.1.22 Parallels: M.B.I.22.1 -3; T.B.1.22.1 -3; R3.B.1.22.5-6 (app. 3, pi'ate 4)

The great and mysterious god of the Duat, (he) praises Re in his cavern.

R3 .B.1.22 Parallels: M.B.1.22.1 -3; T.B.1.22. 1-3 ; R3.B.1.22.4, 6 (app. 3, plate 4) 1

n{r

" b3.w n.1 W lmn.! dj~s ('=sn r ...

b.

,.

I I I I I I

I I I I I I

-

IL-..

c:::::::; I~

o jf

.til \j

c:::::::; The six have set out the bas of Re. Amaunet presents her arm to ...

j? IL-..

.-..../I

~

I I I

~

o I jf c:::::::;

jf jf Il.-..

j? j?

Il.-.. Il.-..

R3.B.2.70

Text 9

I gd-md. wI jn psg. I '3(.1) njmj 13-gsr Wsjr-njsw.1 (Ramesses III) I pw m;'-t!'w

66. 67. 68. For [he 69.

For sim ilar spellings without the final n, see ch. 3. §3.3.2, ex. 3 and nn. 58-60. Substituting _ for < t:;:;? (similar shape; §3.5). Curving columns of enigmatic text above the right (a) and left (b) halves of the double ouroboros, respectively (see app. 2, plate 4). enigmatic sign values employed in the present corpus, see ch. 3, §3.8.4. Following Darnell 2004, 222; thus, also RG.A.1.25 .5, row a; contra Piankoff 1953, 42, n. I, who transcribes the goddess's name

=

asjmr. 70. 71. 72. hidden

Perturbation (§3.7.3), ~'if'.-.....II for .-.....II.-....JI;; cf. R6.A.l.25.5. For iii, as in row a. Cf. also the Ramesses VI parallel. Perturbarion: ; --' for -';r'; also cf. RG.A.1.25.5, row b, which write!; Jnm.t dj " wj wrjw'"=j n=!n wrj. wI=!n j h1Y dy (n).j , '(. w;}=[n m=! wj rjwj=j b;. w=!n j h1Y dy n=j '(. w;}=!n I

Entering the corpse that is in Nun, behind the corpses of the two goddesses, by this G reat God, when he traverses the corpse, Dark-of-Heart,

which is in the hidden chamber: "0, corpse of Nun, which is in the earth, and which permits the four bas therein to breathe, 0, corpses of the two goddesses, who guard the corpse of Nun and who receive that which is in

his mouth_ 91 Permit the bas of the Duat-dwellers to breathe! Oho, give your arm(s) to me! -I issue yo ur commands ro you!

Oho, give your arm(s) to me! Look- I call your basi Oho, give yo ur arm(s) to me!"

85. See Piankoff 1953. plates XXII, 9-xxnl, 1-6 (text III). 86. Substituting ..:::::::=: for g::::, (si milar shape; §3.5). 87. Substituting . (W)I l!r. wi jmj.(W)1 '.1 jmn.1 /1'.1 pn (sic.) ' , (./) snk-jb snw'"' , jmj. wi, k>rj=f j m=k wj s,s=j brj=k wd.j f/.w. w[/l m Iyftj. w=k 4 srq=k sf/.m.k !Jrw=j snk b,=j r HW(/) [W f/.wj=j /p . wI jmj. w=k b,. w·sn 'p,=sn Iytw=j j hy jw=j s,s.j k>l'.j)=k ms. wI=j bpr=sn

5 I I I

-

4

2

Traversing the corpses, Mysterious-of-Forms, which

are in rhe hidden chamber, by this Great God, when he traverses the mysterious West. "0, you corpses, Mysterious-of- Forms , which are in the

hidden chamber of this (sic.) great corpse, Dark-ofHeart, lOl whose shrine is guarded by those who arc in th e earth,

0, look- l cross your shrine, inflicting punishment on your enemies.

As you breathe, so do you hear my voice.I O.1 1001 It is in order to protect you that my ba descends. When

J call

to the corpses that are with you ,

rheir bas, rhey fly after me. Oho! I cross your shrine

and my children, rhey come into being."

100. 101. 102. the king 103. 104.

See Piankoff 1953, plate XXIV, 4-9 (text V), Substituting Qror J (class substitution; §3.7.2) < ~ (error from the Hieratic; §3.4.I). "Dark" here implies the sening and disappearance of the sun through the horizon ( Wh IV, 475.7- 9); cf. PT §268d (epithet of as Sia in the solar barque) . For breathing by means of the sun god's voice and light, see below, n. 135. Wh IV, 173.7; clearly, a pun on snk, "dark."

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

320

Text5'~

R6.A.1.25 Parallel: R3 .B.1.25.8 (app. 3, plate 5)

n-="'=A. E5 n 1l........,.1l........,.~ E5n 0 h.

f\.... .....-c> Il........,.I I I 'II I 1'[( ";;,,rl _l!1 ";;" r I I I 19 0 0 f\....OI I I

IJtw R' dj.s ' r'" jmn. WI.S

a. 6 'p('w) JI(n)y.I'~

b. 6 'p(.w) blw R' Jmn.1 dj.s ' r jmn. wl·s

The six have set out after Re. Arenet, she presents the arm to her hidden ones. The six have set out after Re Amaunet, she presents the arm to her hidden ones.

Text6 '~

R6.A.1.25 Parallel: R6.A.1.25 .7 (app. 3, plate 7) I

prr sg. wi fr,.1 t:'

•

X

. W} 4 ;}t;

In m

'" ssp.n:sn

nbj. w 3 'b.1 In 'J.I 10'1

5

sw

"When the flames of this uraeus emerge from the fires of this great horizon, already have the two mysterious arms received it. llo

--. I

I

I

105. See Piankoff 1953, plate XXXV, 5-8. Text beneath the discs and stars on the right (row a; retrograde) and left (row b). 106. Following Darnell 2004, 221, n. 2tO; for this spelling, see above, ch. 3, §3.3.2, ex. 3 and nn. 58-60. 107. Shape substitudon (§3.5); cf. row h. 108. See Piankoff 1953, plate XXXV, 9-10. Retrograde text before [he righthand cobra. 109. Piankoff 1953, 42, n. 3, suggests that the perfect consttuction ssp.n.sn is a mistake for ssp"sn, as preserved in the following paralld (text 7. cols. 4-5). 110. The masculine pronoun sw, "it," refers here to [he grammatically masculine solar disc Urn) pictured in the accompanying vignette.

THE TEXTS

321

R6.A.1.25 Parallel: R6.A.l.25.6 (app. 3, plate 7)

JIJ.tj In S/J. I

When the flames of uraeus emerge the fires of this great, double horiwn, the two hidden arms, they receive it. u -

--9+ I I I

TextS ll5

R6.A.1.56

ntr.t tn m stJr 2 pn 'pp mr pn 'J 3 J:!r rjr.tj~sj Tpy (r) '" jmnlj 4 StJ.t J:!kn,·f n nlr 'J tp S/J.t m 6 dWJ.t'" J:!r.t 1

r,d . WJ. ",Sj'liB 7 8

8

7

m d WJ.t h_ r.t'"

bJ. wj 'P~f1Jl·t~s

This goddess in this form: Ie is over her twO hands that this Great God travels, (the serpent) Tepy being (to) the right of the Mysterious Lady, when he rejoices on behalf of the Great God, the head of the Mysterious Lady being in the Upper Duat,

See Piankoff 1953, plate xx:xv, 11-12. Text before the left-hand cobra. Cf. the preceding Text 6 (thus, Piankaff 1953. 43, n. 1). Substituting.::::::. for ~ (Piankoff 1953, 43, n. 2), For the noun + s(jm-j as emphasized adverbial adjunct to a preceding nominal/emphatic form of the verb, see eh. 4, §4.7. See Piankoff 1953, plate XXV, 1-3 (text Vl). Also cf. Piankoff 1953, 45, n. 6, who instead supplies the preposition m. For this spelling of dWJ.I, see ch. 3, §3.3.3. lIB. Substituting JNHINN\ for _ (similar shape; §3.5) . 119. Substituting Ii} for fj! (§3.5), with superAuous final T; Bauman (199B, 160, n. 379) interprets the second as a defective spelling of the particle Ij. 111. 112. 113. 114. 115. 116. 11 7.

=

322

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

while her two feet are in the Lower Duat. The double ba,110 it traverses her corpse.

R6.A.1.56 I

pr(r). wj sn m s.t2 =sn nJJ-n nsr rkJ:zw jmj.w ntr.t tn 12l 3 St'(.I)

wnn·s Ip NIJ,-lJr mJ:z(n) jmj 13 SI(3) jmn.1 kk(wj) The two who emerge, they are in their (proper) place on accounc of the fire and Rame, which are in this mysterious goddess. Where she shall be is upon Nehaher, m the Enveloping (serpent), who is in the mysterious earth, the hidden realm of darkness.

3

= c:::::::;

2

o

LJ

LJ

-.

-

:=n II..-. I I

~ . -.

I-e.

I I I

I ~

=~ 1= I I I ill 'I d =:. .9~~ rt.

r.::::::.

=+

y bl Q

.nnJ

.nnJ

=+ = c:::::::; ~

C'

I

LJ

.9

I I I

F o

00 ~

it

120. Read ing after Darnell 2004, 382, the "double ba" being that of the united deiry Re-Osiris. 121. Text along the sides the goddess's body. Piankoff' 1953, 44, notes that this section is "tres fautives," and haphazardly arranged. 122. Substitutingc:::!!::. fo r""';;;'" (sim ilar shape; §3.5). 123. Lit., "Terrible of Face" (HGHwb, 421 b, "mit schrecklichen I wildem Gesicht"), For this expression as an epithet of Apep, see Darnell 2004, 287. Also nore Piankoff 1953, 44, who interprets this third column as a separate caption, which he renders tentatively as "La Mysterieuse, La tete (?), Neha~ her, lis enveloppes ceux qui sont (?) dans la terre de la Mysrerieuse, la cachee, I'obscure,»

323

THE TEXTS

R6.A.1.56

Text 10'"

jw OJ. w(t) stJ. w(t) S. wt n.t ntr.t tn 'pp ntr pn (lr OJ(.t) tJ(j).t

9> ~

Po" I I I

C>

0

itA = --.

The corpses of those who are MySterious-of-Places belong to this goddess. Where this god travels is above the corpse of She-of-the-Earth.

C>

C>

W

Il.........

c:::=

~

IF 0

I I I

I W

C>

Po"

=""= 0 0 I I I f\..

L"J

--.

F C>

--. ~

c:::=

Text 11 125

R6.A.1.56 P(J)-n-nhJ-(lr'~

m sJ;r pn nhp=j or'" rd. wj stJ(.t) Nlp-/:lr

He of (the serpent) Nehaher,n in this form : Up from under the feet of the MySterious Lady and Nehaher does he leap.

-=" 0

c::=:,

\\

= c:::=

L"J --.

t

bl Q I W

MJ

0 --. --.

t

~ 12

W

I

-="

-= 0

=""=

I I I

0 --. --.

[Jl

0 f\..

124. Retrograde columns under the goddess's right hand. 125. Columns fl anking the human-headed serpenr on the left. It would appear that the scribes imended the two columns of text appear to face inward, toward the serpent's body, which rises between them, although several signs still face the wrong direction. 126. Substituting",=- (reversed) fo r 1.nn. (class substi tution ; §3.7.2). For divine names of the type p(1)-n + noun, see ch. 4, §4.3.3. 127. Wri tten as tlr (Phonetic change; see §3.3.l), Piankoff's transcription (1953, 45, n. 2) as ~ is incorrect; the b sign, slightly abraded, is blue-black, as elsewhere on the wall, vs. red and yellow fo r the g sign. 128. Lit., "Terrible of Face" (see n. 123, above).

324

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

R6.A.l.74

Text 12'"

, Parallel: RG.A.I.25.4 (app. 3, plare 6)

'q !.I]. wI SIJ.(W)I fJr.(w)1 jmj(. wI) '.1 jron.1 jn n[r pn 2 " d'q'fimn fl,. W j [n !;;.WI ft;.W(I) 3 fJr. wljmj. (W)I '.ljmn.1 i;;.1 pn (sic.) ',.1 snk-jb s;; ,jmj.w j m,k wj f,s.) brj,k 8 7 6 5 , ''',j rjw m !Jjij.w,k '1I I srq,k srjm,k fJrw.) 1

snk 6 bl=j r SJw13l [W

~

rjwj"',j il]. wI jmj. w,k b'.w,sn 'p" sn gtw('J) j hy jw,j §;s.j brj,k ms. wt8=J !Jpr=sn r=sn 1l3 j hy jW'j f,.,j brj.k

---

sn

.0.

Entering the corpses, mysrerious of formes), which are in rhe hidden chamber, by this Grear God, when he enters the one who hides the mysteries. "0, you corpses, Mysterious-of-Forms, which are in the hidden chamber of rhis (sic.) great corpse, Dark-of-Heart,ll< whose shrine is guarded by rhose who are in rhe earth, 0, look-I cross your shrine, punishment upon your enemies. As you breathe. so do you hear my voice. m

Iii

I I I

-I I I

~}

0

~ 0 0 ~ 9> I I I

....-=


~

~

~

c1

»4? I I I

=0

-IF

=9>

I I I

c:=;;:= \? I

U

h~

-=" 0 -="

A I I I

-

t

0

-

- . - 4i& IT -It

JJ

0

II........,.

See Piankaff 1953. plate XXiI, 1-3 (texr lie). Text above the cauldron on the left. Substituting ~ for c::::::J (phonetic shift; §3.3.I), See Piankoff 1953, plate XXII, 3--4 (text Ild). Text placed within the upper half of the shrine, surrounding Osiris's head. Substituting'tt for (similar shape; see ch. 3, §3.5). Substituting ~ for (§3.5).

11

327

THE TEXTS

R6.A.1.74 1

nn n tJjtj,. w m sIJr pn 3 (n)jk"'(.w) m rwry 4 '.ljmn.1 ,sn m-bnl kkwj,.snjwtj /;!J. wi

6

5

4

their darkness. which is without light.

o

I I I

-o.

Text 18'"

R6.A.1.74 nn n sbj,.w m sIJr , pn m rwry n 4 '.ljmn.1 , n,r 'J wd4, tjw. wt'''.sn (Izr) sn 1

These rebels in this form, outside of the hidden chamber: The Great God, he inflicts their injuries (upon) them.

147. See Pianka£[ 1953, plate XXII,

-=- ++ =""=

they having been punished outside of the hidden chamber, where mey co nfrom

I

These enemies in this form, H9

2

I I I

4---6 (text lIe). Text placed above the decapitated enemies on the right.

148. Initial n omitted through haplography. 149. Lie., "they being in the front of." 150. See Piankoff 1953, plate XXlI, 7-8 (text IIg). Text placed above the decapitated enemies on the left. 151. Substituting ~ for ~ (similar shape. phonetic shift; §§3.3 and 3.5)

328

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

R6.A.2.13

Text 19'"

, 'p. tljJ.wt st(J.wt)jrw.wjnnfrpn 'J !J'p,j 1)3. t Wsjr''' mdW.j n jmj. w-ljr""J rjd.W W n Wsjr Ijn nfr jmj.t dWJ.t j WsjrSt(J) sfnjrw.w mdw.w , !p.t,j j m,k''' wj 'p>j I}r qrr.t,k twt w, sn jmn .tj , htw n.jjmj. w dWJ.tlj)w srq jb,j m Ijrw.j bJ. w WJq,w n,j 1

Sl3.t ••.

Traversing the corpses of those who are mysterious of forms by this Great God, when he traverses the corpse of Osiris, speaking to those who follow him. What Re says to Osiris, the god's corpse, which is in the Duat. "0, mysterious O siris, who honors the forms that address my corpse, 0, look- l pass above your cavern, the sole image that guards the West, to whom the denizens of the Duat call, so that his heart might breathe by means of my voice, after the bas have flourished on my behalf. The guardian ... "

152. See Piankoff' 1953, plate XXV, 4-8 (rext VII). This text appears in the first register. between the fi rst and second tableaux on the left (scenes 56 and 75), hut appears to describe scene 13, from the second register (p. 45; Hornu ng 1972, 513, n. 13). 153. For cryptic spellings of Osiris with the egg (51 > s), see Fairman 1943. 271; 1945, 90--91). The same spelling also appears, e.g., in the fifth division of the Book of Caverns (Hornung 1979-80, 1: 199-200); similarly, as the fi rst element of (J)s.l, "'Isis," in the fifth hour of the Amduat (Hornung 1987-94, 2:405, nr. 345). C£ also the spellings of the god's name in col. 2 of the present text, substituting 0 for () (similar shape; §3.5). 154. Substituting 0 - - for &-= < 'Cr"7 (similar shape/ phonetic shin; see §§3.3.1, 3.5). 155. Substituting ~ for .::::::= (thus, Piankoff 1953, 46, n. 2).

THE TEXTS

R6.A.2.14 , Ijd. wI W n n!r. wI'" s;,. W(/) /;'2.1 nlr j w!s !W 3 p(,)-n-dwu jw dr,k (k)k. wI jmj,k j 4 w!s I(w) p(,)-n-dw,.1 s~/p b',.k /Jr /;H,k'" j wlS l(w) p(;)-n-dw,.1 · .". h 6 d~'J _nm,k"JmJ. w-h~ I, k ,j wlS I(w) p(,)-n-dw"I /Jlp.k 8 mjmj. w Ip.j j W!S !(w) p(;)-n,-dwu R(' . ..

What Re says to the goddesses who guard the god's corpse: "0, arise, You of the Duatf 60 You expel the darkness that is in you. 0, arise, You of the Duat, and cause your ba to rest upon your corpse! 0, arise, You of the Duat, so that T might cause that you unite with those who follow you! 0, arise, You of the Duat, so [hat you might be satisfied by means of that which is in my head!l61 0, arise, You of the Duat!" Re ...

156. 157. 158. 159. 160. 161.

See Piankoff 1953, plates xxv, 9-XXVJ, 3 (text VlII), Presumably feminine, referring to the twO female figures who stand protectively on either side of the central oval. Substituting ~ for ~ (similar shape; §3.5); thus, also col. 6 (j;nm_k). The divine determinative following the first person suffix is superfluous; thus also, coL 8. Lit. "Raise yourself. This one belonging to the Duat"; for divine names of the typep(l)-n + noun, see ch . 4, §4.3.3. i.e., light and speech; for breathing by means of the laner in the Underworld, see n. 135, above.

329 Text 20'"

330

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

Text21 '~

R6.A.2.14 2

59 ~~

=""=

I I I

---- -== == 0

~

L..o.

="'=

0

90

00

I

n{r pn

'J

m sor 2 pn m nnw. t,fjmj(. t) dWJ. t

4

bJ:zd.tr pr·fm I)], .tjt·f J:zknw·f 6 n pn wit sw 7 sn.tj'M.jj ljnm,sn I)]. wt.J jw 9 n{r pn 'J mdw·f n.J if 00 mdu·f Mw'" jtn·f

This Great God in this form in his oval,l63 which is in the Duat. The Behdetite, he emerges from the corpse of his father, rejoicing on behalf of this one who begat him. His rwo sisters, they unite with his corpse. This Great God speaks to him, when he sees the light of his disc.

R6.A.2.14 1

Text 22'"

4d. wt Rt." n ntr. W wiSY. W b3 R(' n 2 nIr. w nn n nIr. w

wIs. w bJ Wsjr m·tn 3 wj 'p.j J:zr.tn w4w'''(.j) n.{njr. w·{n 4 W{s.{n bJ Wsjr n.f jmj. w js dwJ.l , hnw.w n bJ n Wsjr {Wtjs I)ntj jmn.tjw

162. See Piankoff 1953, plate XXVI, 4-6 (text IX). 163. The word {n)nw.t (Wb 1I, 21 7.9), originally signifying the dung baH of the scarab beede, refers here to the great ovoid shape in which Osiris lies, and from which his son Horus emerges. Spellings with the double initial n are peculiar to the Book of the Earth of Ramesses VI (Hornung 1963--67, 2:105), for which compare, e.g., ch. 5, scene 55, Ramesses VI. caption 8. 164. Piankoff (1953,48. n. 6) indicates that "Ce groupe doit repn!senter Horus, mais comment?" One possible solution is to interpret the tooth, 6=, as J;. (Fairman 1943, 223, nr. 159; 1945, 75), followed by a superAuous book roll and mouth-r as the second radical of the god's name, plus divine determinative. The alternate view, followed above, interprets the group a: ~ as a phonetic spelling of bf.u;i.tj, i.e., Horus ofEdfu (see P. Wilson 1997, 326), in which ~ assumes its usual phonetic value b~, and substituting a=!Ib. for c:::::::; (similar shape; §3.5) and for u, kkwj 5 m-IJI ('p)m'j /:Ir.sn I

1J3. w/=sn mn=tj228 m s. t=sn or 4. t

These gods in this form, they guar[dingJ the corpses, which they behead, when they invert their bodies: This god inflicts thei r injuries, without their speaking to him.

The bas of these guardians of theirs, they enter afrer this god. , darkness them, after he (passes) above them,

their corpses being established in their place, eternally.

221. Wri tten mhJtj. w, inAuenced perhaps by the spelling of the compound preposition m-!Jft. 222. I.e., Osiris. 223. Lit., "at."

224. See Piankoff 1953, places XXXl, 6-XXXJI, 1 (text XVI). 225. Piankoff's tentative restoration of"sn S sn (W (1953. 56, n. 1) does not appear 226 . Many parallels support this emendation; see ch. 4, §4.8 .

to

fir the preserved traces.

227. lhus, Piankolf 1953, 56, n. 3. 228 . Substituting ~ for mn, E5 (similar shape; §3.5); also note the 2ms/3fs stative suffix Itt), representing either a mistake for Middle Egyptian "W or else the generic Late Egyptian stative suffix (see LEG, 195 c).

341

THE TEXTS

R6.AA.31

Text 30m

---++

nn n n{r. w (sic)"" m s!J.r"" pn sn 2 [m)r"":sn tU.wt J;ftj.w.sn 3 dj.t.sn st/.wtjm:sn jw n[r pn '; 4 wd:f t/W. wt:sn m-!J.t js 5 'p:f I;r:sn wnn:sn m kkwj Gjwt) m;;"'.sn Mt/wj !J.rw W 7 pW st/mw~ nn n n[r. wt sn r:sn 8 srq·sn jm·f dj nn n n[r. wt 9 St/.t mjmj. w J;ftj. w W I

229. See Piankoff 1953, plates XXXII , 2- XXXlII, 2 (text XVII). 230. lnc caprofs described he re are depicted clearly as female in the vignette. 231. Substituting ,--, for _ (similar shape; §3.5); the medial p is superfluous.

232. Thus. Piankoff 1953, 56, n. 13. 233. For this spelling of mH, see ch. 3, §3.7.1.

234. Substituting c= for ~ < ~; see discussion at §3.6.3, ex. 7.

342

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

mlO -al js 'p~! ~r~sn wd~! n, ,~sn jrw. w~sn rjd.wl n R' 'P 12'! ~r qrr.lln SU.I ';.I rklf" . w j SU .I rklf. w !p. wI " jgr.1 S,,(./) kkwj " j m~!n wj 'p~j Inn> 16 SI(;./) spr~j Ifr '1./ srj. wI j l7 ssm wj sp-snw j ssp wj ('; 18 SU . w 'm~ln srj. wI 19 jmj. w(/) hi. w I:zlj. w 'py. w

,

236

hnw -tn jw=j S3S./ 37 20

[njmj. W ~('('. w=!n 2J8 " jw.j hnw(~j) Ifr q'lf. w 21

These gods (sic) in rhis form, mey [binJding rhe corpses of meir enemies, in whom rh ey have placed rhe flames: This Great God inflicts their injuries , so rhar afterward he mighr pass above mem. How mey shall exiS[ is in darkness, (namely) rhe ones who do nor see the light. The voice of Re is what these goddesses hear, when they breathe rherein,D9 these goddesses placing flame in the ones who are as enemies of Ret so that afterward he might fly above rhem, and so mar he might allor thei r forms to them. The speech of Re, when he passes above this mysterious cavern, Great-of-Flames: "0, you Mysterious One, you flames of the corpses of Igerer,2010 which guard the darkness. 0, see- I traverse you, Mysterious One, when I arrive above (the cavern) Great-of-Flames! 0, guide me! Guide me! 0, receive me, Great-of-Mysteries, when you swallow the flames that are in rhe bas, which follow mose who pass by! RejOice! I cross you, who are in your jubilations. I rejoice on acco unt of the sunlight."l-4l

Substituting ~ for ~ I 0 . Perturbation of nand 1 (§3.7.3). Subsdrudng iii for~ and 1h for :i: (class subs(imrion; §3.7.2). Substituting _ for ~ (s imilar shape; §3.5) . For breathing by means of the sun god's voice, see n. 135, above. The realm of the dead; lit: "Place ofSiJence." Piankoff 1953, 57 and n. 6, translates this last sentence "Je ... jubilez., pl iez (votre bras) ," and suggests an emendation of "iwri ~nw ~r I{~ < ('rtn > ," adding later that "this last sentence is obviously corrupt" (Piankoff 1954,373, n. 39, Ramesses VI , 373, n. 39). Hornung (1972, 477) fo llows the laner suggestion, translating: "jubeln ... (unklar)." Both scholars' confusion appears to he due at least in parr to a misinterpretation of the word q('h. Was "arm" (Wb V, 18.6-7) rather than "sunlight" (Wb V, 21.6), as understood above. 235. 236. 237. 238. 239. 240. 24 t.

THE TEXTS

343

Text 31'"

R6.A.4.72

c,

, !!d. wi n R'''' ssm nlj /Jr'" rd. wj SI(>.I) j 2 ssm pn SI'.1 !Jprj. w nlj I)r'" rd. wj ,$1,.1 qC/J c.k ~nw~

rmn H7=k

m.k wj Cp,j /Jr 0'. wi .511.1 b,.j hr .5Js'~·f (sic.) /Jr jmj. w=sn'" ms( 4) ('p~j

5

wj gs./"

tn ('".w

l5l

In r=ln tkJ=ln 6 [n c!Jm·fn n.fn sg. wl'fn ('pW=/51 SIJ. 17 In /Jlp.[n mjmj. w-r(,).j wg.j n·fn srq./n 8 h,y In n.j h,y n.fn /WU) js wd (gw. wi m !J.ftj. w.k)'"

"What Re says to the great image which is beneath the feet of the Mysterious One: "0, you image, Mysterious-of-Manifestations, which is beneath the feet of the Mysterious OneBend your arms! Raise your shoulders' See-I pass above the corpses of th e mysterious place, my ba crossing it (sic.), above [he ones who are with them, I giving birth to myselC"

242. See Piankoff 1953, plate XXXIII, 3-8 (text XVIII). Scene 72, which the present rext annOtates, occurs in the fifth register but the text was appended to the end of the fourth register, presumably for reasons of space (see Piankoff 1954, 373; Hornung 1972, 478). 243. Perturbation, for W n (Piankoff 1953, 57, n. 7). 244. Substituting for IiSl (similar shape; §3.5); thus also col. 2. 245. Perturbation (§3.7.3). 246. For this spelling, see Wh II. 493. 247. Substituting c::=J for ~ (similar shape; §3.5). 248. Substituting for ~ (class substitution; §3.7.2). 249. Substituting c::=J for _ (phonetic change; §3.3.I). 250. SubsritutingC for ~,as an error from the Hieratic (Piankoff 1953,57, n. 11, ciring both masculine and feminine examples from Dendera; however, note that in the earlier Ptolemaic texts from Edfu, this interchange is limited to the first person feminine (Fairman 1943,247, m. 307 (§3.4, n. 79). The sense of extending the arms "toward (Le., against) the face of Apep," as represented in the vignette, seems to favor this emendation. 277. Substituting Q. < ~ for ~ (class subsdtution; §3.7.2) 278. Substituting for ~ (similar shape; §3.5) 279. Substituting ~ for

-

_

-

O

00 I I I III:::::

.c-.... I I I

H. [... 'p=fn ... fJn 'p.sn [z1(W) !p. wI,_3=!n mn=1jlO6 m s.t=ln H2

t

=n -

I I I '/

crzl :;: ~ ~ ~ = = .J /)' = x+9

x+8

II-...

@

x+7

x+S

r r

LJ

II I

O ~ L......I

III

III

_Q

='"'= I I I

I I I I I I III P

c::=::;

1'.-0

I W ~ ~.[ W 0 . I I I =""= ~~ c::=::; I I I

0

x+2

I I I I I I II-...

11'79 ~~

nlL...-:..~~~~,--.

r

x+3

~ ~~ -+-+

-

~ ~

n= ilL /}';;to ilL

](+6

-. I I I

.....-c>

",, 0 1'.-

-. ~

I I I - . I I I 1110

"( ... J you following your ( ... J, when they follow afrer your corpses, they havi ng remained in your place."

298. Substituting ~ for ~ (similar shape; §3.5) 299. Omission/coalescence of med ial semivowels (§3.3 .3, ex. 2). 300. Substituting for ~I 0 (error from the Hieratic; §3.4). 301. Substituting c:::::J for ot::O> (error from the Hieratic §3.4; cf. Moller 1965, 2:nrs. 82 and 335). 302. The group following Wsjr·SJ~ , from cols. 25-27 (ntr. w nn n ntr. w jm). w-tJt Wsjr-sJM, appears to be a dinographic error. 303. Substituting the Hieratic seated man, }>, for 1 (similar shape; §3.5) 304. The addition of the seated god determinative and second set of plural strokes suggest that the mnj. wt stJ. wt were understood in their anthropomorphic aspect, as human headed posts, rather than simple inanimate objects (see discussion at ch. 5, scene 43, nn. 655-57) . 305. See Piankoff 1953, plate XX. 5-9 (text XVII) . Indeterminate number of columns lost from the beginning of the inscription, along the adjacent edge of the engaged column. Only the left third of column x+ 1 survives; the restoration suggested here is based upon the preserved traces visible in Piankoff 1954, plate 128. 306. Old Egyptian 3fp stadve ending (see §3.6.3, n. 174); thus, also col. x+14.

354

.,..4

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

nn n nIr. w m sor pn .. s sgr""=w ~r /:lr. w=sn ••, (m) mk. wt=sn he. w .. ,.sn S(n)[y.I=sn •• 8 br'"'=sn

st;, W 11;+9

C"

SJ3x.lo~Sn

jw ntr pn" .. ll gwj=jr.sn njs.. 12 =f bJ. w=sn sn Hl3 ,=sn C"p=sn btw ".14=1 !J3.wt=Sn mn=tj H15 m s.wt=sn jr-m-bt Hl6 C"p nt' ('J I}r=snJl19 I}JPH17 ,brlO sn kkw.fll

These gods in this form , after having , spent the night upon their faces, (in) their proper places, with their flesh and their members beneath them: Those who are Mysterious of Arm, they stand guard. This Great God, he calls to them, he summoning their bas, while they fly after him, th eir corpses having remained in their places. Now, afterward, the Great God passes above them, then darkness inevitably conceals them.

R6.B.1.2 Parallels: Cenotaph.3; Tjahorpta.3 (app. 3, plate 1)

ntr pn m sor pn ~r psd jJkr 2 StJy htp(=w) m wj(J)=j jmj dWl .l=j gwj,=f bl.1 SIJ .I sSli" '1 , br jJkr s r''' wnw.1 , 'p=s kkwj , dj=j M·wi m B bJ. wi 9 JIj.tj I

307. The determinative is obscure. 308. Substituting for f& (similar shape; §3.5). 309. Not /:Ir. wrsn, "their faces," as in col. x+S (thus, also Pian koff 1953. 37). 310. Following Piankoff 1953, 37 n. 8; for the construction see ch. 4, §4.8. 311. For the cryptic orth ography offeminine kkw.t, cf. Abitz 1989b, 5. Hornung 1963--67, 36, nr. 30, indicates that the loss of the distinction between masculine and feminine kkw{ .t) is characteristic of the Book of Caverns and orner late(r) texts. For Similar cryptic spell ings of me masculine noun, see Hornung 1979-80, 1: 197; 2: 149; and Darnell 2004, plate 21. cols. 21, 26, 35, 46--47. 312. See Piankoff 1953, plate II, 1-7 (text III) . Text surrounding Aker. 313. With superfluous medial r (Piankoff 1953, 8, n. 4). 314. Substituting ::=:::> for ~ (error from the Hieratic; §3.4).

m

355

THE TEXTS

'qiO·jmjtn /.I,y lI ·j t" 12· wI suyD·t n[r. wj sn

18

m n("yw=sn (r) wj;

19

I' wr. wj

"15" wj jmj.

wj I,j,kr SUy

17

R("

sd".sn Ip I, '/;.Ij 20 wnn rd. wI=sn m tl sn·sn /.Ir b, '/;21· tj ssmw tjwj n[r. w ssm.j W /.Ir 22 WI. wI SO. wI wnw. wi R(' ssm=sn This god in this form upon rhe back of mysterious Aker, where he rests in his barque: The one who is in his Duat, he calls to the mysterious corpse, the great mystery

beneath Aker at the hour of "She traverses rhe darkness," when he places light in rhe corpse of the Horizon-Dweller, entering [he disc. so that he might illuminate the mysterious corpses of the two gods. the ones, (he two great ones, the two that are in mysterious Aker, while they make their way (to)'" the barque of Re, travelling upon the land of the Horizon Dweller. So long as their feet shall be in the earth, they stand guard over the ba of rhe Horizon Dweller. The leader who calls the gods, he leads Re upon the secret ways, and the Hours of Re, they (also) lead.'"

•

315. Substituting t for ~ (class substitution; §3.7.2) 316. For the idiom m n'i r, ube on the way to," see Wb II, 206. 317. For the rare use of ssm without a following direct object see Wb

rv, 287.

twO

elder

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

356 R6.B.1.38

Parallel: Tjahorpra. 1 (app. 3, plate 8)

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

__

13

12

c= c= 0 o

-== -=,,4I I I

I I I

4f~ I I I

I I I

I I I

-I I I

IIIP

9

""""~ -r

c= 0

I I I

Iil1

44f

Inn n wnw.wt m sbr z pn jrw. w=sn 3 m 4b~. w",sn sw.(w)t=sn 4 m brew) wp.t"'=sn ssms=sn nIT pn ~; mjmnt6.t st;y.t jrw,. w R< r wnw. wt=sn sjr=snjry.t,=sn ('pp=r 20 ;..

19 18 17 16 15 111="'=~10,;';j)

r

l!:1 Il" II I I I I =../~6 o 00-- I I I I

0

="'=

IJ:&

\5 F

0

~ --="

91=

=

~

14 0

I I I.!:,.

L:J

--=".::3:

=

for (Hieratic e rror, §3.4; fo r the particle, see §4.5) for ~ (class substitution; §3.7.2).

407. Written asjw (Piankaff 1953,20, n. 1); cf. cols. 5-7. 408. Reverse nisbe (after Hornung 1972, 441); cf. scene 68, Ramesses VI, caption 1. 409. Piankoff 1953, 20, translates, "je suis n~ lorsque je suis ne par moi-meme," apparencly interpreting both occurrences of ms as sgm. nzj clauses. Hornung 1972, 441 , renders both as relative fo rms, .. ... den ich geborcn habe als eincn, der danach seiber fur mich gebiert (?) !". 410. Sec Pian koff 1953, place X, 2-4 (text XX). 411. Cf. cols. 2- 3 and parallel text R6.B.1.51.49, cols. 2- 3. 412. Substitudng for:::::» (Hieratic error, §3.4j for the particle, see §4.5).

THE TEXTS

371

Traversing the corpses of those who are warlike of face by this Great God, when he passes over the corpse of Khepri. "0, corpses of those who are warlike of face, you who are great of condition in the West .....

R6.B.3.26 1

Text

nn n n[r. w m stJ.r pn 14

=sn ('. wj 2 J:ttmy. w bntj /:umy.t ntsn 3 w!s=sn jtn.sn LS f", wj=sn wIse =snr >1 Rf" '. wj·sn bnm·sn I)]. wi dw>,.ljw (r) wnw.1 sJ.tj.sn wnw.1 bJ n bJ R' SJ/

These gods in this form, when they guard the twO arms that destroy, which are before the Place of Destruction: It is they who shall lift up their disc. Their arms, they lift up Re. Their arms, rhey unite with the corpses of the Duat-dwellers (at) the hour of their guardian, (namely) the hour of the ba of Re's ba.

5

r 9 4

!~

~1J......,j-

3

I II

- < > c:::l

00 ~

*~ O~

I

~!Y II 9 1J......,j-=

=111

(j ~=

I I I

- 0="= 0 _

I

*';'7';' 0

~

.F"" 0""

*

_III

I....,t.- 0 "fC& O~ 413. See Piankoff 1953, plate X, 5-8 (text XXI). 414. The orthography employed here anticipates the spelling .Botj, "guardian," from coL 5. 415. Cf. the syntax of the follow ing sentence, ", wj~sn bnm~sn.

61

413

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

372

Text 62~ 16

R6.B.3.40 Parallel: R6.B.3.47.63 (app. 3, plate 15) 14

13

II

12

9

10

8

7

6

5

4

I I I

I I I

3

2

F, ~ ~ £ ~ ~ --- -- F ~ ~ \jrrr -~ ~ ~ ~ - ilf>J -- i¥ ~ -. c::::::::~ ~=~ ~ iCt ~

~ -~ --- . ~ c::::::::

I1!L ~ -~ ~ ! II - . ~ =~ f \Yl - --- '0' --~ + -- - . L:'... L:J

\j

I I I

~

-="

!.fa

I I I 11-...0.

0

L:J

I I I 0

0

~

I I I E:5

0

I I I

Il......l.

0

I I I

0

0

I I I

~

I I I E:5 0 0

~

0

ntr (',

if '" 'p·f r jmj,. w·sn sn ssp,.sn jt(n)''''f'J sW.t 6 ssp.sn bJ· wt·sn 7 n!r. wt 8 jmn( .w) bJ· wt iJkn, sn dj.t(w) sn tp. w·sn 10 Tnst'" SJ(J).t psg.t.s·~ II dj.s '·s r jt(n) J!J.tj 12

bJ. W 'p.sn m-l;t 13·f IiJ. wt.snjmn(.w)

I'

IC7

~

-=" 9> 0 I I I I I I 11-...0. I I I 0 0 -=" 0 I I I L:'... I I I -=" I I I 00 ~

~ I I I 0 I I I IC7 0 0 a........t

nn n nJr. w m stJr pn

2 ~knw~sn 3

--

~

~

I I I

Ie I I I

110

L:J

I1!L \j =9

0 0 I I I L:'...

~

1

&0

I I I

(m) S.t·sn

I I I

I I I

These gods in this form: The reason they praise the Great God, when he flies toward those who are with them, and they receive his disc, Great-of-Shadow, is so that they (in turn) might receive their corpses. The goddesses remain hidden. The corpses, they rejoice, when their heads are given (to) them. Tenser, who protects her Ennead, she presents her arm to the disc of the twO horizons. The bas, rhey follow afrer it, while their corpses remain hidden (in) their place.

416. See Piankoff 1953, plates X, 9-Xl, 4 (text XXII). 417. SubstitUling for =::> (Hieratic error, §3.4; for the partide, see §4.5). 418. For similar spellings without the final n (thus, also, col. I 1), see ch. 3, §3.3.2, ex. 3 and nn. 58-60. 4 19. Piankoff 1953, 22, n. 3, originally suggested that':'::, could be a mistake for .!~t, /)rj-tJ, "master of the earth," but later translated the group as a proper name, "Tenset (?)" (1954, 344). Hornung 1972, 443, follows the latter suggestion, but cf. also Barguet 1978, 54, who interprets the name as tn s.t, "this woman." The name. ifit is such. is otherwise unanested. 420. The suffix 6S has been written as the dep endent pronoun sr, here and twice in the following column.

373

THE TEXTS

Text 63

R6.B.3.47

421

Parallel: R6.B.3.40.62 (app. 3, plate 15) 12

11

10

~ a~ ~ 1-

--- ~ F 0

III

I I I

f 10

o

o

o

~;:::;;:D

c::::::::: ~

/1/1 /Jib

;="

III ~

3

\j 9 0

~

2

I

--- iii

"""'=I I I

~

o

I I I

-=o

These gods in th is form: The reaso n they praise the Great God, when he traverses the ones who are with them and they receive his disc, Great-of-Shad ow, is so that they might receive their corpses, while the goddesses remain hidden.

'P5~Jjmj. w~sn

sn sSP7~snjt(n)m~f '; 8 sw.t

sSP9=sn (p. wl lO=sn

nl rll , wt

9

_IIIL'-...

nn n nlr.w m SO' 2pn IJ.knw3:sn 4 nIr~] 6

4

~

!

dm

5

~ III

!~ 111=

I I I

~ Il11

CO>

6

~

I II ~III

~

-- -- ,H 7

. (j"'" 12imn:! 'J

R6.B.3.47 15

I

14

0111

13

12

~

I I I

~==

J

59

~ c::=:, I I I

IQ] 00

I I I

~ ---1

.If

00

o

I I I

0

9

I I I

rf

sn •

r~sn dj5~sn

I I I

9

o

I I I

tp(. w)~sn 6 m bntj 7 S/H

sn426 ssp=sn 9 J:ldw(.t)

10

n.t R('

sn 11 srq~sn 12 m st. WI:! 13 mjJ.t=sn md. w(l)''' n 15 R' (n)''' gw. w~f

421. 422. 423. 424.

--lIt 8

--- - -0

nn n n[r. w m 2 sor pn m 3j3.1=sn 8

I'

=

10

\j

~

~

4

3

2

I

---- --- iF---- -I I I IQ] 0 I 0 """'=I I I I I I I I I ~

CO>

o

=

~

=

These gods in this form in their mound. they, placing their head(s) in front of the mysterious place, receiving the ligh t of Re, and breathing by means of his rays within their mound. Res speech (to) his evil ones . . .

See Pian koff 1953, plate Xl, 5-7 (texe XXlJI). Substituting for => (H ieratic error, §3.4; for the panicle, see §4.5). For this spelling, sec ch. 3, §3.3.2, ex. 3 and nn. 58-60. Old Egyprian feminine plural srative endi ng (sec ch. 3. §3.6.3, ex. 5 and n. 174); cf. parallel text R6.B.3.40.62. cols. 7--8: n[r.

wI jmn(~ w).

425. 426. 427. 428.

See Piankoff 1953, plates XI, 8-Xl I, I (text XXIV). Taking sn as the beginning of a proclitic pronoun construction (thus, Barta 1985b, 95 . nt. 9; see above, §§4.3.1-2). For this speHing, cf. R6.B.2.70.57, col. 3, and R6.B.2.70.58, col. 1. Thus, Piankoff 1953, 23. n. 6.

374

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

R6.BA.3

Text 65'"

, Parallels (row I): Kh.2.3.6, cols. 1-2; Pa.B.2.3.l0; H .B.1.3.l, cols. 1-3 (app. 3, plate 16)

I ssp w,(.t) nfr.t jn nIr pn " jw jmj. w""·f (ltp(.w) m wj, b,. w jdb. w n R' 2 'p(.t) m wj/" jdb. w jn nIr pn " (I,j.f '" (r) qrr.t,n Nnw

Taking me good path'" by this Great God: Those who are with him rest in me barque, (namely) the bas of the shores of Re. Traversing the shores in the barque4J5 by this Great God, when he descends (to) the cavern of Nun.

R6.BA.5 I

tjd. w R' r (ltmy.t

2 pr·f 'p·f S;(,)y , jmnt.t'" j Nnw .jmj 'p.jTHnn

What Re says at the Place of Destruction when he goes forth, traversing the one who guards the west: "0, Nun and those who are thereinMay he traverse Tatenen!"

429. See Piankoff 1953, plate XIII, 3-6 (text XXXI). 430. Wriuen as though duaJ jmj. wj. 431. Substituting ~ for ~ (similar shape; §3.5) and ~ for ~ (class substitution; §3.7.2), with a water determinative in place of the more usual boat. 432. Sub,,;,ut;ng , fOl q (§3.51. 433. Substituting 0 for LJ (similar shape; §3.5), 434. For ssp WJ.t. see Wb IV, 533.13. 435. The syntax is inverted, lit.: "traversing in the barque, the shores." 436. See Piankoff 1953, plate XII, 2- 3 (text XXV). Columns placed directly before the rjght~facing Aker lion. 437. Substituting for =:::> (error from the hieratic; §3.4), with a superfluous second "hill-coumry" determinative.

THE TEXTS

375

Text 67'"

R6.BA.5 !J3.wt.[n mn.tj m s.(w)t.[(n)

"Your corpses are established in yo ur place(s) ."

,....... ~£ ==::>.

~

~~

c= R6.BA.5

~ 0

I I I

c= ,....... I I I

Text 68'"

Parallel: Pa.B.3 .5.12 (app. 3, plate 18) 1

J

3kr m sar pn 2 1)3. wt Sw m snb.t.J 4dw W n n[r, . wt St3. w(t) jmj(. wt) jmnt.t

Aker in this form.

with the corpses of Shu in his breast: What Re says to th e mysterious goddesses who are in the 440 West ...

R6.BA.6

1 S{3 n[r pn '3 jn n[r. wt ssmwy.t'" jmj.w(t) mr r psd m 4w p(n),,' j3bt.t (jdw 2 (j)n'" n[r. wt jmj. w(t) mr n W-Hr-3/;.tj m.k W s/3.n.J nJr. wj sp-snw 'p4 r qrr(.t) Nww

Towing this Great God by the goddesses who lead, (namely) those who are in the canal, in order to shine in this eastern mountain .

438. Above the so lar disc. 439. See Piankoff 1953, plate Xli, 4-5 (text XXVI). Columns placed directly before the left-facing Aker lion . 440. Piankoff 1953 , 26, n. 5, suggests that this {ext remained unfin ished due to lack of space.

441. See Piankoff 1953, place XlII , 7- 10 (text x::x:xJI). 442. Substituting \\ for o {similar shape; §3.5). 443. For the omission of word-final consonants, see §3.3.2. 444. For this spell ing, see discussion at §3.3.1. ex. 7.

Text 69'"

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

376

What is said by the goddesses, who are in the canal, to Re-Hor-Akhti: "Look-Re has set out!~5 So beautiful! So beautiful, when he travels to the cavern of Nun!"

Text70~

R6.BA.6 I

'p(.t) jn n,r pn m slJr,=! m-lJt spr=J .. ~,

2

1 L-.

I I I

I:\...

=""= Travelling by this Great God in his manner, after his arrivaL ..

-='"

=

..-.:>

00

L'.~

L'.-

-='"

9

10

8

il =""=

= ---

~ = c:::::;::::::::

I I I c? I I I I

I I I

I

(10

I ~

4

5

3

2

I I I

I I I

0 (10 L:J

!~

III

~

Lj,

6

7

I I I

-- df-- = -I

III

SIl.w6=sn m rjb('.w7=sn

}:lr8=sn m t ; st;~=w

445. 446. 447. 448.

0

njmj

10 '.

0

m~-gd -=

nn n , n,r. w m slJr 3 pn m tj.b".(w)t.sn 5

--=-~ O~

Text 71 ~'

R6.BA.7

L-. L..-.

0

wj=sn

m.

These gods in this form in their coffin(s), with their mysteries in their fingers} and their faces in the earth. where they have become mysterious for the one who is in their arms.

For the intransitive use of SIl, see Wb 353. "(aus) ziehen." See Piankoff 1953, plate XII, 8 (text XXVIII). A additional, blank column following the extant text suggests that the original annotation continued beyond this point. See Piankoff 1953, plate XlI, 6-7 (text XXVlI).

THE TEXTS

377

R6.BA.7 \ rjdw R' 'p=!,jdb

j

sl, j

What Re says when he passes the shote: "0, mysterious one! 0 ... "

Text 73'"

R6.BAA7 7

6

='"'= I I I

t -="

4

3

O~

~

2

"" m =no :=.

L:J

I I I

D

II

1

L'..... I I I IQJ

-="

It. --

~ ~~

L...&

5

Lj, :=.

~

I"",

'C7

0 0 L:J

L'C ='"'= 1l.......... I I I 0 0 L'.....

\j,(.I) nb(.I) prr,.(t) m-I}t 'pp,! sl3. w • m-Ijnt) (sic.)''' ,rjb,.wI=sn 6jw n!r pn (; 7 gW/ 52 =j Every mound [hac emerges after he passes the mysterious ones who are in front of their coffins:

This Great God, he calls.

449. See Piankoff 1953, plate XII, 9 (text XXIX). 450. See Piankoff 1953, plate XlII, 1-2 (text XXX). 451. For jmj. w-bnl. 452. Substituting.a.........ll for ~ (shape substitution with phonological similarity; see ch. 3, §3.5),

378

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

R6.B2.1.53 I

[m33l;4w

jw nlr pn '3 tjw]j.! sn srq sn 2 [arw.! dW3W] Hwtj.sn /pp.ar (s)n (kkw)'" 3 U3]'" nlr pn m s[ar pn]

[Seeing the light: This Great God], he [calls] them, [his voice] causing rhat rhey breathe,'" [afrer] rheir guardian [has been praised]. Then, (darkness) inevitably conceals them. This god is in [rhis form]'

Text 74'"

,

2

3

I -=-

oF,'

I

CO>

II

--

~

I I I

t

6l 9 0

-

-='"

Ta - --

I I I

C:I.

~ """'- """'-

o

0

0

453. See Piankoff 1953, plate XV, 8-9 (text Vl). 454. Following Piankoff' 1953, 31, n. 2; for exs. of me full construction, see §4.8. 455. Substituting ~ for ~ (class substitution; §3.7.2); otherwise read as the particlejJ: "Truly, this god is in this form" (see §4.2,

n.8). 456. For this sentence, cf. also Kh.1.8.4. col. 2. For breathing by means of the sun god's see n. 135, above.

379

THE TEXTS

Text 75'"

R6.B2.1.75 16

17

n

14 Il...-.

o 0 ,...... ~ £'.. -=" I I I I'W ~ ,......

\j

~ \j

I I I

~

-

I I I ~

=+

I I I

-

II

13

=o

~

£'..

II

10

9

8

! ~

c

7

o \j

-="\j ~ ~ ,...... ~III ,...... I I I 'b = I I I = t .I? I I I

cc

~O n dO\\

I I I

6

I I I

~

5

I

rtTT; = 9 Il11

Ltc

c

0

~

I I I ,...... ~

i1l 9'

4

3

I-

,......,......

=""= I I I I I I

2

m ,...... ,...... 1

IFf

I I I

-=

0

=""=

[nn] n ntr. W m slJr 2 [pn b,. wt~sn ~r ,j,.1 sn] r~sn 4 dj~sn tp. w~sn 5 m-lJnt SU. w 6 sn sSP7=sn 1J4. wt n 8 R(' sn srq,.sn m Sl. WI I ,! M SWlj,.WI Ii ·Sn m IJrw 12 R' 4wj~! n .sn 13 jr-m-IJI 14 'pp4 ~r~sn I

Is jmn.!J.r'6=sn sf mj;,t I7=snjmj

[These] gods in [this] form, [with their corpses upon the mound], they, placing their heads in front of the mysteries, receiving the light of Re, and breathing by means of his rays: It is, however, only be means of Re's voice that they become bright, when he calls to them. Now afterward, he passes above them. Then, they inevitably hide themselves·58 in their mound therein.

Text 76'"

R6.B2.1.75 I nn n nfr.w m SOT 2pn

These gods in this fotm:

h;, - w!=sn ('h('=y"" .

Their corpses are standing,

,

mJ1=sn

while they look on.'''

457. See Piankoff1 953, plateXIY, 1- 5 (text I). 458. For jmn + reflexive direct object, meaning "hide one's self," see Wb I, 83.13. 459. See Piankoff 1953. plate XiV, 6 (text lI), 460. Texts 76 and 77 both employ a n ative ending ~y with the verb ('1)(', in place of the more usual 3ms ending _w. 461. Intransitive meaningofmu (CDME, 100, n. 2).

380

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

R6.B2.1.75

Text 77'"

Parallel: R9.B.2.7S.13, cols.I4-17 (app. 3, plate 19)

)i 12

II

wi:

11 0

o IoI I

I I I

-~ -~ I I I

I I I

[nn] n n[r. w m sa[r 2 pn] mj,.t,sn , ['i!1'y 4 m-ant db,. (w)t, [sn] ~w1Yw6=sn mjwtj7' w~",sn sjw nlr pn ('J rj.wj9-=i bi. w",sn IO Jwtj mJl6J.=/ sn I

II

n ('J 46S stj=sn 12 jWtj. wrsn

[These] gods in [this] form in their mound, they having [stood up] in front of [their] sarcophagi, while they putrefY in their rotting state: This Great God, he calls to their bas, at whom he does not look, on account of their putrefaction and rotting.

R6.B2.1.77

Text 78'"

Parallel: Pa.B.I.77.9 (app. 3, plate 20)

== • -- + - ~ == ~ == \S +- ~

illl

--

90!lli,'

X

to

II

~ ~

9

III

F

8

~

7

~ z

~

_~~III n)1 III

~

III _

~

n)1

6

5

4

3

2

Q

L'....

f.&

I I I

0

~ ~

Il.......c.

L'.... I I I

0

~

I I I

I I I

9)

I

I

0

LJ

I I I

462. See Piankoff 1953, plates XlV, 7-9 (text III) and

l~ ! ~ 0 LJ

0

A1

Jf

I I I

464. For this orthography, see §3.7.1. 465 . Fa< n-'J./·n (see GEG', §181; Wb 1, 163.13). 466. See Piankoff 1953, plate XVI, 1-4 (texts VII-VIII),

~

a

0

="'= I I I

II

XV. 1 (text IV). The last

463. Substituting'b for b,(c1ass substitutio n; §3.7.2),

I

lwO

columns are separated by a blank space.

THE TEXTS

1

[nn] n n!r. w m siJr 2 pn m rjb3.I.sn 3

sn r.,sn sp-snw~7

jr.1 R' pr,'s jmj. w=sn 6 sn'=sn

4:

[These] gods in this form in their sarcophagus, when they, they are beneath them: The eye of Re) it emerges. Those who are with them, they repulse the Rame, which is in the udjat-eye of [Re]. The twO [goddesses], they [rejoice on their behalf], for the goddesses are their guardian(s).

I)r=sn

sg./~· jmj(./)

381

wg3.1 7 [R'

ntr].lj. [izknw] =sn [n=sn] 9 ntr. wi 10 m S3Wlj(. w)=sn

Text 79~'

R6.B2.1-2.28

-r --

9

8

7

6

C>

~

';;~

~

~ =-="

d

frz

c>

d

fL-. ="'= L-.

L..jI I I

c=

\j

~ 9 III I I I a.!..... 0 II o == 9 I I I == ~ 0 ~ I I I Ie 9

--

II

C>

.r="

L-.

== == 9

II

frzO

C>

I

II

tr

III

frzFt

L:J

1iz(fJ3w m siJr pn BWlj.sn }p.1 ntr prr 'iz' m-

5

4

C>

L..j-

! -d - tfltfl II

-=-

'mn ,r(W)

0

="'= I I I

0

10

""

Ib&!I ="'= I I I

""II II 0

0

~

-r --

I I I Ft

L:J



- 1,= I I I

~

-~ III

•

Ip R' wsr.1 9 n.1 Tm(w) '. wj kkwj p(3)-n-Wnlj

Ft 0

~

hl wt

-

-="

= =~ -= ~ "" 0

grj 03.1 2 Tpy Tpy Tpy wls".sn n=sn izknw=sn , ntr pn m siJr pn S33,/ jmnl.1 sn.lj snw p(3)-n-Wntj , m siJr pn m 6 s3Wlj=tn 03.1 n!r 7 pr=J m '. wj kkwj 8j

3

wts=sn

The serpene in this form, (namely) their guardian of the god's corpse, who comes forth and stands facing the corpse:

~!i o~ ~8 .!...!..!.O

-

I II I I I

467 . For the occurrence of sp-snw; "twO times," after a frontally extraposed pronominal subject, cf CT 7:495g- k, discussed in Roberson 2010, 188. The construction employed here appears [0 be a misreading of the Hieratic, which was evidendy copied correctly in the later parallel Pa.B.1.77.9, col. 2, as sn r,.sn sn{. w· sn !Jr=sn, "with their limbs beneath them,"

468. For this spelling, cf. Wb IV, 375; also cf. Pa.B.1.77 .9, col. 5, which wrires' 469. See Piankoff 1953, plate XV, 2- 7 (text V).

U.

------------------.. THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

382

Tepy!'" Tepy! Tepy! When they lift on their behalf, they rejoice. This god in this form , when he guards the West and the two sisters. 071 Penwenri in [his form , as your guardian of the god's corpse, when he emerges from the two arms of darkness,

after the corpse has been hidden: The head of Re, the Neck of Arum, and the two arms of darkness, they elevate Penwenti.

Text 80m

R6.B2.2.10 Parallel: Tjahorpta.2, cols. 3-21 (app. 3, plates 21-22) 14

12

11

10

9

~

~ = c= ~ c=

111

111

l'

o

1

+ == 9

1 1 1

=

C>

iii

=

C>

20

7

W

C>

19

18

---

16

15

119 L'...

111

roJ roJ

~

d.

*

111

1 ""

1 1 1

3

2

I

0

0

II...-

~

L'...

== -== --

0

--=d
; thus, Hornung 1990b, 68, n. 48.

6

*1 1 1 UlJ 111

--V~

"""'=-

"'=-

< 0>-

", 1.

"'=-

111

-

"'=-

~

388

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

TextSSll

R7.B.1.59 J

nn n nJr.w m sIJr pn

jw ntr.tj dwj.s[n] b, n R' m ,jm'''.j sdm'" b, md. wi jmj. w.j jp nfr /:1(. wl-j tj if" jmj dwH b', sn Ip. wl-sn mn.tj m S.I·sn jr-m-Ijl (pp n[r pn (, /:Ir.sn 4 h,p.!]r sf" [kkw}l jl1lj. w·sn Ijpr TnS. w(I).sn m-Ijl , TnS. w(l) [n] n[r pn (, r dj.1 sl. (w)l-j m-Ijl n[r. w jmj(. w).j r nb These gods in this form:

The two goddesses, they call the ba of Re in its disc, the ba hearing the words of those who are in it,

while the god assembles his members, the one therein calling their bas, while their corpses remain fixed in their place(s). Now, afterward, this Great God passes above them. Then the [darkness] that is with them conceals it, their births occurring after the birth [of] this Great God, in order to place his rays behind the gods, who are with him, every day.

R7.B.1.59 1 nn n n!r.w m sar pn ,jw nrr.tj dwj.sn 3 b, R' m [jtn?]-j sdm b, md. wi jl1lj. w(/)

These gods in this form: The two goddesses, they call the ba of Re in his [disc?], so that the ba might hear the words therein.

-

~11'l I I I

.c:=:

o

="'=

I I I

-

o

513. See Lefebure 1886-90, 2:plate 3D; Hornung 1990b, 68-69 and plate 118b.

514. Cf. the cryptic spelling ~!:,jtn, in Darndl 2004, 21 1 and plare 24, 3 1-32; for the derivation of) from 1, see pp. 396-97). 515. $ubsti[Uring 0 for ~ (after Hornung I 990b. 68; also see above. §3.5) 516. As a variant of the more usual concatenation of panicles,js[ rf(GEG, §§ 152, 243)?

517. Substituting.::::=::: for:::::> (similar shape; §3.5).

518. See Lefebure 1886-90, 2:plate 3E-F; Hornung 1990b, 69 and plate 118b-c.

THE TEXTS

§6.9

RAMESSES

389

IX

The Book of the Earth texts from the sarcophagus chamber of Ramesses IX have never received a complete cransiacion.S19 Guilmanc's publication of the inscriptions and decoration KV6 remain the standard reference, but include no translation or commentary,SlOUnfortunately, Guilmanc's hieroglyphs are also often cramped and difficult to read. In addition, the plates corresponding to the left and right sidewalls of the sarcophagus chamber suffer from numerous inaccuracies and occasional lacunae nor presen t in the original. S2l I collated all of the texts presented below in the summer of 2008. correcting many previous errors and omissions.

Text 1'"

R9.A.l.S4

nn n nfr(w).1 m sljr pn jJkb=sn I;r jJ,.1 SI(J)./,n n.1 Wsjr dbl~ dm4w sn sbl;,sn tjsy=sn /:Ir·lp jJ.1 SIJ jrw. w jw R' tjw,=/ sn wr/"=/ snjJkb=sn R' dWJ.j bJ nfr pn , sM=/ kkw jmj. w jJ.t'''.j I

bJ. w=sn ('p=sn m52i -l)t64

jmj=k IJI(w)=sn ljJ.I=j n/(j) '. wj=sn'~ m ('. wj7=sn sst]. w=sn m (j.b('. w=sn

/:Iknw=sn n=j

519. Piankoff 1953, 62--69. published a transcription and translation of the texts surrounding scenes 19 and 28; with the exception of occasional excerpts and quotes, the remainder of Ramesses IX's Book of the Earth rexrs have been translated in their entirety here for the firs t time. 520. Guilmant 1909. plates 91-92. 52 1. fu Piankoff (1953, 62, n. 4) noted subsequem to his collation of the texts, Lefebure's hand copies, while not comprehensive, nevertheless reproduce the inscriptions much more accurately (cf. Lefebure 1886-90, 2:plates 14-19). 522. Transcription after Lefebure 1886-90, 2:plate 14D; also see Guilmant 1909, plate 91,1-7. 523. Substituting for 0 (similar shape; §3.5). 524. Spelled phonetically: d-bJ, with superfluous l and house determinative. as if cjbJ.l, "sarcophagus." 525. Substituting for (similar shape and phonology; §3.5). 526. The determinative has been inverted. 527. Wb 111, 347.8-12 indicates that r-lJt, "behind," nrst begins to appear in the Twenty-Second Dynasty; consequently probably substitutes here for 4C=. (§3.5). 528. Apparemly a dinographic error (thus, Manassa 2007, 31).

e

t t

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

390

These goddess(es) in this form . mourning over the mysterious mound of Osiris Deba-Demedj,~29 crying out, and calling atop the mound. Mysterious-of-Forms: Re. he calls to them. commanding that they mourn. 53O Re. he praises the ba of this god. illuminating the darkness which is in his mound. Their bas. they travel after him. the one who is with you following them, (as well as) my corpse, which is in their protection,S31 their mysteries being in their fingers, when they offer praise to me.

R9.A.2.12 Parallels: R7.A.2.I2.5 ; Sarcophagus.2 (app. 3. plates 25-26) I nn n n[r.w m slJr pn

'. wj"sn m rk ilr(. w)"sn

2

sw. wrll =sn !Jnn=sn J:tr:sn

j,kb"sn ilr 1;;,.1 SO.I n.1 Wsjr IJntv) dw;.1 nI r.yI · ndJ.w 4 smy. 1'''"sn h, mw jmj jr.tj n nn n n[r.tj , m snLY. w·sn m snj. w dw;.tjw srq(. w) jm=s 53S jw n[r pn " mdw"f n·sn b,. w·sn 'p,.sn m-IJI=f Wsjr-njsw.1 nb I,. wj (Ramesses DOl pw m,'-IJrw

1

--

~~

171717 ==::.

o

=""= I I I

--

o

~ ~

9

II

I I I

==::.

.t

These gods in this fo rm , their bandages protecting the oven,

their bas praising Re, their shadows igniting the oven,

and their corpse(s) being in front of the satcophagus.

644. Th us, Piankoff 1957a, 212.

645. For wnj [w / [n, "make haste," see Wb I, 313. 13 . 646. Above the ba-bitd on the far right. 647. Th us, also Manassa 2007, 43; also see above, §4.9. 648. Substituting

~ for

1" (error from the hieratic; §3.4.3).

413

THE TEXTS

Text 46-49

Kh.1.8 I (zr. w.sn~o pw mJ(J. w) (z4 R' jw n!r pn 2 'J rjwI..J)·f sn srq sn iJrw-f

3 Sbl. W Sl=sn

hJp.ljT''' (sn) kkw m-!Jt Their faces are the ones that observe the light ofRe: This Great God, he calls to them, his voice causing that they breathe. 651 The stars, they stand guard. Thereafter, darkness inevitably conceals (them).

Kh.1.9 Patallel: Pa.B.1.9.3-4; Mt.A.1.9.3 (app. 3, plate 30) I wjJ pn In siJT''' pn bnn, f m tJ In (zJW 1..J)J.t bJ.t n!r stJ , jmn mn=tj m=s6SS jw n!r pn 'J ,jr.j'(z'w (zr WJb n wjJ pn hJ.t,f mmw

5 I

e>

-="

Ii

This barque in this form: It rows through the earth, as protector of the (burial) mound and the corpse of the mysterio us and hidden god, only after having moored therein. This Great God, he hoists the sail'" of this barque, once irs prow is in the water.

649. Above the praising god on the left. 650. Perturbation of sand n (§3.7.3); (hus also, coL 3. 651. The verb I)JP is not generally determined with 0 , which probably therefore represents the first radical of 652. For this sentence, cf. R6.B2.1.53.74, eols. 1- 2. For breathing by means of the sun god's voice, see n. 135, above. 653. Above the hoat on the right. 654. Substituting 0 for , perhaps as a simple dinographic error, anticipating the followin g group pn. This substitution also occurs in cryptographic contexts, for which see Darnell 2004, 261 and n. 403. citing also Piankoff 1953. 72-73 (with reference to [he present text). 655. Undemanding the I folJowing · 1 as superfluous . A similar spelling appears in Pa.B.l .9.3. col. 2. 656. For WJb, meaning a "'rype of sai l," see Wb I, 251.2; and Jones 1988, 158, nr. 27.

or.

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

414

Kh.2.3

Text 6

, Parallels: R6.B.4.3.65, row I; Pa.B.2.3.IO; H.B.1.3.1 (app. 3, plates 16-17)

s(s)pm WJ.I nfr.1 jn n!r pn 'J jw , jmj. wrj /:ltp(rW) m wjJrj"" bJ . w jdb. W siJ,s(n)'" sw.., tjdW'" jmj. w jdb. w n R' lur sn 4 Su( rW) sj jw hy~ 5 n Sf(J)Y· w SJJ( . w) , n sJljjmj /:lr.1 jw hy sn n'y( rW) , SJ(s)r! jdb. w su. w jw hy 8 n ms dWJ.1 hy nrk R' 9 hy n ('3 ms. wt ms 10 sw ms. Wlr! msrlW~ hy nrk R' hy nrk j w.n 12 djrn 'prk slJ. W djrn /:llpl3rk mjJbl.1 hy nrk 14 Wsjr ljnsw-ms mJ'-ljrw or Wsjr I

" hy nrk jwrn djrn 'p ,,"k sU. wi djrn J:!lprk m 17 tjw jJbt.1

657. Phonetic spelling sp (cf. CoptiC c;ywn), in which second radical p appears twice, as a dittographic error. Cf. paraJlcl text

H.B.1.3.1, coL l: l11l&, 658 . The 3ms suffix 4has been written twice, as a dirtograph ic error.

659. Cf. H.B.J.3.1, col. 3, ''il~.

+

660. Substituting for +- (class substitution; §3.7.2), plus phonetic compliment s. 661. The pustule determinative is unexpected.

662. O'!W See §4.5. 663. Jw hy probably represents a variant of the common vocative group j hy, rather than the particle jw + hy. Thus, parallel text H.B.1.3.1, col. 5 and following. Cf. also R6.A.1.25.2, eols. 3- 5; R6.A.1.25.4, col. 5; R6.A.1.74.12, cols. 7-8; R9.B.2.75.12, cols. 1- 24; Kh.I - 3.5.1 , cols. 2- 7; and H.B.1.3.2, cols. 3-20). 664. Late Egyptian stative suffix (see LEG, 195 c).

THE TEXTS

Taking the good path by this Great God: Those who are with him have rested in his barque,

and the bt1S of the shores, they tow him. What those who are on the shores say to

Re,

while they are protecting665 him: "0, hail to those who tow, those who protect on behalf of the one who becomes akh, the one who is in the Upper Region! 0, hail! They have set sail, so that he might traverse the mysterious shores!

0, hail to the one born of the Dua~ Hail to you, Re! Hail to the one great of births, the one who birthed him, after his births were given birth! Hail to you, Re! Hail to you! We cause that you traverse the mysteries. causing also [hat you rest in the east.

Hail to you, Osiris Khonsumes. justified before Osiris! Hail to you! We cause that you traverse the mysteries, causing also that you rest in the mountain of the east."

665. Transilive active use of the slative (§4.9).

415

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

416

§6.I1 OSORKON

II'"

O.A.1.51

Text 1

Parallel: R6.B.1.51.47 (app. 3, plate 11) 1 nn n nIr. w m sly pn mj;(.I) w'.r s$(; iB. wI dj.lI=Jrpj,=J (r) jln dj=Jm lB.r[=j] nIr (pnj s[~41=J Umj]. w=J m sl. wr~' n.1 jm 3 njwJ=J jw nIr pn '; gwj=Jn[nj'" n nIr. w jwij m,,=sn 4 srq=sn m sgm I]rw=J M[=snj SJ=sn 'p

W mjmnr.r , sqdd Ip.wI nIr sMjmj.w[=j] [ ... j

These gods in this form in the unique mound: The one who guar[ds the corpses, he has mrned] his [head] (to) the solar disc, so that he might present [his] corpse. [This] g[od], he ill [uminates] those [who are with] him by means of the rays from 669 the side of his flesh. This Great God, he calls to th[ese] gods, who do not see . It is through the hearing of his voice th at they brearhe,'70 and it is when they stand guard that they become bright. It is in the west that Re flies. and it is to illuminate those who are wirh [hirn] that the god's corpse travels [... ]

O.A.1.S1 Partial parallel: R6.B. 1.5 1.48 .. . 1

ij nIr pn '; ~tp=J m wj; 'p=J qrr.ij U; .. ·]

666. All texts after Moncer 1947, plate 37 (reproduced in app. 2, plate 22). All emendations and restorations follow the Ramesses VI parallels (thus. also Piankoff 1953. 5-6, n. 2). 667. Substituting ~ for -yo (error from hieratic; §3A.3) . 668. Substituting for +- (class substiwtion ; §3.7.2), 669. Lit., "of." 670. For breathing by means of the sun god 's voice, see n. 135, above. 671 . The text begins with a subordinate clause marked with tj and the remainder of the passage appears to have been cobbled together with b its and pieces from the partial parallel of Ramesses VI. Piankoff 1953, 6 , n. 8, concludes (hat the present text "a evidemment ere embrouHle par Ie copiste."

+

me

THE TEXTS

41 7

[... m ?] 2 i]l js 'p.j qrr. tj st;. w [... ] ssm·sn sw [... ] , J'w. w(t).j ljnm.sn sw b; ntr ~tp(.w) [~r]j;(.tJ.f ssp.n ntr ~;y [... ] [... ]41 {(w)j ?} j r-m-lJt 'p ntr '; I:zr qrr.tj·ln l:z;p.lJr st kkwj, b;(. w) nn(j. w)'" 'p(.w) jdb b; n Wsjr (O sorkon II) 1 'p.jjdb ... whil e this G reat God rests in rhe barque, twO caverns [ ... J after which he traverses the two m ysterious caverns ( .. . J where they lead him [ .. . ] His shadows, they unite with him, rhe god's ba having reSted [upon] ies mound, the god having received the Shining One [ ... J, when he [ ... J {me?}. Now afterward, the Great God passes above your two caverns . Then, darkness in evitably co nceals them, after the weary ba(s) have traversed rhe bank, and the ba of the Osiris, (Osorko n II)I, (also) traverses the bank.

when he traverses the

§6.I2 PEDAMENOPET

All of the following texes from the tomb of Pedamenopet are published here fot the first time. on The Book of the Earth textS and their associated scenes occur in that romb on the right hand wall of the southernmost extension of Hall XIII, opposite the twelfrh hour of the Amduat. Due to the complete loss of several feet of wall to rhe left and right of rhe surviving relief, the number and extent of the texts included origi nally cannot be es timated with any confidence. The wall decoration was executed in three registers, in which the scenes progress horizon tally from ri ght to left, toward a curved concluding representa(ion . 67~ With the exception of Pa.B.] .22.7 and Pa.B. 3.5. 12, all texts are retrograde, allow ing the signs to "advance" in the same direction as their figural co unterparts. 675 All texts and their associated scenes have been reproduced in line drawing in app. 2, plates 23- 26.

672. For {h is construction, see ch. 4, §4.3.3. 673. The following hieroglyphic rranscripdons derive from a survey ofIT33 that I conducted in the summer of2008, collated against photographs provided through kind permission of Dr. Isabelle Regen in 2009, with thanks to Prof. Claude Trauneckcr. 674. For the selection of scenes, see above, ch. 5, §5.4 ("The Aker Group"). 675. Texts 7 and 12 appear above the large, praiSing figure of Pedamenopet and in fro m of the right half of the Aker-lion, respectively; both figures and their accompanying texts face right, toward the advancing solar entourage (see app. 2, pis. 24 and 26).

418

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

Text 1676

Pa.B.1-3,4 Parallel: Kh.1-3 .4.1 (app. 3, plate 27).

'p(l) jdb. W S,(I) W,. wI jn nlr pn " d'pzJ iB[. w]tjdby[. w] [ddlv R' 'pzj jdb.w S/J b,. w] jmjzj j hy'" [If stofT'i? Ir is unclear to what extent col. 2 corresponds with the remainder of the Khonsumes teXT. Retrograde text, above the boat on the left. See Assmann 1977, 71-72, §2.I.l.2. Col. x+ 1, as transcribed in Assmann 1977, 71 - 72, make little sense and does not appear to correspond with either parallel rext. 719. Assmann (1977, 71) transcribes the damaged group foJlowingjr:j as I~, from which the r~("-masr seems a reasonable restoration, following Kh.1.9.S, col. 4 and Pa.B.1.9.3, col. 2. 7 14. 715. 7 16. 717. 718.

THE TEXTS

429

Text 4""

Mt.A.1.9

, [... t ' njmn.tm r gr=!'" {w,b ?}.f[... ] mw [... ] , [... ] nfr [... ] ,.... [... ] , [... ]

'11'=f[···]

[ . . . J of the West to its (sic.) limit, its {sail?} [ ... J water [ ... ] good [ . .. ] he srands [ .. .]

Mt.A.1.9

, [... J 2 wnn=sn [.. .]'" m sl:!r p[n] ,j n!r. w psg.t ".t m [...] 4 [ ••• ] , [···]I:!ft [... ] [. .. J It is [ ... J rhar they exist in this form.

o (you) gods, the Great Ennead in [... ].

720. Above and to the right of the boat on the right. After Assmann 1977, 72, §2.2.2. 721. Based on the epigraphic copy in Assmann 1977, plate 25b, approximately 1-2 tall sign groups have been lost from the beginning

of the inscription. 722. Perhaps substituting =

for ~ (class substitution; §3.7.2) for alphabetic t(;) > t?

723. Sic., for -j-Ijr-p(;)-13 pn m3'-!Jrw " ms Tfn·t r'" !zrl).l) " mj R' s('r~sn sw r dW3.t 26 mj w(" nm nn (n) wnw. wt These gods in this form: It is when they are in the upper part of the lower Duat th at their heads exist as discs, when this Great God travels in his disc, entering the land of his mother, as the ba of the Two Who are Unired,soo after his arrival at the mysterious canals. this Great God having been lifted by those who are in the canals, upon th eir arms. The night-barque and the day-barque, they traverse Nut behind him, they having traveled together with the barque's crew. The seven gods therein render praise on behalf of his disc, in order for him to travel to the eastern horizon of the sky. They are the hours of the night and the hours of the day, in the sky and in the Dual, beneath the gods. from whom the dead do not rise in order to cause a division of the hours, when th e god emerges as the ba of a sun-shade, one who is powerful, possessing the aspect of a ram lOl in the belly of his mother. 1IOl when the bas of the sun-shades, they receive him.

792. After Manassa 2007, 598. 793. Substituting ".,,-. for t==J (noted already in Maspero 1914- 39, 1:239). Perhaps the result of a si mple confusion ofJow, flat signs (§3.5), this substitution also recalls the watery nature of the Egyptian sky (see, e.g., J. Allen 1988,4-7), which might suggest a del iberate, semicryptic orthography. 794. After Manassa 2007, 59B. 795. Manassa 2007, 600 b, suggests that sgsgs represents an otherwise unattested causative of gsgs, "to overrun" (Wb V, 207.8-9). However, a causative verb sgsgs, derived from gsgs, "to organize, rule" (Wb V, 207.1-6, said of [h e sun god) is attested at Edfu (IV 92,5-6), with the meaning "to make a division," specifically with reference to the hours, as in the present text (P. Wilson 1997, 946). 796. With superfluous medial n, inRuenced perhaps by the geminate o rthography of the verb wnn. 797. The strokes following sfhave been in terpreted as superfluous; cf. Manassa 2007, 400, who transliterates sfy, for which see n. 801 , below. 798. Probably for m (substituting for ..::::::=: ), as in Wb IV, 530.18, ssp m, "receive from a place"; thus, also r dwJ.(, in col. 25. 799. Wri tten m (§3.23 1). BOO. See discussion of bl-dm1}, «ba of the united one," as an epithet of Re-Osiris, in Assmann 1969, 103 with additional references at n. 70; Horn ung 1975-76,2:99, or. 16. 801. Lit., "he being ram-headed" (Wb. IV, 456.9-14). Although the word lacks the expected ram's head terminative, the nocturnal setting of the passage corresponds well with the translation offered here. Also cf. Manassa 2007, 401, who renders sfy as "awesome," apparemly deriving an adjectival predica[e from the substantive Ifj.t, "majesty:' for which cf. especially Wb. IV, 458.27 (stun siIt, "powerful of majesty," o r the like). 802. Not "Nut," comra Manassa 2007, 40 1 (but note the correct transliteration on p. 400)

446

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

The upper sky, it draws near to the Duat,8lJJ The Great Elder Gods, they receive the Osiris, the overseer of fields, this Tjahorpta, justified, whom Tefnut bore, from the upper sky like Re, so that they might cause him to ascend to the Duat, like one of these hours.

Text 3""

Tjahorpta Parallels: Cenotaph.3; R6.B.1.2.43 (app. 3, plate 1)

nlr pn m sIJr 2 pn I;r psI}. n 3 ;kr st; /:ltp(.w) m , wj;·f jmj dw;.t , I}.wj.j b;. wt st;, . w(t) m wnw. wt , kkwj dj(4'r /:lddw" " m !.B.t ;!J.tj , (q.jmjtn " I;;y.j I.B. wt 11 S/;. well ntr pn wr. wj 12 sw ~r Jkr 51, 13 ntr. w wr. w J:tr rjwj 14 ntr pn m 15 WjJ=/ m n('=sn 16 m wjJzc/ s;s·sn " tp-t; r ;!J.t) m (ql, f dwJ./ mjmnt.t m s; Wsjr " snty T;j-Hr-p(;)-t; nb jm;!J 1

This god in this form, upon the back of mysterious Aker, where he rests in his barque: The one who is in the Duat, he calls to the mysterious corpses during807 the hours of darkness, he placing light within the corpse of the Horizon-dweller, and entering into the disc, so that he might illuminate the mysterious corpses. This god, so great is he upon mysterious Aker, where the Great Gods are calling to this god in his barque, while they travel in his barque,

803. After Hornung 1972,432 ("die Himmel nahert sich cler Oat"); thus also Manassa 2007. 401 (" Heaven approaches the Unde· rwodd"). This apparently intransitive use of the s(;Yr, "cause to ascend" (Wb N, 32-33) is unexpected, but the alternative-taking nIr.w wr. W (J . was the direct object (Le., *"The upper sky causes that the Great Elder Gods ascen d to the Duat")-would violate basic Egyptian word order by plaCing the adverbial phrase r dWJ.t before the direct object. 804. Omitted from Maspero 1914-39; first published in Manassa 2007, 388-90 and plate 28ta. I collated the text in the summer of 2008. 805. Parallel text RG.B.l .2.43, col. 7, writes ~. Cf. Manassa 2007, 389, who interprets dj as a participle, translating "one who casts" (note that the expected form of the participle would be dd, as opposed to dJ)' 806. The shining disc that precedes m in the fo llowing column determines ~r,jr,jw. 807. Li t., "i n" of time; see GEG3, 124, § 162.2).

em

THE TEXTS

447

crossing overland to the Horizon-dweller, as he enters the Duat in the West, as the protection of the Osiris, the economic minister,8OS Tjahorpta, possessor of veneration.

§6, I 8 SARCOPHAGI INSCRIBED ON THE MODEL OF RAMESSES III The scenes and texts from the sarcophagi inscribed on the model of Ramesses III are widely attested and exhibit a high degree of uniformity,"" Because the texts of the Late period "Type ]"'" sarcophagi adhere so closely to a common template, a single, well-preserved version (Djedhor 1, CG 29302)811 has been chosen as a representative example for the purposes of translation. 812

Text 1813

Sarcophagus 10

9

8

7

808. Thus, Manassa 2007, 390. 809. See Manassa 2007, 14; von Bergmann 1885; Hornung 1990b, 120~22. For the Ramesses III sarcophagus template, an outline of sources, see ch. 2, §2.7, above. 810. DeSignation after Manassa 2007,13-66. Bll. Maspero 1914- 39, 1:73-86. All texts collated by the present author in March 2004 and Summer 200B. This exemp1ar has the advantage of being essentially complete, as well as free from excessive scribal error (cf., for example, the badly jumbled text of the dwarf Djedhor in Maspero 1914-39,2:9- 10). B12. For variations among the numerous additional Late period exemplars, see the comprehensive treatment in Manassa 2007, plates 1-40. From the present volume, the interlinear transcription of parallel sources provided in app. 3 only includes texts with parallels from the primary Book of the Earth corpus, as defined in ch. 1, § 1. 4. B13. Text Ranking either side of scene 26, in the same position occupied by the otherwise unrelated text R6.B.3.26.60-23 in the tomb of Ramesses VI. See Maspero 1914-39, 1:7B-79; Mysliwiec 19B1, 100--103; Hornung 1990b, 125- 26 (primarily Ramesses IV); Darnell 2004, 151- 59 (primarily Ramesses IV; including many points contra the interpretations of Mysliwiec); Manassa 2007, 5B-62, and plates

37-40,

448

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

8 14

I

nn n ntr. w m sor (p)n mI). w k;rj 2 Wsjr ('.t. jmn.r 1S /:l;p(.tt 6 sar. W B17 3jwt / IS rn 8\9 jmy. \1't

ntr pn m s!Jr pn 4 SI.(W)1 R' 'q(.w) m /:I3.I·f sJ:trj 5 kkw /:Ir lb. tj4 ssm .113 I;r rd. wj,4 b3·j'q41j1w R' ntr pn m s!Jr pn (r) wnw. ( W 7R' 'q'w m /:13. I·f m J:z'. w4 s3w"',fwnw. wI 'q. w(/) m kkw /:Ir ,Ib.tjen'f j'r·tj4 S33·sn 10 sw r t/.I ni}!} Wsjr N. These gods in this form, (namely) the ones who fill"" the shrine of Osiris, the Hidden Chamber, which conceals the forms and which has no name for that which is inside. This god in this form, the ray(s) of Re having entered into his corpse, the darkness having been illuminated beneath his sandals, with the mysterious image beneath his feet: His ba, it enters after Re. This god in this form (at the appointed) hour:" Re having entered into his own corpse,825 while guarding the hours that enter into the darkness beneath his sandals: 826 His two uraei, they guard him for all time, (namely) the Osiris N

814. The sign ~ ,omitted in Manassa 2007, plate 37, CG 29302 as well as 29307, is present on both sarcophagi (cf. the photographs in plates 32 and 34), The Late period sarcophagi consistently omit the initial p of the demonstrative, the full writing of which only appears in the versions of Ramesses III and Ramesses IV (Hornung 1990b, 126, Of. 3; also see von Bergmann 1885, 141). Darnell 2004, 154, suggests that an omitted p following plural strokes might represent a confusion of the former sign for the latter. 815. The man with pouring vessel replaces the seated "hiding man" ~ (shape/class substitutions). 816. Not slpp, contra Manassa 2007, 58. The sign that Manassa takes for an initial bolt-s only appears on CG 29307 and is almost certainly a graphic error for the book roll determinative of the preceding wordjmn.l, as attested in four of the six examples, including CG 29302, shown above. 817. Substituting!&' for @ (phonetic change; §3.3.1). 818. Substituting ~ for ~ (class substitution; §3.7.2). 819. Substituting ~ for ~ in all versions, except that of Ramesses rv, which writes 171 (Hornung 1990b, 126, Of. 3; also see Manassa 2007,58-59 b). 820. Maspero 1914- 39, t :78, incorrectly inserts the twO columns of captions, which label the figures in scene 26 (sarcophagus caprion la-b), at this point. 821. Or, substituting ~ for ~ (class substitution; §3.7.2) and readingsJJ, as in col. 9. For the apparent treatment of3ae-inf. H(W) as a 2ae-gem. root in the present corpus, see §3.6.3. 822. For this spelling, see §3.3.1. 823. Following Hornung 1990b, 125. The act of "filling" refers, presumably, to the two small, standing figures, which pour water OntO the larger mummiform figures beneath them. Cf. Darnell 2004, 153 (followed by Manassa 2007, 58 a), who translates mI}. was "watchers." 824. Following Darnell 2004, \56, who translates, "at the (appropriate) hour," apparently understanding an omitted preposition m, r, or IJr (for this idiom, see Wb l, 316.5). Hornung 1990b, 125, takes wnw.t with the following word, translating "Die Stunden des Re." The latter suggestion makes less sense contextually, given what follows. 825. Following Darnell 2004, 156 (for this usc of mlr /Jr. w, see Wb III, 38.19-24); cr. Hornung 1990b, 125, who takes hr. w in its basic meaning as "limbs," translating, "in seine Glieder." 826. A similar description of the hours occurs in scene 26, Ramesses VI, caption 1: wnw. wt rp(. wt) kkwj tb(.t), "The hours, which cross the darkness beneath the sandal."

or

p

449

THE TEXTS

Sarcophagus Parallels: R7.A.2.12.5; R9.A.2.12.2 (app. 3, plates 25-26)

2BlnnA9

n~0jQ]9 JIl"W~~~~~o~ 0

~ ~ =->"

00

1

~

. '"

,,

., I -

•

•

t .....

I

'

If·

1(.

j ~

.

'

.

~

- .

~

,t , I,

'v"

•

~

"I :"

~

Plate 29b. Mutirdis, continued (after Assmann 1977, pI. 27). Scene 55.

, . -,

- -.,

.~fl--

. -.:~ I

....

'

..

...

~iI

~

500

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OFTHE EARTH

Plate 30. TT197, Padineith, unnumbered chamber, rear wall, left. Scene 5.

APPENDIX 2

Plate 31. Padineith, unnumbered chamber, left wall.

501

502

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

Plate 32. Padineith, unnumbered chamber, left wall, conclusion. Scene 22 .

•

) J~ I;

-- -1

•

.. r:.

11• '-'''''"

~

J.

1 1f ) - 1'_~1 J.

'7".

...

-II

UI·~

- '"""-«.'" J,

APPENDIX 2

503

Plate 33. Lepsius 23 (Saqqara), Horira'a, Chamber A, west wall (after Lepsius, 1842-45, part 3, 280c).

M

504

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

Plate 34a. Cartonnage pectoral, Dynasty 28 (after Quibell1898, pl. 28), including scene 19 (top, right) plus miscellaneous Book of the Dead and other,mythological scenes.

.

Plate 34b. Pectoral detail, top right.

505

APPENDlX2

Plate 35. Sarcophagus of Nakhtnehef (Berlin 7; after Diimichen 1984-94, pI. 27). Scenes 5 and 6 .

:®~. Ul

~

U

~tl

nm """" -"

~

~~ ~ Am == "'= =* ~

~

000

~

-=>

""""" """""

0 ~

~ -=



--'" oo~

f=='I

::( m~l~

)/. It- \-

C'J


II 9

?"P

--o

0

_

~~ ~~ ~

--

1t -,-

==-

-;-;"';

III

~

~

J!

0

000 e tc.

-

----;-::~;;::-;;;; . . 2. Secon d gilded shnne, an notation to scene 7 , after Darnell 2004 ,p.I 7A-, for a detai Ied com panson 0 f t he three texts, see Roberson 2007, 105- 7.

514

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

Plate 4. M.B.l.22.1- 3; T.B.1.22.1-3; RJ.B.l.22.4-6. R3.6

R3. 5

R3.4

1'.3

1'.2

1'.1

-1-

- 1-

-1-

-1-

-1-

-1-

I I I

r

1~

fur = fur-

==

=-

I I I

~

~

~

=""=

=L...c..

~

=""=

=

=""=

I I I .

L...c..

L...c..

eJl eJl

=""=

=

~

=""=

-. - 2-

, •

M.3

M.2

M. I

-1-

-1-

u

-I-

-=

fur =-

~ r- = 1~ = ~ r== ~

~

=

~

L...c..

eJl

~

L...c..

=""=

=""= =""= = = = =""= =""= =""= . -. -. -. =""=

=

~

~

~

- 2-

~

- 2-

-.

-2-

* * * eJl * * * -,-* eJl eJl ~ n* 6l* * eJl *-,- eJl* *[=1 eJl -,* 6l* *M ~ M -~. ~ ~ -M. ~-,- ~ 0 L:J

-Iii 0

L:J

0 L:J

0 L:J

0 L:J

0

LJ

0 L:J

- 2-

-2-

=""=

=""= ~

0

I ==:::::.

=""= ~

~

~

=""=

0

I

~

0

I

~

~

=""= ~

?~

I

0

=""= ~

0

I

~

=""= ~ - 4-

0

I

0

I

d

==:::::.

~

==:::::.

==:::::.

~

==:::::.

C:,.

C:,.



Ll

C:,.

C:,.



Ll

C:,.

-4-

C:,.

Ll

~

-,-

00

@?o

~

~

end.

~

~

-0 . -4-

0

I 'C:7 end.

-,-

-4-

0 1 - -. - -. ~

* - ---. I I I

-ll-

=o

I I I

=-.I I I

1&

9

-,-

I I I

c> LJ

~

-

~ ~

--. III

---.

I I I

-

I I I

*

~

Ao ~

*

f\...

I I I

o

00

0

9

I I I

~

--.

II.......,.

~

-

- -

~

I I I

o

-17-

I I I

=""= I I I

~ ~ [ I I I I I I --. --.

-10-

I I I

f\...

--

=""= I I I

.aJ>o

-1 4-

-19-

I I I

~

~

---. ---. -16-

~



I I I

~

-2-

o --. 0 --.

c:"

roJ

I I I

-2-

~

~

0

=.

9

I I I

I

-o -=0

=

III?'

* * !~

00

s11

~

-=dJ

~ ~ --. --. O~ 00



-.- V -- -. -- -. ~

I

- -"'i

I I I

APPENDIX 3

519

Plate 9. R6.B.1.38.45, cols. 21-24; R6.B.2.19.53; R9.B.2.19.7-8.'

-,-

R9.8

R9.7

0 0 4-1

~~f- ~~f-I ~

4-1

w - 5-

U

4-1 I!.

~~f-

1 1'

f:;;:t 1110 0

=

lIlu LJ

f'....

~ ['".

~ ~ =""= ~

'if

III

I I I

=~ =~ 00 00 - 5-

~

~

,....... rt~ Q IL-.. -.A-.

1110

-15-

[il

H -= --

~

-=="

~ -. I I I

-

I I I

- 10-

-.A.... 0

II

J

0

-- . I I I

=.

nih

0

-- . -. 0 -- . -==" I I I

- 11-

~

="'11 0

I I I

~~

-1 2-

o

0

0

I}tl

%

=

~

00 I:\..

-. I:\..

~

-,=" =

I I I

=

o f)

0

I I I

=

Lto

532

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

Plate 22. R6.B2.2.10.80; Tjahorpta.2, cols. 3-21 (conclusion). Tj

R6

I I I

I I I

l\\\

lIt

0

~

-

I I I -,0-

R15

Tj

-lS-

0

~ 0 I I I

---16-

L...t

~ ,...... I I I -16-

+~ 4f+ ~~ 4f~ - 17-

=1 =1 ~

I I I

~

=-

-17-

1-

00

=~ = -

I I I

1-

0

.-....II

~ ~

0

~

~ - 18-

"'-

--- --11 -

* '1I 0

L:J

I I I

~

I I I ~

.-....II

=""= -22-

!~ tJh

-J'1 -

*

~~

* C>

LJ

~

--

I I I

L:J



"'-

~

'1~ ~ == ==::. ~ ~ -lS-

119>

ffiJ rol

'f

I

-1 9-

-1"0

0

I

I

dl

I I I - ,0-

!~

L:J -13-

!

f

~ = "'=I I ~ ~ e-=

0

~ -,9-

I I I 4J>

"'=-

N.

I I I

~ I

~IC.

0

I

I

~ I I I I

'f

0

APPEN DIX 3

533

P late 23. R7.A.1.29.1; R9.B.1.29.6.' R9

R7

~~

----- ---l ""==' =""= I I I

~

I I I

I I I

~

~

119

fufu

-12-

~F

1!71!7

~~

~

=""=

.p-

-Oco

-

000

1119

fufu I I I

.

,

R9

Do

:=:::,

R7

~ 0 0

:=:::,

--.- ~ - 0 0

[',.

f\...

f\...

: =:::,

: =:::,

de

Il.........

9 =""=

- I I I o o

=
-

--

..,=s?

4-F

~

-,-

11 0

~

~~

LJ

LJ

-==1'

-==1'

f\...

:=:::,

~

=0

000

:=:::,

= Co

- o-

-13-

Hfl /9

=""= I I I

111 0

4-F

I 0

~

Il.........

00

=

--=""= ~

--

000

~

-

-1 4-

;:~

~ 11 0

11 0

..,=s?

4:L Il.........

el

Il.........

~

-,-

I I I

'C7

~ ~

0 tl(,

-11-

~

~F

- -o :=:::,

@

:=:::,

000

=""= I I I

:=:::,

:=:::,

=""=

Il.........

el

Il.........

~

-,-

I I I

.

g0 ~ -

Jr

---,-

-=""

-

•- -

~nd.

"=-

o%i

= -@

;

~

, W 0

= : -Ii -

-,-

Pa.l!o--

'ra ~ ~

~

~

~

~

"""'=

=""=

~

="'=

-0.

~ 0 -=""

-,-

'=='

~F

~ ~

""""

'% 111

J) 0

"=-

= ~ "== -. ~

~

L.-.

,

-=""

( ) I!. ~

"=-

o@

= tIC,

ttc.

t=

t=

"""'=

="'=

=::>

~

J

-,-

~=

Ii

-,-

~0 ~

-,-

~

fl

J

-,-

lit

"':~

="'=

r~ ~ 6 :=:::>. L.-. ~ 0 0 ~ ~ 4f ~ !..F ~

~

"=-

~ ~ ~

-,J~

~~ ~

0

~

,

-=""

L.-.

t:'... 0 0

o

~

ft

J'l

w0

BIBLIOGRAPHY Abitz, Friedrich. 1974. Die religiose Bedeutung der sogenannten Grabrduberschdchte in den agyptischen Ko'nigsgrdbern der 18. bis 20. Dynastie. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. 1986. Ramses lll. In den Grdbern seiner SiJhne. Freiburg; Gottingen: Universic;itsverlag; Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht. 1989a. "Die Entwicklung def Grabachsen in den Konigsgrabern im Tal def Konige." MDAlK 45, 1- 25. 1989b. "Die Veranderung von Schreibformen im Konigsgrab Ramses' IX." In Miscellanea Aegyptologica: Wolfgang Heick zum 75. Gehurtstag, ed. Hartwig Altenmliller and Renate Germer (Hamburg: Archaologisches Institur def Universitat

Hamburg), 1-5. 1989c. Baugeschichte und Dekoration des Grabes Ramses' V7. OBO 89. Freiburg: Universitatsverlag. - - - . 1990. "Der Bauablauf und die Dekorarion des Grabes Ramses' IX." SAKI7, 1-40. - - -. 1992. "The Structure of the Decoration in the Tomb of Ramesses IX." In After Turankhamim: Research and Excavations in the Royal Necropolis at Thebes, ed. C. N. Reeves (london: Kegan Paul), 165- 85. - - -.1995. Pharao als Gott in den Unterweltsbuchern des Neuen Reiches. OBO 146. Freiburg: Universitatsvedag. Abt, Theodore and Erik Hornung. 2003. Knowledge for the Afterlife. lhe Egyptian Amduat- A Quest for Immortality. Zurich: living Human Heritage. Abubakr, Abdel-Moneim. 1937. Untersuchungen uber die dgyptischen Kronen. Gli..ickstadt: Augustin. Aldred, Cyril. 1976. "The Horizon of the Aten." JEA 62, 184. Allen, James. 1976. "The Funerary Texts of King Wahkare Akhtoy on a Middle Kingdom Coffin." In Studies in Honor of George R. Hughes, ed. Janet H. Johnson and Edward F. Wente (SAOC 39; Chicago: The Oriental Institute of the University of Chicago), 1- 29. - - -. 1984. The Injlection ofthe Verb in the Pyramid Texts. Malibu: Vodena. 1986. "Tense in Classical Egyptian." In Essays on Egyptian Grammar, ed. William Kelly Simpson (Yale Egyptological Studies 1; New Haven: Yale University Press), 1-21. 1988. Genesis in Egypt: The Philosophy of Ancient Egyptian Creation Accounts. Yale Egyptological Studies 2. New Haven: Yale University Press. - - - . 1989. "The Cosmology of the Pyramid Texts." In Religion and Philosophy in Ancient Egypt, ed. William Kelly Simpson (Yale Egyptological Studies 3. New Haven: Yale University Press), 1- 28. - - -. 1991. "Form, function and meaning in the early Egyptian verb." LingAeg 1, 1-32. - -- . 1994. "Reading a Pyramid." In Hommages ajean Leclant, vol. 1, ed. Catherine Berger, Gisde Clerc, and Nicolas Grimal (Caiw, IFAO), 5- 28. - - -. 2003. "The Egyptian Conception of the World." In Mysterious Lands, ed. David O'Connor and Stephen Quirke (London: University College), 23- 30. - - -. 2006a. lhe Ancient Egyptian Pyramid Texts. WAW 23. Atlanta: Society of Biblical Literature. - - -. 2006b. "Some Aspects of the Non- Royal Afterlife in rhe Old Kingdom." In The Old Kingdom Art andArchaeowgy, ed. M. Ba.rta (Prague: Czech Institute), 9-1 7 . AJJen, Thomas George. 1956. Review of La Creation du Disque Solaire, by Alexandre Piankoff. jNES l4 , 275. - - -. 1974. lhe Book ofthe Dead or Going Forth by Day: Ideas ofthe Ancient Egyptians concerning the Hereafter as Expressed in lheir own Ti:nns. SAOS 37. Chicago: The Oriental Institute of the University of Chicago. AJrenmti ller, Brigitte. 1975. Synkretismus in den Sargtexten. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Altenmi..iller, Hartwig. 1965. "Die Apotropaia und die Gorrer Mittelagyptens . Eine typologische und religionsgeschichtliche Untersuchung der sog. ,Zaubermesser' des Mittleren Reichs." 2 vols. Ph.D. dissertation, Ludwig-Maximillians-Universitat zu Mtinchen . 1968. "Zur Dberlieferung des Amduat." JEOL 20, 27- 42. 1972. Die Texte zum Begrdbnisritual in den Pyramiden des Alten Reiches Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. 1983. "Das Grab der Konigin Tausret im Tal der Konige von Theben." SAKIO, 1- 24. 1985. "Das Grab der Konigin Tausret (KV 14) Bericht tiber eine archaologische Unternehmung." GM84, 7-17.

541

542

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

- - - . 1992. "Bemerkungen zu den neu gefundcn Datcn im Grab dec Konigin Twosre (KV 14) im Tal dec Koni ge von Theben." In After Turankhamim: Research and Excavatiom in the Royal Necropolis at Thebes, ed. C. N. Reeves (london: Kegan Paul), 141-64. ---.2004. "Oer Konvoi dec Sonnenschiffe in den Pyramidemexten." SAK32, 11-33. ARCE conservation projecr brochure. May 13, 2004. "Conservation of the Sarcophagus ofRamesses VI in the Valley of [he Kings." Arnold. Dieter. 1997. "The Late Period tombs of Hor-Khebit, Wennefer, and Wcreshnefer at Saqqara." In Etudes sur f'Ancien Empire et la necropofnu Saqqara, ed. Catherine Berger and Bernard Mathieu (Monrpellicr: Universite Paul Valery), 31-54. - - -. 2003. The Encyclopedia ofAncient Egyptian Architecture, translated from the German by Sabine H. Gardiner and Helen Strudwick. Cairo: American University in Cairo. Arnold. Dieter and Erik Hornung. 1980. "Ko nigsgrab." In Lexikon d(r Agyptologie, vol. 3, ed. Wolfgang H eick and Wolfhart Westendorf(Wiesbaden: Harassowitz}, cols. 496-514. Assmann. Jan. 1969. Liturgische Lieder an den Sonnengott. Untersuchungen zur altligyptischen Hymnik, I. Berlin: Bruno Hessling. - - - . 1970. Der Konig als Sonnenpriester. £in kosmographischer Begltit/ext zur kultischen Sonnenhymnik in thebanischen Tempeln und Grdbern. Gluckstadt: Augustin. - - - . 1975. Zeit und Ewigkeit im Alten A'gypun. Heidelberg: Winter. - - - . 1977. Das Crab der MutirdiJ. Grabung im Asasif 6. Mainz: von Zabern. - - - . 1979. "Primat und Transzendenz. Stru ktur und Genese den agyptischen Vorstellungen eines 'H ochsren Wesens· ... ln Aspekte derSpdtdgyptischen Religion. ed. Wolfhart Westendorf (Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz), 7-42. - - - . 1979. "Harfnerlied und Horussohne."J£4 65, 54-77. 1980. "Horizont." In Lexikon der A'gyptologie, vol. 3. ed. Wolfgang Heick and Wolfhart Westendorf (Wiesbaden: Harassowitz). cols. 3-7. 1989. "Death and Initiation in Ancient Egypt." In Religion and Philosophy in Ancient Egypt, ed. William Kelly Simpson (YES 3. New Haven: Yale University Press). 135-59. - -- . 1995. Egyptian Solar Religion in the New Kingdom. Re, Amun and the Crisis ofPolytheism, rranslated from the German by Anthony Alcock. London: Kegan Paul. - - - . 2003. "The Ramesside Tomb and the Construction of Sacred Space." In The Theban Necropolis: Past, Present and future, ed. Nigel Strudwick and John H. Taylor (London: The Bridsh Museum) , 46-52. - - - . 2004. "Die Konsuuktion sakraJen Raums in der Grabarchitektu r des Neuen Reichs." ARg 6, 1- 18. Backes, Burkhard. 2005. Das altdgyptische »Zweiwegbuch«. Studien zu den Sargtext-SprUchen 1029-1130. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Badawy. Alexander. 195~8). A History of Egyptian Architecture. 3 vols . Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California. - - -. 1966. Architecture in Ancient Egypt and the Near tast. Cambridge: MIT. Bailey, Donald M. 2007. "A Snake-Legged Dionysos from Egypt. and Other Divine Snakes." JEA 93. 263-70. Baines, John. 1976. "Temple Symbolism." RAIN 15, 10-15. - - - . 1982. "'Interpreting Sinuhe." JEA 68, 31-44. - --. 1985. Fecundity Figures. Warminster: Aris & Phillips. - - - . 1992, "Merit by Proxy: The Biographies of the Dwarf Djeho and His Parron Tjaihorpta." JEA 78, 241 -57. - - - . 2004. "Modeling Sources, Processes, and Locations of Early Mortuary Texts." In D'un monde l'autre; Textes des Pyramides and Tates des Sarcophages, ed. Susanne Bickel and Bernard Mathieu (Cairo: IFAO), 15--41. Barguet, Paul. 1978. "Remarques sur quelques scenes de la saJle du sarcophage de Ramses VI.'" RdE 30,5 1-56. Barta, Winfried. 1985a. Die Bedeutung der Jemeitsbiicher for den verstorbenen Konig. MAS 42. Munich: Deutscher Kunsrverlag. - --. 1985b. "Das Personalpronomen der wj-Reihe aJs Proklitikon im adverbiellen Nominalsatz." ZAS 112, 94--104. - - - . 1987. "Das Erdbuch oder das Such von der Wiedergeburt aus der Sonnenscheibe." GM98, 7- 9. - - - . 1993. "Zum Gebrauch des Verbums wnn im Alt- und Mirtelagyptischen." GM 132, 13- 18. - - - . 1994. Komparative Untersuchungen zu vi(r Unterweltsbiichern. Frankfurt am Main: Peter Lang. Baumann , Andrew J. 1998. "The Suffix Conjugation of Early Egyptian as Evidenced in the Underworld Books." Ph.D. dissertation, University of Chicago. Beaux, Nathalie. 1991. "Ennemis Etrangers et Malfaiteurs Egypticns. La Signification du Chatimenr au Pilori." BIFAO 91, 6-53. Bcinlich-Seebcr, Christine. 1998. "Ein romerzeidiches Sargfragment in Marseille." In Ein dgyptisches Glosperlenspiel: dgyptologische Beitriige for Erik Hornung am seinem Schulerkreis, ed. Andreas Brodbeck (Berlin: Gebr. Mann) , 9-40. Bell, Lanny. 1985. ''Aspects of the Cult of the Deified Tutankhamun ." In Melanges Carnal Eddin Mokhtar, vol. I , ed. Paule Posener Krieger (Cairo, IFAO, 1985),31-59. Bell, Martha. 1990. "An armchair excavation of KV 55." JARCE27. 97-137. Berger-el Naggar, Catherine. 2004. "Des Textes des Pyramides sur papyrus dans les archives du temple funeraire de Pepy ler." In D'un monde a l'autre; Textes des Pyramides and Textes des Sarcophages, ed. Susanne Bickel and Bernard Mathieu (Cairo: IFAO), 85-90.

a

BIBLIOGRAPHY

543

von Bergmann, E. 1885. "oer Sarkophag des Nesschutafnut in dec Sammlung Agyptischer Alterthiimer des osrerr. Kaiserhauses," Rtc. Trav.6, 131-65. Bcrlandini, Jocelyne. 1993. ":L 'acephate' et Ie fiwel de reviriIisatjon." OMRO 73, 29-41 . Ben, Hans Dieter, ed. 1992. ]he Gruk Magical Papyri in Translation Inciuding the Demotic Spells. Vol. 1: Texts. 2nd ed. Chicago: University of Chicago. Bianchi, R.S. 1982. "Petamenoph is." In Lexikon der Agyptologie, vol. 4, ed. Wolfgang H elck and Wolfhart Westendorf(Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz)' cols. 991-992. Bietak, Manfred. 1985. "Stratigraphie und Seriation. Arbeiten zue Erschliessung def rdativen Chronologie in Agyprcn." In Leb~

endige Altertumswissemchaft. Festgabe zur Vollendung des 70. Lebensjahres von Hermann ~tters, dargebracht von Freunden, Schiilern, undKollegen, ed. Manfred Kandler (Vienna: Adolf Holzhausens), 5-9. Billing, N ils. 2002. Nut: The Goddess of Lift in Hxt and Iconography. Uppsala Studies in Egyptology 5. Uppsala: Akademitryck AB. von Bissing, Friedrich Wilhelm. 1938. "Das Grab des Petamenophis in Theben ." zifS 74, 2-26. Bleeker, c.J. 1958. "Isis and Nephthys as Wai ling Women." Numen 511, 1-17. - - . 1973. Hathor and 1hoth: Two Key Figures of the Ancient Egyptian Religion. Leiden: Brill. Bleiberg, Edward. 2004. ''' East is Easr and West is West': A Nore on Coffin Decoration at Assyut." In Egypt, Israel, and the Medit~rraman World: Studies in Honoro/Donald B. Redford, ed. G. N. Knopers and A. H irsch (Leiden: Brill), 113--20. Bochi, Patricia. 1994. "Images of Time in Ancient Egyptian Art." lARCE 3 1, 55--62. Bonner, Hans. 1917. Die Agyptische Tracht bis zum Ende des Neuen Reiches. Leipzig: H inrichs . Borchardr, Ludwig. 1910-13. Das Grabdmkmal des KO'nigs srasf}u-Rtf, 2 vols. Leipzig: H inrichs. Borghouts, J. F. 1971. 1he Magical Texts of Papyrw Leiden 1348. Leiden: Brill. - - - , 1978. Ancient Egyptian Magical Hxts. N isaba 9. Leiden: Brill. - - - , 1986. "Promi nence Constructions and Pragmatic Functions." In Crossroad· Chaos or the Beginning 0/a New Paradigm, ed. Gertie Englund and PaulJohn Frandsen (Copenhagen : CNl) , 45-70.

- - - . 1994. ''jnk mr(;)=j. An Elusive Pattern in Middle Egyptian," LingAeg4, 13-34. Bourriau, Janine. 1991. "Patterns of Change in Burial Customs during the Middle Kingdom." In Middle Kingdom Studies, ed . Stephen Quirke (New Malden, Surrey' SIA), 3-20. Boylan, Patrick. 1922. Thoth, the Hennes o/Egypt. Repr. Chicago: Ares, 1979. Brand, Peter J. 2000. 1he Monuments o/Seti 1. Leiden: Brill. Brewer, Douglas J. and Renee F. Friedman. 1989. Fish and Fishing in Ancient hgypt. Warminster: Aris & Phillips. Brock, Edwin C. 1992. "The Tomb ofMerneptah and Its Sarcophagi." In After Tu~ankhamun: Research and Excavations in the Royal Necropolis at Thebes, ed. C. N. Reeves (Lon don : Kegan Paul), 122-40 . - - - . 1995. "The Clearance of rhe Tomb of Ramesses VI !." In Valley o/the Sun Kings: New Explorations in the Tombs o/the Pharaohs, ed. Richard H . W ilkinson (Tucson , AZ: Un iversity of Ariwna Egyptian Expedition). 47--67. Brovarski, Edward. 1973. "An Unpublished Stela of the First Intermediate Period in the Oriental M useum." lNES 32,459-65. ---.198 1. ''Ahanakht of Bersheh and [he Hare Nome in the First Intermediate Period and Middle Kingdom." In Studies in Ancient Egypt, the Aegean, and the Sudan. Essays in Honor 0/Dows Dunham, ed . William Kelly Simpson and W hitney M. Davis (Boston: Museum afFine ArtS), 14-30. - - - , 1984a. "Sarkophag." In Lexikon der Agyptologie, vol. 5, ed. Wolfgang H eick and Wolfhart Westendorf (Wiesbaden: Hatassawitz), cols. 471-485. - - - . 1984b. "Sobek." In Lexikon der ;fgyptologie, vol. 5, ed. Wolfgang Heick and Wolfhart Westendorf (Wiesbaden: HarassawiC'), cols. 995- 103l. - - - . 1985. "Akhmim in (he Old Kingdom and First Intermediate Period." In Melanges Gamal Eddin Mokhtar, ed. Paule Posener-Krieger (Cairo: IFAO), 117-53. - - - . 1994a. "Abydos in the Old Kingdom and First In termediate Period, Part I." In Hommages alean Lec!am, vol . 1, ed. Carherine Berger, Gisele Clerc. and Nicolas Grimal (Cairo: IFAO), 99-121. - - - , 1994h. "Ahydos in the Old Kingdom and First Intermediate Period, Part II ." In For His Ka: Essays Offired in Memory 0/ K!aus Baer, ed. David P. Silverman (SAOC 55. Ch icago: The Oriental Institute of the Un iversity of Ch icago), 15-44. - - - , 1999. "Inventory Offering lists and the Nomenclature for Boxes and C hests in rhe Old Kingdom." In Gold o/Praise: Studies on Ancient Egypt in Honor o/Edward F ~nte, ed. Emi ly Teeter and John A. Larson (SAGC 58; Chicago: lhe Oriental Insrirme of the University of Chicago), 27-54. Brovarski, Edward, Rita E. Freed, Olaf Kaper, Jean-Louis Lachevre, Melissa Robinson, David Silverman, Rene van Walsem, and Harco Willems. 1992. Bersheh Reports 1. Boscon: Museum of Fine Arts. Brunner, Hellmut. 1964. Die Geburt des Cottkonigs. Studien zur Oberlieftrung eines altiigyptischen Mythos. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.

544

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

- -- . 1970. "Die Sonnenbahn in agyptischen Tempeln." In Archaologie und altes Testament: Festschrift for Kurt Galling zum 8. Jan 1970, ed. ArnulfKuschke and Ernst Kutsch (Tilbingen: Mohr), 27-34. Brunner-Traut, Emma. 1965. "Spiczmaus und Ichneumon als Tiere des Sonnengottes." NAWG 7, 123- 63. - -- , 1977. "Gesten." In Lexikon deT Agyptolugie, vol. 2, ed. Wolfgang Heick and Wolfhart Westendorf (Wiesbaden: Harassowitz), cols. 573- 585. - - -, 1980. "Ichneumon," In Lexikon deT Agyptologie, vol. 3, ed. Wolfgang Heick and Wolfharr Westendorf (Wiesbaden: Harassawin), eols. 122-123. Bryan, Betsy M. 1996. "The Disjunction of Text and Image in Egyptian Art." In Studies in Honor o/William Kelly Simpson, vol. I, ed. Peter Der Manuelian (Boston: Museum of Fine Arts), 161 - 68. Budge, Sir E.A.Wallis. 1905. lhe Egyptian Heaven and Hell. 3 vols. London: Kegan Paul. Buongarwne, Roberto. 1998. "Une nuovo versione del Libro della Terra." VO 11, 43- 52. Burkert, Walter. 1985. Greek Religion, translated from the German by John Raffan. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. Burton, Henry. 1916. "The late Theodore M . D avis's Excavations at Thebes in 1912- 13." MMA Bulletin 11, 13- 18. Callender, J. 1986. "Discourse and Sentence Structure in Egyptian." In Crossroad: Chaos or the Beginning ofa New Paradigm, ed. Gertie Englund and Paul John Frandsen (Copenhagen: CNI), 71 - 89. Calverly, Amice M., Myrtle F. Broome, and Alan H. Gardiner. 1958. The Temple ofKing Sethos I atAbydos. London; Chicago: Egypt Exploration Society; University of Ch icago Press. Caminos, Ricardo. 1976. "The Recording of Inscriptions and Scenes in Tombs and Temples." In Ancient Egyptian Epigraphy and Pafaeography (New York: Metropolitan Museum of Art) , 1- 25. Capart, Jean. 1926. Thebes: la gloire d'un grand passe. Bruxelles: Vromant. - - - . 1939. "Cuites d'el Kab et Prehistoire." edE27, 213-17. Capart, Jean, A. H. Gardiner, and B. van cler Walle. 1936. "New light on the Ramcsside Tomb Robberies ." JEA 22, 169- 93. Carrier, Claude. 2009. Grands livres funemires de I'Egypte pharaonique. Paris: Cybele. Carter, H oward and Alan H. Gardiner 1917. "The Tomb of Ramesscs IV and the Turin Plan for a Royal Tomb." JEA 4, 130-58. Cauville, Sylvie. 1997. Le temple de Dendara. Les chapelles osiriennes. 2 vols. Dendara X. Cairo: IFAO. - - -. 2001. Dendara. Le fonds hiiroglyphique au temps de Cleopatre. Paris: CybeJe. Cerny, Jaroslav. 1973. The Valley ofthe Kings: fragments d'un manuscrit inacheve. Bibliotheque d'Etude 61. Cairo: I FAO. - --. 1976. Coptic Etymological Dictionary. New York: Cambridge University Press. ChampoUion, Jean- Frans;ois. 1884. Monuments de I'Egypte et de fa Nubie: notices descriptives conformes aux manuscrits autographes rediges sur les lieux. 2 vols. Paris: F. Didot freres . - --. 1986. Lettres et journaux ecrits pendant Ie voyage d'Egypte, ed. H. Hartleben. Paris: Christian Bourgois. Champol!ion-Figeac, Jacques Joseph. 18 11 . Description de l'Egypte. Paris: L'Impr. de J.B . Sajou. Chegodaev, M. A. 1998. "Lest One Be Turned Upside Down." DE 40,67-80. Collier, Mark. 1991 . "Circumstantially Adverbial? The Circumstantial srj.m(.j) / sgm.n(./) reconsidered." In Middle Kingdom Studies, ed. Stephen Quirke (New Malden, Surrey: SlA), 21 - 50. - - -.1992. "Predication and the Circumstantial sgm(=j) / srj.m.n(4)." LingAeg2, 17---65. - - -. 1994. "Grounding, Cognition and Metaphor in the Grammar of Middle Egyptian: The Role of Human Experience in Grammar as an Alternative to the Standard Theory Notion of Paradigmatic Substitution." LingAeg 4, 57- 87. Cooney, John D. 1965. "Pharaoh's Rat." The Bulletin ofthe Cleveland Museum ofArt 52, 100- 105. Copley, Frank O. 1977. Lucretius: The Nature of Things. New York: Norton . Cotterell, B., F. P. Dickson, and J. Kamminga. 1986. "Ancient Egyptian Water-Clocks: A Reappraisal." Journal of Archaeological Science 13, 31 - 50. Crum, Walter E. 1942. "Bricks as Birth-Stool." lEA 28, 69. Cruz-Uribe, Eugene. 2000. "Scripts: an Overview." In The Oxford Encyclopedia ofAncient Egypt, vol. 3, ed. Donald Redford (Oxford: Oxford University Press), 192-98. Darnell, John C. 1995. "Hathor Returns to Medamud." SAK22, 47- 94. - - -. 2002. Theban Desert Road Survey in the Egyptian Western Desert. VoL I: Gebel Tjauti Rock Inscriptions 1-45 and Wadi el- IjOl Rock Inscriptions 1-45. Chicago: The Oriental Institute of the University of Chicago. - -- . 2004. the Enigmatic Netherworld Books o/the Sofar-Osirian Unity: Cryptographic Compositions in the Tombs ofTutankhamun, Ramesses VI and Ramesses IX. OBO 198. Fribourg; Gottingen: Academic Press; Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht. Davies, Nina de Garis and Alan H. Gardiner. 1915. The Tomb ofAmenemhet (no. 82}.london: Egypt Exploration Fund . Davies, Norman de Garis. 1903- 08. the Rock Tombs ofEIAmarna, Parts 1---6. Repr. in 3 vols., London: Egypt Exploration Society, 2004. Daumas, Francois. 1951. "Sur trois representations de Nout a Dendera." ASAE 51, 373-400.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

545

Demaree, R J. 1992. "Royal Riddles," In Village Voices, ed. R.]. Demaree and A. Egberts (Leiden: Center ofNon~Western Studies, Leiden University), 9- 18. Demichelis, Sara. 2004. "Le projct initial de 1a tombe de Ramses IV?" z,4"S 131, 114-33. Depuydt, Leo. 1986. "The Emphatic Nominal Sentence in Egyptian and Coptic." In Crossroad: Chaos or the Beginning of a New Paradigm, ed. Gertie Englund and Paul John Frandsen (Copenhagen: eN!), 91 - 117. - - -,1989. "The ContingemTenses of Egyptian." Orientalia 58, 1-18. Derchain, Philippe. 1975-76. "Perpetuum Mobile." OLP6- 7, 153- 61. van Dijk, Jacobus. 1979- 80. "The Birth of Horus according to the Ebers Papyrus," JEOL 26,10- 25. Dodson, Aidan M. 1986a. "Was the Sarcophagus of Ramesses III Begun for Sethos U?" lEA 75,196--98. - - - . 1986b. ''A Note on the Interior Decoration of the Coffer of the Sarcophagus of Ramesses III, Louvre Dl == N337." DE 5, 35. - - -. 1988. "The Tombs of the Kings of the Early Eighteenth Dynasty at Thebes." ZAS 115, 110- 23. - - - . 1994. "King's Valley Tomb 55 and the Fates of the Amarna Kings." Amarna Letters 3,92-103. Dominicus, Brigitte. 1994. Gesten und Gebarden in Darstellungen des Alten und Mittleren Reiches. Heidelberg: Orientverlag. Doret, Eric. 1980. ''A Note on the Egyptian Construction Noun + s4m.[" jNES 39,37-45. - - -. 1986. The Narrative Verbal System of Old and Middle Egyptian. Geneve: Patrick Cramer. Dorman, Peter F. 1999. "Creation on the Potter's Wheel at the Eastern Hodron of Heaven." In Gold of Praise: Studies on Ancient Egypt in Honor ofEdward F. Wente, ed. Emily Teeter and John A. Larson (SAOC 58. Chicago: The Oriental Institute of the University of Chicago), 83- 100. Drioton, Etienne. 1936. "Les protocoles orncmemaux d'Abydos." &lE2, 1- 20. - - . 1942. "La cryptographie du Papyrus Salt 825." ASAE 41,99- 134. - --. 1953. "Les principes de la cryptographie egyptienne," CRAIBL, 355- 64. Duell, Prentice. 1938. The Mastaba ofMereruka, Part 1. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. Dilmichen, Johannes. 1884- 94. Der Grabpalast des Patuamenap in der thebanischen Nekropolis. 3 vols. Leipzig: Hinrichs. DuQuesne, Terence. 1993. "Re in the Darkness, review ofB. H. Stricker, De Geboorte van Horus." DE 26, 97-105. - --. 1996. ''Anubis Master of Secrets (!:try-sst;) and the Egyptian Conception of Mysteries." DE 36, 25- 38. Dziobek, Eberhard. 1987. "The Architectural Development of Theban Tombs in the Early Eighteenth Dynasty." In Problems and Priorities in Egyptian Archaeology, ed. Jan Assmann, Gilnter Burkard, and Vivian Davies (London: Kegan Paul), 69- 79. - --.1994. Die Graber des Vezirs User- Amun Theben Nr. 6/ und 131. Maim: von Zabern. Ede\, Elmar. 1955- 64. Altdgyptische Grammatik. 2 vols. Rome: Pontificium Institutum Biblicum. - - -. 1959. "Beitrage zur agyptischen Grammatik." US 84, 105-13. Edgerton, William F. 1940. "Egyptian Phonetic Writing from Irs Invention to the Close of the Nineteenth Dynasty." JAOS 60, 473- 506. - - -. 1947. "Stress, Vowel Quantity, and Syllable Division in Egyptian," lNES 6, 1- 17. - - -.1951. "Early Egyptian Dialect Interrelationships." BASOR 122, 9- 12. von Eggebrecht, Arne. 1966. "Zur Bedeutung des Wilrfelhockers." In Festgabe for Dr. Walter Will, ed. S. Lauffer (Koln: Carl Heymanns), 143- 63. Engsheden, Me. 2003. La reconstitution du verbe en egyptien de tradition 400-30 avant ]. - c. Edsbruk: Akademitryck AB. Erman, Adolf 1899. Ausfohrliches Verzeichnis der Aegyptischen Altertii.mer und Gipsabgu.sse. 2nd ed .. Berlin: W Spemann. 1909. Die agyptische Religion. Berlin: Reimer. - - -.1911. "Ein Denkmal memphitischerTheologie." SPAW43, 916--50. - - -. 1933. Neuaegyptische Grammatik. Leipzig: Wilhelm Engelmann. Eyre, Christopher J. 1986. ''Approaches to the Analysis of Egyptian Sentences: Syntax and Pragmat ics." In Crossroad: Chaos or the Beginning ofa New Paradigm, ed. Gertie Englund and Paul John Frandsen (Copenhagen: CNI), 119-43. - - -. 2002. The Cannibal Hymn: A Cultural and Literary Study. Liverpool: University of Liverpool Press. Eschweiler, Peter. 1994. Bildzauber im Alten Agypten. OBO 137. Freiburg: Universitatsverlag. Fairman, H. W 1943. "Notes on the Alphabetic Signs Employed in the Hieroglyphic Inscriptions of the Temple of Edfu." ASAE 43, 193- 318. - - -. 1945. "An Introduction to the Study of Ptolemaic Signs and Their Values," BIFAO 43, 51- 138. Faulkner, Raymond. 1937. "The Bremner-Rhind Papyrus III: The Book of Overthrowing Apep." JEA 23, 166-85. - - -. 1973-78. The Ancient Egyptian Coffin Texts. 3 vols. Warminster: Aris & Phillips. - - -. 1981. ''Abnormal or Cryptic Writings in the Coffin Texts." lEA 67, 173- 74. - -. 1982. ''A Coffin Text Miscellany." JEA 68, 27-30. Favard- Meeks, C. 1992. "Face et profil dans l'iconographie egyptienne." aLP 23, 15- 36.

546

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

Fazzini, Richard . 2002. "Osiris Resurrecting." In lhe Quest for Immortality: Treasures ofAncient Egypt, ed. Erik Hornung and Betsy M. Bryan (Washingron: National Gallery of An), 177. Fechr, Gerhard. 1960. "Amarna-Probleme (1-2)." ZAS85, 83-118. ' Feucht, Erika. 1967. Die Kiiniglichen Pektoralm. Motive, Sinngehalt und Zweck. Bamberg: Urlaub. - - - . 1984. "Verjiingung und Wiedergebun." SAX 11,401 -19. Finnestad , Ragnhild Bjerre. 1997. "Temples in the Ptolemaic and Roman Periods: Ancient Traditions in New Contexts," In Temples ofAncient Egypt, ed. Byron E. Shafer (Ithaca: Cornell), 185-237. Fischer, H enry G. 1963. "Varia Aegyptiaca." fARCE 2, 17-5 1. - - - , 1964. Inscriptions from the Coptite Nome, Dynasties VI-Xl. Rome: Pontificum InstitUfum Biblicum. - - - , 1968. Dendera in the Third Millennium B. C, down to the 7heban Domination of Upper Egypt. Locust Valley, NY: Augustin. - - - . 1972. "Some Emblematic Uses of Hieroglyphs with Particular Reference to an Archaic Ritual Vessel." MMJ 5,5-23. - - - , 1973a. "Redundant Determinatives in the Old Kingdom." MMJ 8, 7-25. - - . 1973b. "Hands and Heam (Berlin 1157)." lEA 59,224-26. - - - . 1974. "The Mark of a Second Hand on Egyptian Antiquities." MMj9, 5-34. - - - , I 976a, Egyptian Studies I: ltdria. New York: Metropolitan Museum of Art. - - - . 1976b. ''Archaeological Aspects of Epigraphy and Palaeography." In Ancient Egyptian Epigraphy and Palaeography (New York: Metropolitan Museum of An), 27-50. - - - , 1976c, "More Emblematic Uses from Ancient Egypt." MMj 11. 125-28. - - - . 1977a. Orientation ofHieroglyphs, Part 1· &versals. New York: Metropolitan Museum of Art. - - - . 1977b. "Hieroglyphen." In Lexikon der A"gyptologie. vol. 2. ed. Wolfgang H elck and Wolfhart Westendorf (Wiesbaden: Harrassowin), cols. 1189-1199. - - - . 1978. "Notes on Sticks and Staves in Ancient Egypt." MMJ 13, 5-32. - - - , 1983. Ancient Egyptian Calligraphy. New York: Metropolitan Museum of Art. - - - . 1986. L'ecriturt! et rart de l'Egypte ancienne. Paris: Presses universitaires de France. - - - . 1996. l::gyptian Studies Ill: ltdna Nova. New York: Metropolitan Museum of Art. Foreman, Werner and Stephen Quirke. 1996. Hieroglyphs and the Afterlife in Ancient Egypt. Norman, OK: University of Oklahoma. Franco, Isabelle. 2002. "The Funerary Texts from the Valley of the Kings." In The Pharaohs, ed. Christiane Ziegler (Milan: Bompiani Arre),313-25. Frandsen, Paul J. 1986. "Tabu." In Lexikon der lJ."gyptologie, vol. 6, ed. Wolfgang Helck and Wolfhart Westendorf (Wiesbaden: Harrassowirz), cols. 135-42. Frankfort, H enri, Adriaan de Buck. and Battiscombe Gunn. 1933. the Cenotaph ofSeti 1 atAbydos. 2 vols. London: Egypt Explora. tion Society. Friedman, Florence Dunn. 1985. "The Root Meaning of 3tJ.: Effectiveness or Luminosity." Serapis 8, 39-46. - - - . 1993. "The Underground Reliefranels ofIGng Djoser at the Step Pyramid Complex." JARCE 32, 1-42. - - - . 1996. "Notions of Cosmos in the Seep Pyramid Complex." In Studies in Honor ofWiUiam Kelly Simpson, vol. 1, ed. Peter Der Manuelian (Boston: Museum of Fine Arrs), 337-51. Gamer-Wallen, Ingrid. 1970. Fische und Fischkulte im Alten Agypten. Wiesbaden: Harrassowin. Gardiner, Alan H. 1929. "The Transcription of New Kingdom Hieratic." JEA 15,48-55. - - . 1938. "The House of Life ." JEA 24,157-79. - - . 1944. "Horus the Be~derire." lEA 30, 20-60. ---.1957. Egyptian Grammar. 3rd ed . London: Oxford University Press. von George, Beare. 1970. Zu den Altdgyptischen Vorstellungen vom Schatten als Seele. Bonn: Habelt. - - - . 1983. ""Gottesschatten" = Gotterbild in WiddergestalL" WO 14,130-34. Gcstcrmann. Louise. 1999. "Konigliche Vorstellungen "lU Grab und Jenseits im Mittleren Reich, Teil II: OSirisgraber des Mittleren Reiches in koniglichem Kontcxt: Amduat, 6. Scunde," In Das ./rUhe dgyptische Kdnigrum, Akten des 2. Symposiums zur iigyptischen Kiinigsideologie in Wien, cd. Rolf Gundlach and Wilfried Seipel (Wiesbaden: Harrasowin), 97-110. Gilu!a, Mordechai. 1971. "Coffin Texts Spell 148." lEA 57,14-19. - - - , 1972. "Enclitic Particles in Middle Egyptian ." GM 2,53-59. Gnirs, Andrea M. 1996. "Die agyptische Autobiographie." In Ancient Egyptian Literature. History and Forms, ed. Antonio Loprieno (Leide" Brill), 191 -242. Goebs, Katja. 1998. "Expressing Luminosity in Iconography: Feacures of the Solar Bark in the Tomb of Ramesses VI." GM 165, 57--67. - - - . 2008. Crowns in Egyptian Funerary Literature. Royalty, Rebirth, and Destruction. Oxford: Griffith Institute. Goedicke. Hans. 1955. "The Egyptian Idea of Passing from Life to Death (an Interpretation)." Orientalia 24,225- 39,

BIBLIOGRAPHY

547

Goldwasser, Orly. 1995. From Icon to Metaphor: Studies in the Semiotics ofHieroglyphs. OBO 142. Fribourg: Academic Press. - - -. 1997. "1tn - the "Golden Egg" (CT IV 292b-c [B9C*])." In Essays on Ancient Egypt in Honour of Herman Te Velde, ed. Jacobus van Dijk (Groningen: Styx), 79- 84. Gombrich, Ernst. 1996. "Aims and Limits ofIconology." In lhe Essential Gombrich, ed. R. Woodfield (London: Phaiclon), 457-84. Graefe, Erhart. 2003. DdS Grab des Padihorresnet, Obervermogensverwalterder Gottesgemahlin desAmun (lhebanisches Grab Nr. 196). 2 vals. Turnhaut: Brepols.

Grapow, Hermann. 1935. "Zum Gebrauch der aIren Pronomina absoluta." Z4S 71,48- 55. - - -.1936. "Studien zu den thebanischen K6nigsgrabern." Z4S72 , 12- 39. Green, Michael. 1987. The Coptic SHARE Pattern and Its Ancient Egyptian Ancestors. Warminster: Ads & Phillips. Groll, Sarah Israelit. 1982. "Diachronic Grammar as a Means of Dating Undated texts." In Egyptological Studies, ed. Sarah Israelit Groll (Scripra Hierosolymitana 28. Jerusalem: Magnes), 11- 104 Guilmant, Felix. 1907. Le tombeau de Ramses IX Cairo: IFAO. Harrell, James and Brown, V Max. 1992. "The Oldest Surviving Topographical Map from Ancient Egypt (Turin papyri 1879, 1899

and 1969)." jARCE29, 81-105. Harvey, Stephen. 1994. "Monuments of Ahmose at Abydos." Egyptian Archaeology 4,3-5. - - - . 1998. "The Cults of Ahmose ar Abydos." Ph.D. dissertation, University of Pennsylvania. Hassan, Se1im. 1932. Excavations at Giza, vol. 6. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Hawass, Zahi. 1994. "A Fragmentary Monument of Djoser from Saqqara," JEA 80, 45-56. Hays, Harold M. 2006. "The Typological Structure of rhe Pyramid Texts and Irs Continuiries with Middle Kingdom Mortuary Literature." Ph.D. dissertation, University of Chicago. - -.2009. "Unreading the Pyramids." B/FAD 109,195- 220. Hermsen, Edmund. 199 1. Die zwei Wege des Jemeits. OBO 112 Freiburg: Universitatsverlag. Hoffmann, Nadette. 1998. "Reading the Amduat." zAs 123, 26-40. Hornung, Erik. 1957. "Zur geschichdichen Rolle des Kbnigs in der 18. Dynastie," MDAIK 15, 120- 33. 1963-67. Das Amduat. Die Schrift des verborgenes Raumes. 2 vols. Wiesbaden: Harrasowitz. 1972. Agyptische Unterweltsbiicher. Zurich: Artemis. 1975a. "Aker." In Lexikon der Agyptologie, vol. 1, ed. Wolfgang Heick and Eberhard Otto (Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz), cols.

114- 115. - -. 1975b. "Erde, Buch von der." In Lexikon der Agyptologie, vol. 1, ed. Wolfgang Heick and Eberhard Otto (Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz), cols. 1264--1265. 1975- 76. Das Buch der Anbetung des Re im Westen (Sonnenlitanei) nach den Versionen des Neuen Reiches. 2 vols. Geneva: Editions de Belles-Lettres. 1979-80. Das Buch von den Pforten des Jemeits. 2 vols. Aegypriaca Helvetica, 2- 3. Geneva: Agyptologisches Seminar der Universitat Basel et Faculte des Lernes de l'Universite de Geneve. 1981. "Zu den Schlusszenen der Unterweltsbucher." MDAIK37, 217- 26. 1982. Das Agyptische Mythos von der Himmelskuh. aBO 46. Freiburg: Universitatsverlag. - --.1987-94. Texte zumAmduat. 3 vols. Geneva: Editions de Belles-Lettres. 1988. "Zum Schutzbild im Grabe Ramses' VI." In Funerary Symbols and Religion: Essays Dedicated to Professor M.S.H G. Heerma van Voss, cd. J. H. Kamstra, H. Milde, and K. Wagtendonk (Kampen: Kok), 45- 51. 1990a. 1he Valley ofthe Kings, translated from the German by David Warburton. New York: Timken. - - -. 1990b. Zwei ramessidische Konigsgrdber: Ramses IV und Ramses VII. Mainz: von Zabern. - - -. 1992a. Idea into Image, translated from the German by Elizabeth Bredeck. New York: Timken. - - - . 1992b. "The Rediscovery of Akhenaren and His Place in Religion." JARCE29, 43-49. - - -. 1996. Conceptions of God in Ancient Egypt: The One and the Many, translated from the German by John Baines. Ithaca: Cornell University Press 1999a. 1he Ancient Egyptian Books ofthe Afterlife, translated from the German by David Lorton. Ithaca: Cornell University Press. 1999b. History ofAncient Egypt, translated from the German by David Lorton. Ithaca: Cornell University Press. Isbell, Charles D. 1974. "Some Cryptograms in the Aramaic Incantation Bowls." jNES 33,405-7. Iversen, E. 1963. "Horapollon and the Egyptian Conceptions of Eternity." RdSO 37,177- 86. Jansen-Winkeln, Karl. 1993. "Nisbeadjektiv und Partizip." LingAeg3, 7- 16. - - -. 1996. Spdtmitteliigyptische Grammatik, der Texte der 3. Zwischenzeit. Wiesbaden: Harrassowirz. - - -. 1998. "Zur Datierung und Stellung des "Vorlesepriesters" Petamenophis." WZK?l188, 165- 75. - - -.2004. "Sprachliche Bemerkungen zu den Unterweltsbuchern." SAK32, 205-32.

548

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

lenni, Hanna. 1998. "Der Sarkophag Usermaarres." In Fin iigyptisches Glasptrlenspia: dgyptolngische Beitrdge for Erik Hornung aus seinem Schu~rkreis, ed. Andreas Brodbeck (Berlin: Gebr. Mann), 93-161. Johnson, Janet. 1976. The Demotic Verbal System. SAGe 38. Chicago: The Oriental lnsricute of (he Univers iry of Chicago. - - . 1980. "NIMS in Middle Egypdan." Serapis 6, 69-73.

Johnson. SaHy B. 1990. The Cobra Goddess ofAncimt Egypt. London: Kegan Paul. .. Jones, Dilwyn. 1988. A Glossary ofAncient Egyptian Nautical Titles and urms. London: Kegan Paul. Junge. Friedrich. 1972. "Zur Funktion des srj.m.l}r.f" JEA 58, 133- 39. - - -. 1978a. "'Emphasis by anticipation' jm mittelagyptischen Verbalsatz," RdE 30, 96-100. - - -. 1978b. Syntax der mitte/dgyptischen Literatursprache. Mainz: von Zabern. ---.1979. "D er Gebrauch vonjw im Mittelagyptischen San." In Festschrift Elmar £del, ed. Manfr~ d Gorg and Edgar Pusch (Agypten undAltesT'estamem 1. Bamberg: Gorg), 263-71. - - - . 1984. "Sprache." In Lexikon tier Agyptologi(, vol. 5, ed. Wolfgang Heick and Wolfhan Westendorf (Wiesbaden: Harrassawin), cols. 11 76-1211. - - - . 1985. "Sprachstufen und Sprachgeschichte." In XXII Dml$cher Orimtalisuntag: vom 21. bis 25. Miirz 1983 in TUbingen, d. Wolfgang Riillig (ZDMGSup 6, 23; Stuttgarc Stein,,), 17-34. - - - . 1991. "How to Srudy Egyptian Grammar and to What Purpose. A Summary of Sorts." LingAeg 1, 389-426. Junker, Hermann. and Erich Winter. 1965. Das Geburtshaus des Temples der Isis in Phild. Vienna: Bohlaus. Kadish, Gerald E. 1978-79. "The Scatophagous Egyptian." jSSEA 9, 203-17. Kakosy, L 1988. "Magical bricks from IT 32." In Funerary Symbols and Religion: Essays Dedicated to Professor M.5.H.G. Heerma van Vos, ed. J. H. Kamstra, H. Milde, and K. Wagtendonk, (Kampen: Kok), 60-72. Kammerzell, Frank. 1999. "Zur Interpretatio n einiger Beispiele graphemsprachlicher Varianz im Agyptischen." In H olger Gutschm idt, Giittinger Beitriige zur Sprachwissmschaft, vol. 2, ed. Carsten Peust, Peter Meyer, and Eilike Fobe (Gottingen : Peust and Gutschmidt), 61-97. Kampp-Seyfried, Friederike. 2003. "The Thcban Necropolis: An Overview of Topography and Tomb Development from the Middle Kingdom to the Ramesside Period." In the Theban Necropolis: Past, Present and Future, ed. Nigel Strudwick and John H. Taylor (London: The British Museum) , 2-10. Kamrin, Janice. 1999. 7h( Cosmos ofKhnumhotep 11 at Beni Hassan. London and New York: Kegan Paul. Kees, Hermann . 1912. Dtr Opfertanz des .4."gyptischen Kiinigs. Leipzig: Hinrichs.

- - -. 1926. Totengl4ubm und Jemtitsvorstellungen dn- aum Aegypter: Grundl4gen und EntuJick/ung bis zum Ende des Mittleren Reiches. Leipzig: Hinrichs. Kemp, Barry J. 1975. " Dating Pharaonic Cemeteries. Part 1. Nonmechanica1 Approaches to Seriation." MDAiK31, 259- 91 . - - -. 1989. Ancient Egypt, Anatomy ofa Civilization. Repr. London: Roucledge, 2001. Kerenyi, Karl. 1959. The Herots ofthe Greeks. New York: Grove. Killen, Geoffrey. 1980. Ancient Egyptian Furniture. 2 vols. Warminster: Ads & Phillips. Kirk, G. 5.,]. E. Raven, and M. Schofield. 1983. Th( Prtsocratic Philosophers. 2nd ed .. Repr. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2002. Kitchen, Kenneth. 1968-83. Ramesside inscriptions: Historical and Biographical (Oxford : Blackwell). Koemoth, Pierre. 1994. Osiris (t ks arbres. Contribution Ii l'itutk des arbrts rams de I'Egypte ancimne. Li6g~: CIPL. Kristensen, Willem Brede. 1926. Htt Leven uit de Dood: studiin over Egyptischen en Oud-Griekschen godsdiemt. Haarlem: Erven F. Bohn. Kuhlmann, Klaus and Schenkel, Wolfgang. 1983. Das Grab tks Ibi, Obergutsverwalurs der Gottesgemahlin des Amun (Thebanisches Grab NT. 36). 2 vols. Maim: von Zabern. Kurth, Dieter. 1975. Den Himmtl StUtzm. Die ''twJ pt ''-Szenen in den iigyptischen Temptln der Griechisch-riimischen Epoche. Brussels: Fondation egypwlogique Reine Elisabeth. - - - . 1983. "Die Laurwerte der Hieroglyphen in den Tempelinschrift~n der Griechisch-Romischen Zeit - zu r Sysremarik ihrer H erleitungsprinzipen." ASAE69. 287-309. Lacau , Pierre. 1914. "Suppressions er modifications de signes dans les tex(es funeraires." ZAS 51,1-64. Landstrom, Bjorn. 1970. Ships of the Pharaohs: 400 l'ears ofEgyptian Shipbuilding. Garden City, NY: Doubleday. Lapp, Gunther. 1997. The Papyrus of Nu. London: British Museum. Layton, Bently. 2000 . A Coptic Grammar. Wiesbaden: Harrassowin. Leahy, Anthony. 1984. "Death by Fite in Ancient Egypt." jESHO 27, 199-206. Lefebure, Eugene. 1886-90. Les hypogies royaux de Thebes. Mimoires Pub/its par us Members ck 14 Mission Archeologique Franraise. 3 vols. Paris: Leroux. Lehner, Mark. 1997. The Compute Pyramids. London: Thames & Hudson.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

549

Leitz, Christian. 1989. "D ie obere und die untere Dat," ZAS 116, 41 - 57. - - - , 1999. Magical and Medical Papyri o/the New Kingdom. Hieratic Papyri in the British Museum, 7. London: Trustees of the British Museum. - - -. 2002. Lexikon der Agyptischen Giitter und Giitterbezeichnungnen. 7 vals. uuven: Peeters. - - -, 2009. "Das Ichneuffionweibchen von Herakleopolis - eine Manifestation clet Baster." SAK 38, 161-71. Leprohon, Ronald. 1996. "Gatekeepers of This and the Other World," j5SEA 23, 77-91. Lepsius, C. R. 1842-45 Denkmteler aus /Egypten und Aithiopien, part 3, vals. 7 and 8. Repr. Geneve: Editions de Belles-Lettres, 1972. - --. 1897. Denkmiiler aus Aegypten und Aethiopien: Text, ed. Eduard Naville, Ludwig Borchardt, and Kurt Sethe. Leipzig: Hinrichs. Lesko, Leonard. 1972. The Ancient Egyptian Book of Two \.\'lays. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press. - - - . 1976. "The Shortest Book of Amduat?" In Studies in Honor ofGeorge R. Hughes, ed. Janer H. Johnson and Edward F. Wente (SAOC 39; Chicago: The Oriemal Institute of the University of Chicago), 133-38. - - -. 1982. "The Texts on Middle Kingdom Coffins." In L'Egyptowgie en 1979. Axes axes prioritaires de recherches, voL 1 (Paris: Editions du centre nationale de la recherche sciemifique), 39-43. - - -. 1991. "Ancient Egyptian Cosmogonies and Cosmology." In Religion in Ancient Egypt. Gods, Myth and Personal Practice, ed. Byron E. Shafer (Ithaca: Cornell Universiry Press), 88- 122. Lichtheim, Miriam. 1976. Ancient Egyptian Literature, Vol. 2: The New Kingdom. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press. - - -. 1992. Maat in Egyptian Autobiographies and Related Studies. OBO 120. Freiburg; Gottingen: Universitatsverlag; Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht. von Lieven, Alexandra. 2007. Grundriss des Laufes tier Sterne. 2 vols. Copenhagen: CNI. - --.2001. "Scheiben am Himmel - Zur Bedeutung von itn und itn.t." SA.K29, 277- 82. - - - . forthcoming. "Closed Canon vs. Creative Chaos. An In-depth Look at (Real and Supposed) Mortuary Texts from Ancient EgypL" Loprieno, Antonio. 1995. Ancient Egyptian. A Linguistic fntroduction. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. - - - . 1996. "Denning Egyptian Literature." In Ancient Egyptian Literature. History and Forms, ed. Antonio Loprieno (Leiden:

B,m),39- 58. - - -. 1997. "Egyptian and Coptic Phonology." In Phonologies ofAsia and Africa (Including the Caucasus), voL 1, ed. Alan S. Kaye (Winona Lake, IN: Eisenbrauns), 431-60. Mahmoud, Abdel. 2002. "Mummy Bed of Sennedjem." In Quest for Immortality: Treasures ofAncient Egypt, ed. Betsy Bryan and Erik Hornung (Washington: National Gallery of Art), 148-49. Malaise, Michel and Jean Winand. 1999. Grammaire raisonnie de l'egyptien classique. Aegyptiaca Leodiensia 6. Liege: CIPL Manassa, Colleen. 2004. The Great Karnak Inscription ofMerneptah: Grand Strategy in the 13th Century BCE. YES 5. New Haven: Yale University Press. - - -. 2004. "Appendix of Cryptographic Values." In The Enigmatic Netherworld Books ofthe Solar-Osirian Unity, by John Darnell (OBO 198. Fribourg; Gottingen: Academic Press; Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht), 587-617. - - -. 2007. The Late Egyptian Underworld: Sarcophagi and Related Texts fromthe Nectanebid Period. 2 vols. Agypten und altes Testament 72. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. Manniche, Lisa. 2003. "The So-Called Scenes of Daily Life in the Private Tombs of the Eighteemh Dynasty: An Overview." In The Theban Necropolis: Past, Present and Future, ed. Nigel Strudwick and John H. Taylor (London: The British Museum),

42-45 Der Manuelian, Peter. 1994. Living in the Past: Studies in Archaism of the Egyptian Twenty-Sixth Dynasty. London: Kegan Paul. Marciniak, Marek. 1983. "Deux campagnes epigraphiques au tombeau de Ramses III dans la Vallee des Rois (no. 11) ." ttudes et Travaux 12, 295- 305. Mariette, Auguste. 1870- 80. Denderah: description generale du grand temple de tette ville. 6 vols. Paris: Franck. Martin, Karl. 1986. "Udi.us." Tn Lexikon der A"gyptologie, ed. Wolfgang Heick and Wolfhart Westendorf (Wiesbaden, Hartassowitz), cak 865- 866. Maspero, Gaston. 1888. Les Hypogies Royaux de Thebes. Paris: Leroux. - --. 1895- 99. Histoire ancienne des peuples de [,Orient. Paris: Hachette et Cie. - - -. 1913 . "Tombeau de petemenophis." BE 29, 1-6. - - -. 1914- 39. Sarcophages des ipoques persane et ptolimafque. 2 vols. Cairo: IFAO. Mathieu, Bernard. 2004. "La distinction entre Textes des Pyramides et Textes des Sarcophages est-die legitime?" in D'un monde l'autre: Textes des Pyramides et Textes des Sarcophages, ed. Susanne Bickel and Bernard Mathieu (Cairo: IFAO), 247- 62.

a

550

THE ANCIEN T EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

Maurie-Barberio, Florence. 2001. "Le premier exemplaire du Livre de J'Amdouat," B/FAG 101, 315-50. - - - . 2004. "Reconsd rution du decor de la tombe de Ramses III (partie in ferieure) d'apres les manuscrits de Roberr Hay." B/FAD 104, 389-403. ' Meeks, Dimitri. 1991. "Dieu masque, dieu sans tetc." Archio-NiI2. 5-15. ---,2004. Les Architraves du Temple d'Esna Paliographie. Cairo: IFAO. .., M eskell , Lynn. 200 1. "The Egyptian Ways of Death," Archaeological Papers althe American Anthropological Association 10, 27-40. de Meulcnaere, H. 1994. "N[(R) et NF(R)." In Hommages aJean Leelant, vol. 4, ed. Catherine Berger, Gisele Clerc, and Nicolas Grimal (Cairo, IFAO), 65- 71. Minas-Nerpal , Martina. 2006. Der Gott Chepri. Untersuchungen zu Schriftzeugnissen und ikonographischen Quellen vom Alten Reich bis in griechisch~riimische Zeit. Leuven: Peeters. Moller, Geo rg. 1965. Hieratische Paliiographie. 3 vols. Osnabruck: Zeller. Montet, Pierre. t 942. Tanis: Douu annies de fottilks dans une capitale oubliie du delta igyptien. Paris: Payot. - - - . 1947. Les Constructions et Ie Tombeau d'Osorkon 11 a Tanis. Le Necropole Royale de Tanis I. Paris: Jourde et Allard. Morenz, Ludwig. 2004. "Apophis: On the Origin, Name, and Natu re of an Ancient Egyptian Anti-God." }NES 63,201 -5. - --. 2006. "Licht im Dunkeln. Ein paradoxales Oenk- Bild des nachclichen Sonnengortes im Grab Ramses VI." ARg 8, 3 17-26. Morenz, Siegfr ied. 1973. Egyptian Religion, rranslated from the German by Ann E. Keep. Repr. Ithaca: Cornell, 1996. Morschauser, SCOtt. 1991. Threat~Formufae in Ancient Egypt. Baltimore, MD: Halgo. Miiller, Maja. 1982. "Musterbuch." In Lexikon ckr Agyptologie, vol. 4, ed. Wolfgang Heick and Wolfhart Westendorf (Wiesbaden: H ara5sowirz), cols. 244-46. Muller, W. Max and Scott, Sir James George. 1918. The Mythology ofAU Races XlI: Egyptian, Inda~Chinese. Boston: Marshall Jones. Munro, Peter. 1973. "Brothalften und Schilfblatter." GM 4, 13- 16. Mysliwiec, Karol. 198 1. "La renaissance solaire du mort." B/FAD 8 1 Supplement, 91-106. Neveu, Fran~ois. 1998. La Langue des Ramses. Grammaire du Nio.Sgyptien. 2nd ed. Paris: Kheops, 1998. Naville, Edouard. 1875. La litanie du soleil, inscriptions recueillies dans les tombeaux des Rois. Leipzig: Engelmann. Niwinski, Andrze;. 1984. "Sarg, NR- SpZt." In Lexikon der Agyptologie, vol. 5, ed. Wolfgang Heick and Wolfhart Westendorf (Wiesbaden: Harassowitz), cots. 434--468. - - -. 1987-88. "The Solar-Osirian unity as principle of the theology of the "State of Amun" in Thebes in the 21 st Dynasty." JEOL 30, 89- 106. - - - . 1989. Studies on the lilustrated Theban Funerary Papyri ofthe 11th and 10th Centuries Be. aBO 86. Freiburg: Unive rsitatsverlag. O'Connor, David. 1985. "The Chronology of Scarabs of the Middle Kingdom and the Second Intermediate Period." }SSEA 15, 1-41. - - . 1989. "City and Palace in New Kingdom Egypt." CRIPEL II , 73-87. - - - . 199 1. "M irror of the Cosmos: The Palace of Merneprah." In Fragments ofa Shattered Visage: The Proceedings of the Inter· national Symposium o/Ramesses the Great, ed. Edward Blei berg and Rita Freed (Memphis: State University), 167-98. - - - . 1995. "Beloved of Maat, the Horizon of Re: The Royal Palace in New lGngdom Egypt." In Ancient Egyptian Kingship, ed . David O 'Connor and David Silverman (Leiden: Brill), 263-300. Ogdon , Jorge. 1986. "Some Notes on the Name and th e Iconography of the god ikr," VA 2, 127-35. anstine, Suzanne. 1995. "The Relationship between Osiris and Re in the Book of Caverns." j5SEA 25, 66-77. Parker, Richard and Ono Neugebauer. 1960-64. Egyptian Astronomical Texts. 2 vols. Providence: Brown University Press . Parkinson, Richard and Quirke, Stephen. 1992. "The Coffin of Prince Herunefer and the Early History of the Book of the Dead." In Studies in Pharaonic Religion and SOCiety in Honor of}. Gwyn Griffiths, ed. Alan B. Lloyd (London: Egypt Exploration Society),37-5 1. Parlebas, Jacques. 1981. "Ecriture Ideographique, Ecriture Curs ive er lconographie dans L'Egypte Pharaonique." In Mithodologie lconographique: Actes du Colloque de Strasbourg 27- 28 Avril 1979, ed. Gerard Siebert (Strasbourg: AECR) , 107-11. Pearce, Laurie E. 1982. "Cuneiform Cryptography: Numerical Substitution fo r Syllabic and Logographic Signs." Ph. D. d isscrta· rion, Yale University. Piankoff, Alexandre. 1939-62. Le livre des Portes dam fa salk du' sarcophage du tombeau de Ramses III. 3 vols. Cairo: IFAO. - - - . 1942a. "Le Livre des Quererts, 1er Tableau." BIFAO 41, 1-1 1, pis. 1- 9. - - - . 1942b. Le Livre du Jour et de fa Nuit. Cairo: IFAO. - - - . 1944. "Le Livre des Quererts, Seconde Division; Troisicme Division; Quacricme Divisio n; C inquieme Division." BIFAO 42, 1-62, pis. 10-79. - - - . 1945. uLe Livre des Quererts, Sixieme D ivision." BIFAO 43, I-50, pis. 80-151. - - - . 1947a. "Le Livre des Querens, Fin." BIFAO 45. 1-42.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

551

- - , 1947b. "Les grandes compositions religieuses dans 1a combe de pedemenope." BIFAO 46,73-92. --.1948. "La PmiculelfouIj''' BIFA047, 171-74. - - - , 1953. La Criation du Disque Solaire. Cairo: IFAO. - - - . 1954. the Tomb oflU:zmmes VI. BolJingen Series 1. New York: Bollingen Foundation. - - - . 1955. The Shrines ofTut-Ankh-Amon. Balliogen Series 2. New York: Bollingen Foundation. - - - , 1957a. MythologicalPapyri. Bollingcn Series 3. New York: Bollingen Foundation. - - . 1957b. "La Tombe de Ram,es 1er." BIFAO 56,189-200. - - . 1958. "Vallee des Rois aThebes-Ouest. La Tombe No.1 (Ramses VII)." ASAE 55, 145-56. - - . 1964a. "Que! est Ie "l ivre" appele ::-:""~t~*;,?" BIFAO 62,147-49. - - - . 1964b. "Les grandes compositions religieuses du Nouvel Empire et Ja reforme d'Arnarna." BIFAO 62, 207- 18. - - - , 1964c. 7he Litany ofRe. Bollingen series 4. New York: Bollingen Foundation. - - - , 1974. The Wandering ofthe Sou!. Bol1ingen Series 6. Princeton: University Press. Picardo, Nicholas. 2007. "'Semamic Homicide' and the So-Called Reserve Heads: The Theme of Decapitation in Egyptian Funerary Religion and Some Implications for the Old Kingdom." fARCE 43.221-52. Piccione, Peter A. 1990. "Mehen, Mysteries, and Resurrection from the Coiled Serpent." fARCE 27,43-52. Pinch, Geraldine. 1993. Votive Offirings to Bathor. Oxford: Griffith ins(itute. Polotsky, H.J. 1964. Zu den Imcriften der 11. Dynastie. Hildesheim: Olms. - - - . 1965. Egyptian Tenses. Jerusalem: The Israel Academy of Sciences and Humanities. - - - . 1976. "Les transpositions du verbe en egyptien classique." lOS 6, 1-50. Polz, Daniel. 1995. "The Location of the Tomb of Amenhotep L a Reconsideration," in Valley ofth~ Sun Kings. New Explorations in th~ Tombs ofthe Pharaohs, ed. Richard Wilkinson (Tucson, AZ: University of Arizona Press), 8-21. Quihell, J .E. 1898. 7h~ Ramesseum. London: Quartich, 1898. Quirke, Stephen. 1992. Ancient Egyptian R~ligion. New York: Dover. - - - . 1996. "Narrative Literature." In Ancient Egyptian Literature. History and Forms, ed. Antonio Loprieno (Lciden: Brill), 263- 76 - - -. 2003. "Measuring the Underworld." In Mysterious Lands. ed. David O'Connor and Stephen Quirke (London: University College),161-81. Rambova, Natacha. 1957. "The Symbolism of the Papyri." In Mythological Papyri, by Alexandre Piankoff (Bollingen Series 3. New York: Boll ingen Foundation), 29-65. Ranke, Hermann. 1935-52. Die iigyptischen Pmonennamen. 2 vols. New York: Augustin. Raue, Dietrich. 1995. "Zum memphitischen Privatgrab im Neuen Reich." MDAIK51, 255-68. Raven, Maarten]. 1998. ''A New Type of Osiris Burials." In Egyptian R~ligion: The Last Thousand Years: Studies Dedicated to th~ Memory ofJan Quaegebeur, ed. WiUy Ctarysse, Antoon Schoors, and H arco Willems (Leuven: Peeters), 227-39. Reeves, Nicholas and Richard H. Wilkinson. 1996. The Complete Valley ofth~ Kings London: Thames & Hudson. Renggli, F. 2000. "The Sunrise as the Birth of a Baby: The Prenatal Key to Egyptian Mythology," Journal of Prenatal and Perinatal Psychology and Hcalrh 12, 356-82. Richards, Janet. 1999. "Conceptual Landscapes in the Egyptian Nile Valley," in Archa~ologi~s of Landscape, Contemporary P~rrp~c­ tives, ed. Wendy Ashmo re and A. Bernard Knapp (Malden, MA: Blackwell), 83- 100. - - - . 2005. SOciety and Death in Ancient Egypt: Mortuary Landscap~s of th~ Middle Kingdom. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Richter, Barbara. 2008. "The Amduat and Its Relationship to the Architecture of Early 18th Dynasty Royal Burial Chambers." jARCE44,73-104 . Ritner, Robert K. 1984. ''A Uterine Amuler in the Oriental Institute Collection." fNES 43, 209-21. - - - . 1985. "Anubis and the Lunar Disc." fEA 71, 149-55. - - . 1990. "0. Gardiner 363, A Spell Againsr Nighr Terrors." jARCE27, 25-41. ---.2003. "The Breathing Permit of Hor Among the Joseph Smith Papyri." fNES 62, 161-180. ---.2006. '''And Each Staff transformed into a Snake': The Serpent Wand in Ancient Egypt." In Through a Glass Darkly: Magic. Dreams, and Prophecy in Ancient Egypt, ed. Kasia Szpakowska (Swansea, Wales: Classical Press, 2006), 205-25. - -- . 2008. The M~chanics ofAncient Egyptian Magical Practice SAOC 54. Chicago: The Oriental Institute of the UniverSity of Chicago. Roberson, Joshua. 2007. "An Enigmatic Wall from the Cenotaph of Seti ] at Abydos ." fARCE 43,93-112. - - - . 2008. "The Rebirth of the Sun: Morruary Art and Architecture in the Royal Tombs of New Kingdom Egypt." Exp ~dition 50/2, 14-25. - - - . 2009a. "The Early History of "New Kingdom" Netherworld Iconography: A Late Middle Kingdom Apotcopaic Wand

552

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

Reconsidered." In Archaism and Innovation: Studi~s in the Culturr of Middle Kingdom Egypt, ed. David P. Silverman, W K. Simpson, and Josef Wegner (New Haven; Philadelphia: Yale University Press; University of Pennsylvania Museum), 427-45. , - - . 2009b. "A Solar Litany from the Tomb of Ramesses IX." fARCE 45, 227-32.

- - - . 2010. "Observations on the So-Called 'sw s4m.f,' or Middle Egyptian Proclitic Pronoun Construction." In Mil/iom 0/ Jubilees. Studies in Honor o/David P. Silverman, vol. 2, ed. Zahi A. Hawass and Jennifer Wegner (Cairo: SCA), 185-205. Roberts, Allison. 2000. My Heart My Mother. Death and Rebirth in Ancient Egypt. East Sussex: Northgate. Robins, Gay. 1990. "Problems in Interpreting Egypdan Art," DE 17, 45- 58. - - - , 2007. "The Decorative Program in the Tomb ofTutankhamun (KV 62)." In The Archaeology and Art ofAncient Egypt. Essays in Honor ofDavid B. O'Connor, vol. 2, ed. Zahi A. Hawass and Janet Richards (Cairo: SCA), 312-42. - - - . 2008. The Art ofAncitnt Egypt. Rev. cd. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. Robinson, Peter. 2003. "As for Them Who Know Them , They Shall Find Their Parhs: Speculations on the Ritual Landscapes of the Book of Two Ways." In Mysterious Lands, ed. David O 'Connor and Stephen Quirke (London: University College) , l39-59. Roeh rig, Catherine. 2006. "The Building Activities ofThutmose lIT in the Valley of the Kings." In 7hutmose lli: A New Biography, ed. Eric H. Cline and David O'Connor (Ann Arbor, M I: University of Michigan), 238-59. Roeten, L. H. 2004. "Some Observations on the nI;l; and tj. t (,erernity»." GM 20 1, 69-77. Roccati, Alessandro. 1986. "Verb System in Early Egyptian: Some Considerations on Akrionsan, Diathesis, Aspect, Tense." In Crossroad: Chaos or the Beginning ofa New Paradigm, cd. Genie Englund and Paul John Frandsen (Copenhagen: CNI), 289-95. Romer, John. 1974. "Thutmosis I and the Biban EI-Moluk: Some Problems of Attribution." JEA 60, 119-33. - - , 1976. "Royal Tombs of the Ea,ly Eighteenth Dynasty." MDAIK32, 19l-206. - - . 1981. Th, Va/ky of the Kings. Repr. London, Michael O 'Mara, 1988. de la Roque, Fr. W Bisson. 1931. "Notes sur Aker." BHAD 30, 575-80. Rosellini, Ippolito. 1832. Monnumenti Storici. Pisa: Capurro. - - -. 1844. Monumenti del Culto. Pisa: Capurro. RoBler-Kohler, Ursula. 1986. "Eine Beobachtungen an Dekorarionsteilen der Konigsgraber des NR," BiOr 43.277-302. - - - . 1999. "Konigliche Vorstdlungcn zu Grab und Jenseits im Mittleren Reich, Teil L Ein, 'Gottesbcgrabn is' des Mittleren Reiches in koniglichem Kontext: Amduar 4. und 5. Stunde." In Das /rUhe agyptische Konigtum, Akten des 2. Symposiums zur agyptischm f(jjnigsideologie in Wim, ed. Rolf Gundlach and Wilfried Seipel (Wiesbaden: Harrasowirz), 7 3~96. Roth. Ann M. and Catherine Roehrig. 2002. "Magical Bricks and Bricks of Birth." JEA 88,121-39. Roulin, Gilles. 1996. L ~ Iivre de la Nuit. Une composition igyptimne de l'au--ckta. 2 vols. OBO 147. Freiburg: Universitatsverlag. - - - . 1998. "Les Tombes Royales de Tanis: Analyse du Programme Decoratif." In Tanis. Travaux ricents sur k tell San e/~Hagar. vol. 1, ed. Philippe Brissaud and Christiane Zivie-Cache (Paris: Editions Noesis), 193-275. Saleh. Abdul-Aziz. 1969. "The So-called Primeval Hill and Other Related Elevations in Ancient Egyptian Mythology." MDAIK 25, llO-20. Saninger, Helmut. 1986. "On Tense and Aspect in Middle Egyptian." In Crosfroad· Chaos or the Beginning ofa New Paradigm, ed. Gertie Englund and Paul John Frandsen (Copenhagen: CNI) , 297-313. - - - . 1997. "Egyptian in the Afroasiatic Frame: Recent Egyptologicallssues with an Impact on Comparative Studies." In Afro-

me

asiatica Neapolitana. Contributi presentati alt8 0 Incontro di Linguistica Afroasiatica (Camito-Semitica) Napoli, 25-26 Gennaio 1996, ed. Alessandro Bausi and Mauro Tasca (Naples: Insritute Universitario Orientale) , 27-48. Sauncron, Serge. 1973-74. "I.:ecriture Ptolema·ique." In Textts et Langages de I'Egypte Phamonique. Cent Cinquante Annies de Recherches 1822- 1972. Hommageajean-Franfois Champollion, vol. 1 (Cairo: IFAO), 45- 56. - - - . 1982. LEcriture Fi.gurative dans les Textes d'Esna. Cairo: {FAO. Schafer, Heinrich. 1986. Principks ofEgyptian Art, translated from rhe German by John Baines. Rev. cd. Oxford: Griffith Institute. Scheil, Vincent. 1894. "Le Tombeau d'Aba." MMAF5/4, 624-56. Schenkel. Wolfgang. 1962. "Direkrer und indirekter "Genitiv"." 88,58-66. - - - . 1962. Friihmitteliigyptische Studien. Bonn: Orientalischen Seminars der Universitat. - - - . 1965. "Beitrage zur mittelagyptischen Syntax IV. Nomen + stjmf" ZAS 92,68-72. - - -. 1966. "Die Konversion, ein Epiphanomen der kemischen (agyptisch-koptischen) Sprachgeschichte ." MDAlK21, 123-32. ---.2002. ''Agyptisch wnm "essen" Zur Interpretation der Graphien," LingAeg 10, 59-77. Schott, S. 1963. Die Schrift der verborgenen Kamm~r in Konig$griiber der 18. Dynastie. Gottingen: Vandenhocck & Ruprecht. - - - . 1965. "Zum Welrbild der Jenseitsfilhrer des Neuen Reiches." NAWG 11. 188-90. Schulz, Regina. 1992. Die Entwicklung und Bedeutung des kuboiden Statumtypus. Hildesheim: Gerstenberg.

z;i's

BIBLIOGRAPHY

553

Seele, Keith C. 1947. "Horus on the Crocodiles." jNES 6,43- 52. - - -, 1959. The Tomb ofTjanefer at Thebes. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. Sethe, K. 1906- 09. Urkunden der 18. Dynastie. Leipzig: Hinrichs. - - -, 1935- 62. Ubersetzung und Kommentar zu den altiigytischen Pyramidentexten. 6 vols. Gllickstadr and Hamburg: Augustin. Seyffarth, Gustav. 1826. Beitraege zur Kenntniss der Literatur, Kunst, Mythologie und Geschichte des A/ten Aegypten. Leipzig: Joh. Ambros. Barth. Shafer, Byron. 1997. "Temples, Priests, and Rituals: An Overview." In Temples ofAncient Egypt, ed. Byron Shafer (Ithaca: Cornell University Press), 1- 30. Shaheen, Aha el-Din M. 1996. "EpigraphicaJ Evaluation of Some Hieroglyphic Signs and Titles in the Egyptian Expeditious Inscriptions of the Middle Kingdom (Part One: Mentuhotep IV - Senusret II Period)." GM 155, 87- 103. Sharpe, Samuel. 1837-41. Egyptian lmcriptions from the British Museum and Other Sources. London: E. Moxon. Shisha~Halevy, Ariel. 1986. "(i)ifin the Coffin Texts: A Functional Tableau." JAOS 106, 641-58. Shore, A.F. 1987. "Egyptian Cartography." In The History of Cartography, vol. 1, ed. J. B. Harley and David Woodward (Chicago: University of Chicago Press), 11 7-29. Silverman, David P. 1980. Interrogative Constructions with IN and IN- JW in Old and Middle Egyptian. Malibu: Undena. 1980. "Cryptographic Writing in the Tomb ofTutankhamun." SAK8, 233- 36. 1981. "Plural Demonstrative Constructions in Ancient Egyptian." RdE 33, 59-65. 1985. "Verbal Nominal Clauses in Middle Egyptian." In Melanges Carnal Eddin Mokhtar, ed. Paule Posener-Krieger (Caim, IFAO), 269- 85. - - -. 1986a. "Clauses in Middle Egyptian." In Crossroad: Chaos or the Beginning ofa New Paradigm, ed. Gertie Englund and Paul j. Frandsen (Copenhagen' CN!), 315- 35. - - -. 1986b. "Determining Initialiry of Clauses in Middle Egyptian." In Essays on Egyptian Grammar, ed. William Kelly Simpson (YES 1. New Haven: Yale University Press), 34-41. - - -. 1989. "Textual Criticism in the Coffin Texts." In Religion and Philosophy in Ancient Egypt, ed. William Kelly Simpson (YES 3. New Haven: Yale University Press), 29-53. - - -. 1990. Language and Writing in Ancient Egypt. Pittsburg, PA: Carnegie Museum. - - -. 1996a. "Magical Bricks of Hunuro." In Studies in Honoro/William Kelly Simpson, vol. 2, ed. Peter Der Manuelian (Boston: Museum of Fine Arts), 725-41. - - - . 1996b. "Coffin Texts from Bersheh, Kom el Hisn, and Mendes." In World o/the Coffin Texts, ed. Harco Willems (Leiden: Nederlands Instituut Voor H et Nabije Oosten), 130-41. - - -. 1996c. "Statuette of a Cobra Goddess." In Mistress ofthe House, Mistress 0/ Heaven: Women in Ancient Egypt, ed. Anne K. Capeland Glenn E. Markoe (New York: Hudson Hills), 142-44. - - -. 1997. "West Wall of the Tomb Chapel of K.a(i)pura." In Searchingfor Ancient Egypt, ed. David P. Silverman (Dallas: Mu~ seum of Art)' 170-7 5. - - -. 2000. "Middle Kingdom Tombs in the Teti Pyramid Cemetery." In Abusir and Saqqara in the Year 2000, ed. Miroslav Birta and Jaromir Krejci (Praha: Academy of Sciences), 259- 82. Simpson, William Kelly. 1974. The Terrace of the Great God at Abydos: The Offering Chapels ofDynasties 12 and 13. Publications of the Pennsylvania~Yale Expedition w Egypt 5. New Haven; Philadelphia: Peabody Museum; University Museum. Sourouzian, Hourig. 1989. Les Monuments du roi Merneptah. Mainz: von Zabern. Spalinger, Anthony. 1986. "Two Ramesside Historical Poems." In Egyptological Studies in Hono r of Richard A. Parker, ed. Leonard Lesko (Hanover and London: University Press of New England, for Brown University Press), 136-64. Spanel, Donald. B. 1989. "The Herakleopolitan Tombs ofKheti I, It(.;)jb(.j), and Kheti II at Asyut." Orientalia 58, 301-14. 1996. "Paleographic and Epigraphic Distinctions Between Texts of The So~Called First Intermediate Period and the Early Twelfth Dynasty." In Studies in Honor ofWilliam Kelly Simpson, ed. Peter Der Manuelian (Boswn: Museum of Fine Arts), 765- 86. Spencer, Patricia. 1984. The Egyptian Temple: A Lexicographical Study. London: Kegan Paul. Steindorff, Georg. 1946. "The Magical Knives of Ancient Egypt." /WAC 9,41-51, 106-7. - - -. 1951. Lehrbuch der koptischen Grammatik. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. Stricker, B.H. 1953. "De Grote Zeeslang." Ex Oriente Lux 10,1- 27. 1963- 89. De geboorte van Horus,S vols. Leiden: Ex Oriente lux. - - -. 1992. "The Enemies of Re I: The Doctrine of AKesis." DE 23, 45- 76. - - -. 1994. "The Enemies ofRe II: The Textual Tradition." DE 28,95- 122. Tefnin, Roland. 1991. "Les teres magiques de Gizeh (Prothese et mutilation. L'enigme des teres dites de replacement)." BSPE 120, 25-37.

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF T HE EARTH

554

Thomas, Elizabeth. 1964. "The Four Niches and Amuletic Figurines in Theban Royal Tombs." fARCE 3,71- 78. - - . 1978. "The 'Well' in Kings' Tombs of Biban el~Moluk." lEA 64, 80~83. Thomas, Nancy Katherine. 1980. "A Typological Study of Saite Tombs at Thebes-." Ph.D. dissertation, University of California,

Los Angeles. Topmann, Doris. 2002. Die ''Abscheu''-Spriiche der altagypthchen Sargtexte. Untersuchungen zu Texten und Diafogstrukturen . Wiesbaden: Harrassowiez. De Trafford, Aloisia. 2007. "The Palace Fa~ade Motif and the Pyramid Texts as Cosmic Boundaries in Vnis's Pyramid Chambers."

C4l17,

271~83.

Troy, Lana. 1986. Patterns o/Queenship in Ancient Egyptian Myth and History. Uppsala; Stockholm: UppsaJa Universitet; Almqvist & Wicksell. Vandersleyen, Claude. 1975. "Le Sens symbolique des puits funeraires dans I'Egypte andenne." edE 50, 151-57. Vandier, Jacques. 1965. "Iousaas et (Hathor)-Nebet-Hetepet, deuxieme article." RdE 17, 89- 176. te Velde, Herman . 1967. Seth, God of Confusion. Leiden: Brill. --~. 1972. "The Swallow as Herald of the Dawn in Ancient Egypt." In Ex Orbe Religionmum, Studia Geo Witlengren, ed. C. Jouco Bleeker (Lei den: Brill), 26-31 . Ventura, Raphael. 1988. "The Largest Project for a Royal Tomb in the Valley of the Kings." JEA 74, 137-56. Verner, Miroslav. 2002. The Pyramids. Cairo: American University. Vern us, Pascal. 1990. Future at Issue. Tense, Mood and Aspect in Middle Egyptian: Studies in Syntax and Semantics. New Haven: Yale University Press. --~. 1991. "Le rheme marque: typologie des emplois et effers de sens en Moyen Egyptien (Temps Second, C left Sentences et constructions apparentees dans les strategies de l'enonciateur) ." LingAeg 1,333- 55. Vikentiev, Vladimir. 1943. "Quelques mots enigmatiques dans un texte astronomique ." ASAE 43, 115- 31. van Voss, Matthieu Heerma. 1984. "Die beiden Opfergefilde als Opfertisch." In Studien zu Sprache und Religion Agyptem: zu Ehren von Woljha rt Westendoif, ed. F. Junge (Gortingen: Hubert & Co.), 805- 7. --~. 1986. "Ziegcl (magische)." In Lexikon der Agyptologie, vol. 6, ed. Wolfgang Heick and Eberhard Otto (Wiesbadcn: H arrassowin ), col. 1402. Waitkus, Wolfgang. 1987. "Zur Deutung einiger apotropaischer Gorter in den Grabern im Tal der Koniginnen und im G rabe Ramses III." GM95, 51~82. van Walsem, Rene. 1997. "The Struggle Against Chaos as a "Strange Attractor" in Ancient Egyptian Culture. A Descriptive Model for the "Chaotic" Development of Cultural Systems," in Essays on Ancient Egypt in Honour ofHerman Te Velde, ed.]. Van Dijk (Groningen' Styx), 317-42. --~. 2005. Iconography of Old Kingdom Elite Tombs. Analysis and Interpretation, Theoretical and methodological Aspects. Leuven: Peeters. Ward, William A. 1978a. Studies on Scarab Seals, vol. I. Warminster: Aris & Phillips. --~. 1978b. The Four Egyptian Homographic Roots B-3: Etymological and Egypto-Semitic Studies. Rome: Biblical Institute Press. Wegner, Josef 1995. "Somh Abydos: Burial Place of the Third Senwosret? Old and New Excavations at the Abydene Complex of Senwosret III." KMT6, 58~71. --~. 2007. "From Elephant- Mountain to Anubis- Mountain? A Theory on the Origins and Development of the Name Abdju." In The Archaeology and Art ofAncient Egypt. Essays in Honor ofDavid B. O'Connor, voL 2, ed. Zahi A. H awass and Janet Richards (Cairo, SCA), 459~7 6. --~. 2009a. "The Tomb of Senwosret III at Abydos and Considerations on the Development of the Royal Amduat-Tomb ." In Archaism and Innovation: Studies in the Culture ofMiddle Kingdom Egypt, ed. David P. Silverman, W. K. Sim pson, and Josef Wegner (New Haven; Philadelphia: Yale University Press; University of Pennsylvania Museum), 103--69. --~. 2009b. "A Decorated Birth-Brick from South Abydos: New Evidence on Childbirth and Birth Magic in the Middle kingdom." In Archaism and Innovation: Studies in the Culture ofMiddle Kingdom Egypt, ed. David P. Silverman, W. K. Simpson, and Josef Wegner (New Haven; Philadelphia: Yale University Press; University of Pennsylvania Museum), 447- 96. Wente, Edward F. 1982a. "Mysticism in Pharaonic Egypt?" jNES 41,161 - 79. --~. 1982b. "Funerary Beliefs of the Ancient Egyptians. An Interpretation of the Burials and the Texts." Expedition 24/2, 17- 26. --~. 2003a. "The Tale of the Doomed Prince." In The Literature ofAncient Egypt. 3rd ed. William Kelly Simpson (New Haven: Yale University Press), 75- 79. --~. 2003b. "The Book of the Heavenly Cow." In The Literature ofAncient Egypt. 3rd ed . William Kelly Simpson (New Haven: Yale University Press), 289~98. Westendorf, Wolfhart. 1953. "Die Wortstellung Nomen + sgmfals grammatische Konstrukrion." MIO 1, 337--43. --~. 1962. Grammatik tier medizinischen Texte. Grundriss der Medizin der alten Agypter 8. Berlin: Akademie Verlag.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

555

- - - , 1974. "Zweiheir, Dreiheir, und Einheit in def ahagyptischen TheoJogie." zAS 100, 136-41. - - - , 1999. Handbuch der a/tiigyptisch~n M~diz;n. Leiden: Brill. - - - , 2003. "Verborgene Gonheiten in den UmerweltsbGchcrn. Eine Gortionen Gruppe im Amduat," In Es wud~ niukrgelegt als Schriforuck. Festschrift forHartwig A/umii.lltr zum 65. Ceburtstag, ed. Nicole Kloth, Karl Martin, and EvaPardey (Hamburg: Helmut Buske), 471-76. Wiebach-Koepkc, Silvia. 2003. "Schen und Horen in den Schilderungen der agyptischen Umerwelt des Neuen Reiches." In Es werde niedergelegt als Schrifistiick. Festschrift for Hartwig AltemMler zum 65. Geburtstag, ed. Nicole Kloth, Karl Marcin, and Eva Pardey (Hamburg: Helmut Buske), 477-89. Wilkinson, Richard H. 1992. Reading Egyptian Art. London: 111ames & Hudson. - -- ,1993. "The Paths ofRe: Symbolism in the Royal Tombs of Wadi Biban EI Moluk." KMT4, 42- 51. - - - . 1994a. "Symbolic Location and Alignment in New Kingdom Royal Tombs and their Decoration." lARCE 31, 79-86. - - - . 1994b. Symbol and Magic in Egyptian Art. u:mdon: ~fhames & Hudson. - - - , 1995. "Symbolic Orientation and Alignment in New Kingdom Royal Tombs." In Valky ofthe Sun Kings. New Explorations in the Tombs o/the Pharaohs, ed. Richard H . Wilkinson (Tucson: University of Arizona Egyptian Expedition), 74-81. - - - . 1995. "The Motif of the Path of the Sun in Ramesside Royal Tombs: An Outline of Recem Research." lSSEA 25, 78- 84. Wittems, Hareo. 1988. Chests ofLifo: A Study ofthe Typology and Conceptual Development ofMiddle Kingdom Standard Class Coffins. Leiden: Ex Oriente Lux. Winand, Jean. 1992. Studes de nio-igyptien, 1. La morphologie verhale. Liege: CIPL. Wason, John. 1944. "Funecal Se",;ces of the Egypdan Old IGngdom." jNES 3,201-18. Wilson, Penelope. 1997. A Ptolemaic Lexicon: A Lexicographical Study ofthe Texts in the Temple of Edfo. OLA 78. Leuven: Peeters. Wisse, Frederik. 1979. "Language Mysticism in the Nag Hammadi Texts and in early Coptic Monasticism I : Cryptography." Enchoria 9,101-20. de Wit, Constant. 1951. Le role et Ie sens du lion dans l'Egypte ancienne. Leiden: Brill. Wood, Wendy. 1978. "A Reconstruction of the Relicfs of Hery-re." lARCE 15, 9-24. Worsham, Charles E. 1979. "A Reinterpretation of the So-calted Bread Loaves in Egyptian Offering Scenes." fARCE 16, 7-10. Wright, G.R.H. 1986. "The Book ofCavcrns (quererts) and Its Imagery." WO 17, 9-1 0. Zandee, Jan. 1960. Death as an Enemy, translated from the Dutch by Mrs. W. F. Klasens. Leiden: Brill, 1960. Zeidler, Jurgen. 1999. Pflrtenhuchstudien. 2 vols. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.

,

INDICES INDEX OF EGYPTIAN WORDS (SELECT TERMS AND EPITHETS)

JW, "to stretch" (verb, plus derivatives), 286-87. lmy.t, Amye. a body part of O siris. 172. ,g, "brilliance." 220, 387.

:;!J.l, "horizon" (also see General Index, "Re-Ho r-Akhti").

18,23,56,58,123, 134,138,149,152,186,198-99, 266,314,318,320-21,354-55,365,372,375,384, 440-41,443-44,446,461.

jI.t, "(burial) Mound." 99, 102-3, 110, 112, 121, 159, 171- 72, 175, 177, 235-36, 239-43, 246-47, 285, 287,33 1,333-34,349,373,379-80,385,389,450. jm, "to praise" (verb, plus derivatives). 141, 244,248,260, 387,392,404,409. jm hr, "Old of face." 180-8!. jJb(.r), "east" (also see General Index, "Direction. east"). 24, 33,71, 134, 149, 152, 172, 186, 193,207,253-54, 294,298,375,409,414,436,440,443-44. fr.l, "uraeus." 123,318,334,448. jwf, "flesh." 136,244,356,361,405,416. jwty, "rotting, to rot." 285, 380, 403, 452. jb, "heart." 179, 180,270,282,317,319,324,328,404-5, 407. jby.l, "She of the heart." 216. jmn, "to hide" (verb, plus derivatives; also see below, (',I jmn. t, and General Index, "Amaunct," "Amun," and "Amun-Re"). 6, 65, 74, 77-8, 87,108,118,123,125-

27, 154, 157-59, 170, 183-85, 191 , 198,200,202, 227,242-43,289,313-14,318,320-22,324,336, 339, 344-45, 349, 356, 360, 367, 372-73, 379, 392, 396,402,405,4 11,413,420,442,450. jmn.tj, "The Westerner." 82,170,191,358, 40!. jmn(t}.t. "the West" (also see General Index, "Direcrion,

west"). 84,177,179,206-7,211,240,250,254,266, 281, 336-37, 339-40, 346, 349, 358, 361, 363, 370, 374,375,381,396,401-2,405,407,416,436,438, 442,446. jm(t)y, "Formed one." 160, 20 I, 203. jrw, "(visible) form." 171,202-3,328,336,339-40,342, 356-58,363,367,384,389,442-43. jln, "solar disc." 6, 72, 87,118,120,123,129,165-67,198, 200,248,260,271,273,310,313,320,330,333,346, 355,359,361,365,368,371 ,382,383,385,387- 88, 394,401,416,422,427,438,444,446. jtn(y).I, "female disc." 200, 313, 320. jdb, "shore." 114-15, 156,207,347,356,362,374,377, 402,409-11,414,417-19,422,425,436,442.

'.wj, "two arms" 70, 89,109,123,138,143-45,148-49, 155, 165, 168, 170, 176, 183, 191 ,204,206,208, 216-17,260,268,281,284,310-11,313,320-21, 325,333-34,346,348-50,358,371,376,381-84, 386-87,389-92,394,399,410,419,433,440-41, 444,449. '.1 jmn.l, "Hidden Chamber." 5, 18,2 1, 118,282,284, 317,319,324,327,448. ('1(',

"to

spew, expel" (verb, plus derivatives). 126, 127,212,

216,383,394,452.

('lPP, see General Index, "Apep." ('by. "Horned one." 262. 'bw. tj, "He of the double horns." 249, 25!. 'Id.l, "chest, box." 281,283. ('m, "to swallow" (verb, plus derivatives). 172, 212, 279,

281,318,342. ('m('m, "shrewmouse." 177.249.

'it' itr,

557

"Warlike of Face." 201, 203, 204, 244, 363, 370,

431.

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

558

J;.r. w,

"Numerous of faces." 221. rq pw, "'This one who enters." 135. ('q njr, "Perfect entrance," 38, 135. ('5;

W;W;y, "He of flame." 142, 145. w;

J;.r,

"Distant of face," 18l.

113,208,381,383,394. p(;)-n-st;y, Pensheray (locality). 113, 183-84, 187.

prry, "One who emerges." 135. pr(t) '!fret), "Perfecr emergence." 38,135. pnr, "He who is' inverted." 249. psd, "to shine, illuminate" (verb, plus derivatives). 185,249, 254,276,305,314,354,375,397,409,433,446. psg.t, "Ennead." 276, 313, 336, 372, 429.

w;mmy.t, "She who roasts." 215. W3Sy, "He who venerates." 260.

wj;, "barque." 102, 115, 162, 355, 374, 402, 404, 407, 409,413-14,416,420-21,428,436,444,446. wp.ty, "He of rhe horn." 262. wps. t, "She who burns." 142, 144.

m'ng.t, "morning barque." 150,382,409,418,440,444. mwjw Nnw, 'Watery one of Nun." 146, 150.

mmj f:J, "He who is earth bound." 181.

wny, "He who hastens," 270.

mJ:tn,

wnw.t, "hour." 87, 120, 183-85, 187,201,203,224,271, 318,354-56,365,367,371,396,440,442,445-46, 448.

msw.tj, "He ofrhe birth." 197- 98. mskt.t, "evening barque." 150,382,409,418,444.

See General Index, "Mehen."

wnmy.t, "She who devours." 268-69. wnny.t, "She who shall exisc." 231-32.

wntj, Wenti (demon). 209, 383, 394. Also see p(;)-n- Wntj. wrs,

"to

awaken, spend the day" (plus derivatives). 263-65,

347,348,401,438. wh;y, "He who escapes." 160. wsr. t Jtm, "Neck of Arum." 208. wsr.t RO, "Neck ofRe." 228, 261. wdby.t, "She who burns." 214. wg'y.t, "She who judges." 139- 42.

J b;, ba-soul (also see below, b;.wj, and b;y). 28, 82, 104, 107, 109, 113- 16, 121, 123, 125, 127, 145-46, 149, 157-59,161,183,185,190,238,249,250,260,27576,279,281,284,286,288,304,307,313,317-19, 321,324, 326, 328-31, 333- 34, 336-37, 340, 34243,345,347-50,353-56,359,361-66,368,371-72, 374,380,382,384- 85,387- 90,396-97,401-3,405, 409,411-1 2,414,417-19,421-23,425,427,433, 436-38,440,442,448,450-52. b;.wj, "Double ba." 159, 160,268,321,348,383,395. b;, w-Rr, "Manifestations of Re." 5. bry, "He ofrhe ba." 175,334. bnwy, "He of rhe heron." 209. bOy.t, "She who gives birth." 210. bgsy, Begsy (minor god). 142.

o p(;)-n-Wntj, Penwenri (demon; also see below, WntJJ. 102,

mny, "He of the setpent." 175-76.

njn}. t, "She of rhe njnj-gesrure." 214. nr'wtj, "Traveler." 201.

nbj, "flame." 123,320- 21. nfry.t, "rudder." 141. nmy, "He of rhe knife." 216, 217, 344. nnw.tj, "He ofrhe oval." 197,249,251. nr.ty, "He ofrhe vulrure." 86, 209- 10. n~; ~r, "Terrible offace." 102, 113,254,322,323. nsw.t, "She ofrhe flame." 215. nsr, "flame" (noun, plus derivatives; also see S nsrsr). 142,

144, 216, 220, 254, 268, 269, 284, 322, 325 , 407. nrr ';, "Grear God." 79, l15, 117-18, 122, 126, 153, 169, 188-89, 266, 270, 273, 307-9, 312-13, 327, 333, 344, 354, 368, 372-73, 385, 392, 405-6,417.

404, 167, 321, 395,

ngry, "He who seizes." 268.

rw, "flood land." 253.

rwg,

"bond, restraint." 218.

ri!sy, "He of rhe slaughrer fish." 256. rs(y), "He who awakens, is awake." 160,263.

rklJ" "flame; to burn" (noun and verb, plus derivatives). 84, 85,213,220,221,254,322,336,340,342,387.

INDICES

559

03.tj, "He of the corpse." 159, 160. br) t;, "He who is beneath the earth," 180. hmhmy, "Roarer." 267.

s'~y.l, ~3y.l,

"She who hails." 142, 144. h3y.t, "She of lament." 143. ~3y.tj, "He oflament." 143. h3Y Ip, "Shining of head." 241, 242, 243. ~3dy, "fiery pit." 281. hW33(.I), "putrefaction." 225, 285, 380, 399, 403. ~bs, "to clothe." 450. ~bsJ, "He of the shroud." 237. /Jr, "face" (also see below, qp /Jr, ('53 I;.r. W, and nJ:13 /:lr).

75,122,155,168, 171, 172, 179, 180, 181, 182, 194, 249, 254, 263, 264, 275, 278, 308, 309, 312, 323, 33~ 34~ 348, 354, 376, 386, 391, 407, 411, 413, 438,442,449. ~r.tj, "He of the Sky." 180. f:irJ.t st. t, "She who presides over her ray." 183-84. hry.l, "oven." 161, 217, 412, 420, 421, 428. h's, "Ferocious One." 174, 176. /Jsq, "to decapitate" (verb, plus derivatives), 212,213,221,

340. bkn(w), "to praise" (verb, plus derivatives), 117- 18, 123,

161,182-83,227,311,321,330- 31,333,347,349, 363,368,372-73, 381,383-85,389,395,401,412, 424,438,450,452. (urn,

"to

annihilate, destroy" (verb, plus derivatives). 69, 90,

149, 187,202-4,206,252,255,258,277-78,284, 286-88,337,350,371,374,383,394,398,401,438.

snjy, "The Bloody One." 181, 184-85, 392, 398. sn[w, "He who weeps." 143--44. sry, "He of the ram," 262. sbm, "to be powerful" (adjective verb, plus derivatives).

164,179,348,385,407,445.

sOby. I, "She who savors." 214-15. ssm, "to guide, lead" (verb, plus derivatives). 109, 136-37,

145, 156, 185, 189- 90, 192- 93,221,226,242,310, 336,342,355- 56,358,375,395,398,402,417,442, 443. stj, "putrefaction." 380. S[3, "to tow" (verb, plus derivatives). 19, 114-15, 140--41,

360,368,375,406,409,414,418,425,433,436, 438. sg.l, "fire, Bame." 142, 181, 183-85, 187,214,216,284, 289,325,336,341,363,381,398,424,426,431.

= s nsrsr, "Lake of Fire." !O3, 140. S3SY, "He who travels." 160. r.tj, "He of the slaughter." 213. sw.t, "shadow" (also see General Index, "sunshade"). 107,

118,161,165,226-27,288,372-73,412,417.

swJ , ssp,

bfiJ, "enemy." 102, 113, 155,215,283- 84,319,324,327, 340--41, 343, 40 I, 404, 438.

Obsy. I, "She of the hacked-alit (heart)." 216. Obsw, "The hacked outChcart)." 81, 345. Ijmy, "One who is destroyed; destruction-demon" 84, 113, 218,219,351. ossy, "He of the canal-fish." 256- 57.

lj3.t, "corpse." 112, 120, 144, 155, 159, 163, 168, 172-73,

176-78,205,223,228,238,249,261-62,266-67, 270, 277, 282, 286-88, 317-19, 321, 324-25, 32829,349,354,358,364,370,381,384-85,389,391, 401 - 2,410,413,416,419-21,433,446,448.

"August lady." 235- 36.

sbby.l, "She who goes." 231.

"Bright of arm." 164. "to

receive" (verb, plus derivatives). 72, 107, 110, 118,

123,184,244--45,304,311,317,320- 21,334,342, 344,347-48,362,368,372-73,379,382,398,417, 433,440--41,445,450-5 1. ssp, "to begin." 103,360,367,374,414,436.

Ll q3S, "to bind." 218. qrr.l, "cavern." 19,69,94,99,122, 141, 155, 179,233, 270, 307-9, 312, 328, 334, 339, 342, 345, 348, 350, 356, 358, 360, 362, 367, 374-75, 383-84, 391, 394, 405,409,416-18,442. qdy, "He of (fish-like) form." 256.

560

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH ,

kljmn.t, "Bull qfthe West." 174, 176. km.t, "pupil (of the eye)." 383, 394,458. kkw(j) , "darkness." 114, 120, 125, 131, 183,201,205-6, 208,221,241-43,275,284,307,315,327,332-33, 336,338,340-42,347-48,351,353-54,356,359, 361- 62,365,366,368,378, 381,385-86,388-89, 392,396-97,401,403,411,413,417,421- 22,432, 438,443,446,448. kkw.t, "darkness." 94, 354. kty.t, "cauldron." 279, 283.

gmi;y.t, "She who sees." 68, 210.

d3.t, Dat, "Und'crworld." 18,73- 74, 138, 204, 284, 306,

422,436,438. dw], "to praise" (verb, plus derivatives). 122, 139-41, 146,

161, 164-65, 180, 189, 192-93,239,244,249,251 , 260, 267, 271, 285, 289- 91, 307- 9, 3 11- 13, 378, 387,389,402,423,438,444. dWJ.t, Duat, "Underworld" (noun, plus derivatives). 5, 68 ,

73- 74, 102, 112-13, 115, 120, 122, 123, 125, 15759,162- 63,170,174,176,192-93,252,254,260, 273,290- 91,307-9,311- 12,317, 321,328- 30,334, 336, 340, 346-49, 354, 358, 360, 367, 383, 386- 87, 390, 394, 401- 2, 414, 433, 438, 440, 442, 444-45, 556,459. dmtj, "ro unite, assemble." 205, 247, 268, 389, 444-45 . dsy, "He of the knife." 216.

twJ, "to raise, support" (verb, plus derivatives). 92, 101,

122,134,244,316,409,452. tpy, "He of the head; (human)-headed one." 207-8, 321, 381. tp R', "Head of Re." 208- 10, 228, 381. tnny. t, "She who grows old." 231.

(fb3.t, "sarcophagus." 171, 172, 177, 196,220,223,231,

235- 36,240,246,264,179,289,307,377,381,384 , 387,389,391,402- 3,410,412,419,424. (fsy.t, "She of the wailing cry." 143.

gsy.tj, "He of the wailing cry." 143. rjsr, "to be sacred" (adjective verb, plus derivatives). 102,

ai.t,

142,144,276,313

"She of the vessel." 232- 33.

INDEX OF COPTIC WORDS CITED

Ai\.€, "ro ascend" ; 383 8AI, "spirit" , 190 8AAMTT€, "goat" , 190 €pc,ylc,yl , "to have power" , 68 N- direct object construction: 286 'N- > M- phonetic interchange: 70 NOYT€, "god" , 69 NOTq, third person masculine singular independent pronoun: 71 NTWP€, "goddess" , 69 TT.l..-, TA-, N.l..-, possessed pronoun series : 113 TA TTPO, "mouth", 75

TN-, second person plural suffix pronoun; 92 TH(I), "Underworld", 73, 436 TOOY€, "sandal", 70 Wi\., "to lift up" , 383 c,yAqCWTM conjuga6on pattern, 124 c,yWTT, "to receive" , 304, 414 qCWTM versus €qCWTM , 126 2,.A.IB€, "sunshade" (also see General index, "sunshade")

, 161 21€T, "fish-trap" , 283

INDICES

INDEX OF EGYPTIAN TEXTS CITED

Volume 1 p. 76: 74 p.161:74 pp. 206-7 : 324 p. 261 : 74 p. 265 : 74 p. 268 : 74

Volume 2 p. 405, nr. 345 : 328 p. 609 : 125

Volume 3 p. 661, IU. 632 : 157 p. 668: 115 pp. 714-15: 324 p. 733 : 168,386 p. 763 : 69 pp. 794-95 : 440

BOOK OF CAVERNS (ED. PIANKOFF 1942-47)

BIFA041 p. 5-7 : 225 pI. I : 225, 282 pI. VII, 3 : 226 pl.lll, 1,3,5,8: 74 pI. V, 5 : 74 pI. VI, 2, 3, 4, 6 : 74

BIFA042 p.2: 130 p. 5 : 257 p. 16: 154,221 p. 17: 130, 256, 257 p. 20, first group, nr. 3 : 74,282 pp. 21-23: 18, 138, 273 p.23:221

pp. 26-27 : 273 p. 31 : 130 pp. 37-38 : 228 p. 46 : 130 pp. 51-52 : 254 p. 52: 254 p. 59: 44 pI. X : 282 pI. XI, 3 : 257 pI. XII, 4, 7-8 : 74 pI. XIII, 2, 4, 5, 6 : 74 pI.XIV,3:211 pI. XIV, 8-9 : 74 pI. XV, 9: 386 pI. XVI, 5 : 74 pI. XVII , 1, 2,5,8: 74 pI. XVIII, 2 : 74 pI. XX, 3, 9 : 74 pI. XXIII, 1- 2 : 74 pI. XXIV, 3-4 : 74 pI. XXVII: 147,282,221 pI. XXXVII, 6 : 74 pI. XXXVIII: 171 , 173, 228 pI. XLIII, 6 : 267 pI. XLIV, 3, 8 : 74 pI. XLVI, 2-3 : 228 pI. XLVI, 8 : J 76 pI. XLVI, 9 : 74 pI. LI : 44, 208, 254 pI. U - LIII : J 96 pI. LIII. 1 : 171 pI. LIII, 3: 176 pI. LIll, 4 : 74 pI. LX: 94 pI. LXI, 1 : 94 pI. LXII : 254 pI. LXIII, 1- 2: 209 pI. LXXI , 9 : 74 pI. LXXIII : 94 pI. LXXVI, 2 : 75 pI. LXXIX, 28, 30 : 94

BIFA043 pp. 3-4 : 237 p.4: 130

561

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH .

562

p.117,nr.12:281,283 pp. 134-35: 149 p. 146: 68, 88,'95, 96 p.149:354 . pp. 181-85: 228 pp. 201-2 : 204 pp. 202-5 : 263 p. 205 : 263 pp. 255-56: 194 pp. 289-92 : 149, 152, 199

pp. 5-6: 192 p. 14: 144 pp. 39-40 : 288 pp. 40-48 : 192 p. 45 : 153, 194 p. 47 : 152 pI. XLIII : 237 pI. XCVII, 9 : 144 pI. C, 8: 211 pI. CXXI: 4, 44,152,195, 196,288 pI. CXXII, I : 74 pI. CXLN, 8 : 193 pI. CXLIV, Hl.p, 1310: 33 pI. CXLVII, 13: 175

BOOK OF THE NIGHT (ED. ROULIN

1996)

Volume 2

BIFA045 p.98:211 p. 19 : 254 BOOK OF OVERTHROWING APEP (P. BREMNER-RHIND)

BOOK OF THE DEAD

Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter

22121-23 : 288 24/9-10 : 288

17 : 138, 144, 236 126 : 133 149: 12, 196 168 : 204 174 : 282 175b : 150 180 : 272 182 : 133

BOOK OF GATES (ED. HORNUNG

Volume 1 p. 73 : 74 p. 77: 304 p.88:211 pp. 120-21 : 120 p.197:354 pp. 199-200 : 328 pp. 235- 39 : 129 p. 265 : 117

Volume 2 pp. 29-44 : 60 pp. 54-55 : 136 p.112: 120

BOOK OF THE SOLAR-OSIRIAN UNITY (ED. DARNELL 2004); LISTING TEXT REFERENCES ONLY

1979-80)

p. 22 : 98 p. 26 (a) : 188 p. 42 (c) : 307 p. 42, n. 23 : 97 p. 42 and n. 25 : 68 pp. 43-45 : 97 p. 45: 96 p.46:172 p. 52 : 74 pp. 54-55 : 166 p. 55, n. 9G: 154 p.62, n. 120: 69,96,98,305 pp. 65-67 : 304 p. 66: 98,176 p. 66, n. 139 : 73 p. 68 : 97 p. 70: 288 p. 70,n.158: 112 pp. 80-83 : 285 p. 81 : 307

INDI CES

pp. 81-83: 307 p. 83 : 305 p. 86 : 74 pp. 108- 9, n. 339 : 98 p. 119, n. 380: 304 pp. 121-22: 109 p. 122: 108 pp. 163-66 : 283 p. 176: 108 p.177:68 p.183:112 p. 211 : 388 p. 236 (b) .nd n. 252 : 79 p.237: 65 pp. 259-60 : 79 p. 261 and n. 403: 413 p. 263, n. 410: 98 pp. 300-301 : 97 p. 312 (g): 304 pp. 426-27 : 67 p. 453 : 96 p. 458 : 369 pI. 4b: 304 pI. 4!r-c : 228 pI. 4c: 74 pI. 7.: 307 pI. 7a, 1 : 304 pI. 7b : 74, 304 pI. lOa, 1 : 304, 369 pI. lOb, 1- 4: 304 pI. lOb, 7 : 303 pI. 11., 1- 2 : 304 pI. II, 16-17: 73 pI. 13a, 2:440 pI. 13b, 4 : 440 pI. 15 : 4 pI. 21, 21, 26, 35, 46-47: 354 pI. 24, 31- 32 : 388 pI. 31 : 4

563

Volume 2 p.19Ii:252 p. 288: 211 p. 354!r-c: 209

Volume 4 p. 54d : 283 p. 114c: 252 pp. 260-61c: 144

VolumeS p. 27d: 147 p. 56.: 108 p. 165.: 276 pp. 265-68 : 208

Volume 6 pp. 3-47 : 283 p. 21k: 283 p. 140: 148 pp. 205- 8 : 208 p. 354: 276 p. 408: 283

Volume 7 p. 65, : 211 p. 201k: 209 p.202d, f:209 pp. 252-521 : 2 pp. 258.-259c : 2 pp. 418c-19: 212 pp. 453h- 54 : 138 p. 495g-k : 424

DOOMED PRINCE COFFIN TEXTS (ED. DE BUCK 1935-61)

7,10-8,14: 208

Volume 1 p. 160 : 283 pp. 378-79d : 145 pp. 382-83c: 145

KING AS SOLAR PRIEST (ED. ASSMANN 1970)

p. 17: 440, 441

564

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

LITANY OF RE (ED. HORNUNG

1975-76)

Volume 1 p. 11 , 117 p. 14,78 p. 52 , 117 pp. 109- 10,117 p. 178,272

Volume 2 pp.28- 30, 129, 152,234,292 p. 37, nr. 9- , 266 p. 53- 54 , 272 p. 55 , 129, 152,234, 292 p. 56 ,261,265 p. 58, nr. 9a , 266 p.65,261 p. 68 , 175 p. 77, nr. 291 , 170 p. 83,272 p. 99, nr. 16,247,390,445 p. 100, nr. 18, 112 p. 102, nr. 32,117 p. 112, nr. 122, 117 p. 119 , 263, 265 p. 125, nr. 245 , 268 p. 137- 38, nr. 406 , 272

§325a , 148, 163 §390b , 73 §472d , 11'2 §541 , 185 §555a, §581c , 276 §595b-L 112 §595b, 112 §596d , 112 §599d, 112 §696g' 124 §796b, 137 §812b,221 §§954- 55, 134 §1014a, 138 §1120b,411 §1146, 134 §1171a-d ,115 §1202,226 §1248a-d, 199 §1254c 112 §1376c 112 §1377c 112 §1552c 276 §1696a, 108 §2255a (AEPTS, 77) , 147

137

KRI Volume 2

p. 319,8- 9,75 INSCRIPTIONS FROM THE MAMMISI AT PHILAE (ED. JUNKER AND WINTER 1965)

p. 157,233

Volume 4 p. 6,1 ,75 p. 17,12,212

PYRAMID TEXTS

SINUHE

§5b, 73 §128b-c,134 §151a,73 §205b ,212 §268d , 282, 319 §282a , 73 §296b , 204

B,43,104

Urk.IV p. 99 , 125 p.99, 15- 16, 102 p. 306, 11 , 232 p. 2030, 9 , 127

INDICES

565

GENERAL INDEX

A

Book of the Day. 3, 6, 25, 39, 45,133, 142, 165,460.

Abydos. 3, 9- 11,15, 19,20- 22,27- 29,32,57-58,65,81,

Book of the Earth, passim. Book of the Fayyum. 142,209.

Book of the Dead, see Index of Egyptian Texts cited.

94,96, 102, 113, 117, 178,233,236,263,276,303, 455,471. Ahmose. 19,21 - 23,30. Akephalos. 246. Aker (also see "Book at Aker"). 5, 9, 11, 18,38-40,43,45, 48- 51, 53- 54, 58, 63, 90, 102, 120, 122, 130, 13239, 142- 66, 186, 193- 95, 200, 224- 25, 234, 236, 239-40, 253, 256-58, 266, 271- 73, 289- 90, 295, 298- 99 , 305, 315, 350, 353-55, 359, 374-75, 405, 417,423,426,430,432,435,446, 455-56,461-62. Akhenaten. 16, 18,24.

Book of the Night (also see Index of Egyptian Texts cited). 6,

28,30,31,37,45,170,263,301,460. Book at Nut. 6, 28, 30, 31, 37, 79, 95,105,106,211,460. Book of the Solar-Osirian Unity, see Index of Egyptian texts cited. Book of Two Ways (also see Index of Egyptian Texts cited,

"Coffin Texts, volume 7"). 2, 56,134,138,175,187,

188,222,460. Books of the Sky (also see "Book of Nut," "Book of the Day," "Book of Night"). 3, 6-7, 28, 30, 36, 39, 42, 45,

56-57,455,459- 60.

Akher, see "horizon."

Amarna. 16-18,22, 24, 169,457. Amaunet. 200, 313, 320.

Brick, birth. 58, 59. Brick, magical. 23- 25, 58.

Amduat, see "Book of Amduat."

Amenhotep II. 19,23,26,29,35, 105,222. Amenhotep III. 22- 23, 93. Amun (also see "Amun-Re"). 4, 45, 50, 52, 166-67, 175,

186,272,410,412. Amun-Re. 47, 186,187,407,410,412. Anubis. 104, 171, 178,228,239,281- 83,296. Apep. 67, 145, 178- 79,209,211 - 12,234,286- 88,322, 348- 49,406-7 ,451.

c Cartonnage, see "Pectoral" Catfish, see "Fish, catfish"

Cenotaph. 9- 12, 15, 19, 21, 27, 28- 32, 34, 36-39, 43,

57,65,68,73,80,86,94-98,102,104-5,113,117, 135, 179, 194,235-36,263,285,293,303- 7,354, 400,403,437,446,455,457, 460,464- 66,471,511 13.

Apotropaia, see "Knife, apotropaic."

Astronomical ceiling. 6, 30, 34, 35, 42, 56, 57, 59, 208,

455.

Coffin Texts, see Index of Egyptian texts cited.

Concluding tepresentation (SchluJfbild). 19,21,26,33,39,

43, 47, 49, 53, 56, 58, 148-49, 152- 53, 159, 166, 192- 96, 199-201, 266, 272- 73, 293- 94, 298-99, 408,417,432,455-56,460-61.

Aten, see Index of Egyptian words, jtn. Atenet, see Index of Egyprian words,jtn(y).l. Arum (also see Index of Egyptian words, wsr.t JIm). 129,

133, 136-38, 145, 152, 167, 170- 71, 174, 178- 79, 191- 92, 199,208-11,218- 19,228, 268-69, 276, 283,347,349,369,382,384,295.

Coptic (language), see Index of Coptic words cited.

Cosmography. 2, 20, 56, 59,459,460. Creation of the Solat Disc. 5,6,49,74, 198- 202,204- 6. Crocodile. 113, 156, 174, 176, 207- 9, 211- 12, 254, 256-

B

57,382

Barque, see Index of Egyptian words, wj;, m('ng.t, and

mskt.t. Bes. 246. Book of Aker, 5- 6,11- 12,39,48-49,53,152,161 ,1 86,

236,240,282,295,298,455. Book of Amduat, see Index of Egyptian Texts cited. Book of Caverns, see Index of Egyptian Texts cited. Book of Gates, see Index of Egyptian Texts cited.

Crown, Atef. 152,271. Crown, Red. 95, 254. Crown, White. 240, 267, 271, 282, 287. Cryptography, see "Script, Cryptographic."

D Damned, the. 3, 67,130,187,204,208,212-19,228,230,

245-46,252,255,279-81,283- 84.

566

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

Dat, see Index of Egyptian words, d3.t Decapitation. 212~14, 221, 283~84, 327. Demon, apotropaic. 36, 153,475. Demotic (language). 68, 113, 124,304. Direction, east (also see index of Egyptian words,j3b(.t». 3, ch. 2 passim, 71, 77, 130, 134, 138, 149, 152~ 53, 161, 164-65, 1n~7 3, 185 ~87, 193,200, 204, 206~7, 253~55, 266, 271, 293~94, 298 ~9 9, 275, 456, 460~ 61,493,497. Direction, north. ch. 2 passim, 158,208,233,289,432. Direction, south. ch. 2 passim, 152, 158, 173,233,417. Direction, west (also see Index of Egyptian words, jmn.tj andjmn(t).t). ch. 2 passim, 65, 84, 94,113,130,134, 138, 141, 149, 152~53, 164~65, 1n~74, 176, 177, 179,186-87,200,206-7,211,240,250,254,266, 271, 273, 281~82, 286-87, 294, 298~99, 303, 456, 460~61, 471, 503. Disc, see Index of Egyprian words,jtn andjtn.t. Djedkhonsuiusankh. 10, 14, 49, 103, ch. 5 passim, 404, 456, 461, 488~89. Duamutef, see "Sons of Horus."

Heka. 136-37. Hieratic, see "Script, Hieratic."

Hotemheb. 4, i 6~ 17, 22~25. Horira"a. 10,39,47,54,68,139,141, 145, 148~51, 282, 295, 29 7~9 9,436-39,456,462,464-66, 503. Horizon, see ]n dex of Egyptian words, ,!J. t . Horus (also sc:e and "Horus of the Duat," "Re-Hor-Akhti,"

and "Sons of Horus"). 4, 96, 124, 130, 136-37, 139, 141, 15 l , 166, 170~73, 176-79, 189~91, 209, 226, 228~29,234,246,251,254,263,279, 330. Horus of the Duat.157~ 59, 161~64, 174, 176, 178,347. Hydta.221-22.

I Ibi. 9, 253, 293. Ichneumon mo ngoose. 177,234,252,257,279. Imsety, see "S on s of Horus."

Isis. 25, 59, 6 1. 134, 144, 150, 156, 162, 164~65, 168~69 , 171 ~73, l76, 178,233,246,256,266,271,282,328, 332, 440-4 1.

Duar, sec Index of Egyptian words, dW3.t.

Israel stela. 2 12.

E

Irhyphallic. l 64, 170, 183, 237,245-46, 254, 273.

East, see "Direction, east."

K

185~87, 199~200,

204, 223,

Enigmatic Netherworld Book, see Index of Egyptian Texts, "Book of the Solar-Osirian Unity." Evening barque, see Index of Egyptian words, mskt.t.

Khepri. 70~71 . 92,112,129,133,136-41, 145, 151 ~52, 174-79, 190~91, 221 ~22, 234~35, 238 ~39, 269, 275~76 , 2 82,333,339,346,349,371,440-41.

Excrement. 214.

F Fish, catfish. 177,228, 256-58,

451 ~ 52.

Fish, general, see Index of Egyptian words,

rosy, ljssy, and

Khonsumes. lO, 14,39, 47, 49 ~50, 54, 78, 92,101, 105, Chapter 5 passim, 408, 410, 412, 415, 418~20, 428, 456,490. Kilt. 134, 148-49, 159, 186, 203, 206, 213, 219, 223, 228, 239,251. Knife, aporropaic (also see Index of Egyptian words,

qdy. Fish, Oxythynchus. 66, In. Fundamentals of the Courses of the Stars, see "Book of Nut."

nm and

ds). 137, 1 53~ 54, 234, 508. Kryptograph, see Index of Egyptian texts cited, "Book of the Solar-Osjrian Unity."

G L Gautsushen. 153,271,273,282,508. Geb. 5,44,138,143-44, 177, 281~82, 286-87, 411, 420. Great God, see Index of Egyptian words,

nlr r3.

H Hapy, see "Sons of Horus."

Hathor.

58~59,

144, 156,223,268,269,420.

Hathors, seven. 172.

Late Egyptian (l anguage and orthography). 65, 70-71, 8485,95, 10 1, 103, 116, 126, 128,208,340,414,436, 458. Late period. 5, 8~9, 11,23,26-27,29,36, 59, 60~61, 63, 66-67, 76-79,97,135,137,1 41,148, 165, 167~169, In, 186, 201, 203, 211, 224, 236, 245, 257, 263, 359,4 47~ 50,456~57,459,461~62.

Lion, double , see ''Aker.''

INDICES

Litany of Re, see Index of Egyptian texts cited, "Litany of

Re. "

567

o

Magical knife, see "knife, aporropaic."

Old Egyptian (language, orthography). 65, 66, 67, 68, 70, 74,85,88,89,90,101,112-13,116,124,126,128, 452,458. Old Kingdom. 2, 6, 15, 18,23,56, 105, 138, 147, 150, 151,169,208,214,226,230,234,282,283,460. Opet (goddess) . 139-42.

Magical wand, see "knife, apotropaic."

Orientation (also see "Direction").

Mohon. 137, 179, 180, 182, 184-87,346. Memphite Theology. 105. Me retsegcr. 156. Merneptah. 9, 10, 12, 15- 16,24,25,27-28,30,32-36, 38-40,43,56-57,59,62,75, ch. 5 passim, 307, 46466. Merneptah template. 32, 33, 36, 130, 193,266,272,293, 294,299,455,460. Middle Egyptian (language and otthography). 65, 68, 70, 80,84,86,91,101, 103,108,112-13,115,124,126, 340,361,458. Middle Kingdom. 2, 3, 18,19,21-24,30,36,38,56,58, 68,70- 71, 74, 80, 105, 113, 137-38, 144, 153-54, 192, 212,234, 236,269,278,457,459,460-61,508.

Orion. 230, 238, 239, 353.

M Ma'at. 41,169,2 18,238,332,338,346. Magical brick, see "brick, magicaJ."

Mongoose, see "Ichneumon." Morning barque, see Index of Egyptian words,

Osiris (also see "Re-Osiris" and "Sokar-Os iris"), passim. Osiris tomb. 19.

Osorkon II. 9-11, 27, 39, 45, 47,50,72,76,78,87, 102, 11 2,20 1,203,205-7,241-43,416-17,456-57,461, 464-66,491-92. Ouroboros. 200, 221-23, 313. Oxyrhynchus, see "Fish, Oxyrhynchus."

p Padihorresnet. 9-11, 50-52, 247, 251 - 52, 274-76, 45657,462, 464-66. Padineith. 10-1 1, 13- 14,33,49,51 -54,72, ch. 5 passim, 424,432-33,435,456,461,464-66,500- 502,scene

m('ng.t .

Mutilation of hieroglyphs. 289 .

Mutirdis. 10- 11,28,39,47,49-50,5 1-53, ch. 5 passim, 427,430,456,46 1-62,464-66,497-99. Mythological Papyri (also see "Djedkhonsuiusankh ." "Gauc-

sushen," and "Khonsumes"). 8-9, 45, 47, 153, 404, 456,461.

N Nakhrncbef. 10, 14,61, 63,103,145, 147-50,152,15657, 165, 173, 295, 297- 99, 440-4 1, 456-58, 462, 464-66, 505.

5 color plate (bo nom).

Pectoral. 9,10,148,185,186,266,462,504. Pedamenopet. 10, 11,33,39,47,49,50,51,52,53,54,61, ch. 5 passim, 417, 420, 423, 424, 426, 430, 432, 435, 456,461,464-66,493-96, scene 5 colo r plate (top). Perpetuum mobile. 56-57,148, 151,152,461. Persian period. 54,6 1,79.

Proclitic pronoun (sw srIm./' etc.). 84, 88, 102, 105- 11 , 127,302,359,373,424,450,458. Ptolemaic period. 19,61, 93, 95, 221, 233, 239, 283, 458, 462. Ptolemaic hieroglyphs, see "Scripr, Prolemaic." Pyramid Texrs, see Index of Egyprian texts cited.

Nectanebid period, see "Persian period."

Nephthys. 25, 61 , 134,1 50,162,164-65,168-69, 17173,246,256, 266,271 , 282,440-4 1. New Kingdom, passim. North, see "Direction , norm." Nun (also see Index of Egyptian words, mwjw Nnw), 19,

29,39-40,134, 140-41,145-50, 152,154, 197, 199, 204, 232-34, 258, 268-69, 275-76, 317, 369-70, 374,376,405,409,418,432-34,440-41. Nut (also see "Book of Nut"). 3, 6, 25, 30, 40, 42, 44-45, 59,148,154,159-61, 173, 176, 178, 194, 196, 199, 208,210- 12,252,254-56,268,274,3 10-1 1,369, 383-84,395,402,44 1,445,460-61.

R Ramesses II. 16,22,23,24, 25,29, 34, 57, 178,266. Ramesses III. 4, 6, 8- 12, 15- 16, 23, 25, 32-36, 38-42, 44,50,56,59,60-63,70,72,75,79,94, 128, ch. 5 passim, 310-11, 313-14, 447-51, 455, 456, 458, 460, 464-66,474-75. Ramesses IV. 6-7, 10, 15-17,25,30,36-37,40,42-43, 45,59,60- 62,70,75,77-78,90, ch. 5,passim, 315, 447-5 1,456,464-66,476. Ramesses V I, passim.

Ramesses VII. 6-8,10- 11,13, 15,37,42-44,57-59,66,

568

THE ANCIENT EGYPTIAN BOOKS OF THE EARTH

68,73,75,79,104,117,119, ch. 5 passim, 301, 383, 449-50,459-60,464-66,48 1-82. Ramesses IX. 4, 8, 10- 13, 15, 28, 37, 39, 43--45, 58, 59, 66-68,74,76- 80, 86, 90, 94, 102, 113, 119, 123, 127, ch. 5 passim, 302, 306, 384, 389-91, 395-98, 402-3,437,450,457-58,460-61,464-66,483-85, 521,535. Re (also see "Re-Hor-Akhti," "Re-Osiris," and Index of

Egyptian words, wsr. t R(' and tp Rr'), passim. Re-Hor-Akhti. 70, 276, 407. Re-Osiris. 31, 75, 77, 129, 134, 138-39, 154, 161, 185,

195,223,247, 249,253,255,269-74,322,390,427, 445. Roman period. 8, 59, 61, 63, 69,134,142,201, 209, 233, 245,257,279,283,455,457,462. Rosetau. 188,208.

s Saite Period. 9-11, 29, 43, 49-50, 52, 54, 60-61, 68, 69,

101-2,116,144,148,164, 168, 176, 195,200,224, 227,232,253,289,295,298-99,450,456,461. Saqqara. 2, 9-10, 47, 54-55, 67, 74, 129, 230,236,462, 503. Scarab (also see "Khcpri" and "Scarab, ram -headed"). 49. 71,95, 122, 129, 134, 137, 142, 150, 153-54, 173, 175-78, 191, 194, 197-98,222-23,234,252,254, 276, 330,406,440,459. Scarab, ram-headed. 151-53, 186, 193-95. Schiuffbild. see "Concluding Representation." Script, Cryptographic. 11, 65-66, 68, 73, 74, 80, 86-89, 91,93-99,113,117,172,235,301-7,413. Script, Hieratic. 4, 65-67, 69, 74-80, 85-86, 90, 94, 9597,107, 111- 12,116-17, 120,158,167,177,182, 186,210,222,310,315,319,324-25,330-31,333, 336, 339, 343, 347, 353-54, 356, 358, 366-68, 370, 372-74,381,384,387,392,394,396-99,402,404, 412,416,424,449,458,485-87,521,535. Script, Ptolemaic. 70, 79, 87, 88, 91, 93, 95,172,334,336, 404,458. Selket. 238, 239. Semen. 187, 199,269. Senwosret II. 3, 18, 19,22, 154. Scnwosret III. 3,18,19,20,21,22,30,138,153,154. Seth. 147,212,222,359. Shrewmouse. see In dex of Egyptian wo rds, ('m('m. Shu. 148, 177-79, 199,275-76,349,375,426. Sia. 136-37,283,319. Siptah. 9, 34-35, 59- 61, 253, 255, 265-66. Sokar (also see "Sokar-Osiris"). 18, 19, 22, 23, 138, 153,

188,252,296 Sokar-Osiris. 20, 166. Sons of Hor~s. 221, 230-32. South, see "D.irccdo n, south."

Stars, field of (ce iling motif). 47--48, 55, 57. Stars, general. 11 , 15,56,73,75, 141, 162, 179, 185-87,

190,195, 199- 200,224,253,270-71,320, 364-65, 384,413. Stars , unwearying. 115.406. Sunshade (also see Index of Egyprian words, sw. t, and Index of Coptic words, f"'K€). 68,130,159,161,165,166,

167, 168, 169, 195, 224, 225, 226, 227, 283, 383, 390.

sw s4m=J, see "Procliric Pronoun ,"

T Tanis. 9, 10,27,34,45,47,263,461, 491-92. Tatenen. 5, 145, 147, 149, 197, 198,286,287,370,374. Tawosret. 6, 9, 10, 12, 15,32-36,38,40, 56, 59-60, ch. 5

passim, 308, 455, 460, 464-66, 472-73. Tefnut. 159-61, 176, 178, 199,239,275-76,369,446. Thebes. 9, 19,29,32,45,52,67,84, 186, 263, 272, 461. Thoth. 104, 133-34,237,239,262,292,385. Thutmose III. 4,16,19,21,22,23,26,102,105,124. Tjahorpta. 10,28,39,61,63,120, 135,137,224,442--43,

446--47,456-57,462,464-66. Tutankhamun. 4, 12, 15, 16, 22-24, 31, 66, 72,129,201,

204,223,228,231,233,263,282-83,285,305,307, 403,440,457.

u Underworld, see Index of Egyptian words, dl.l and dWl.t. U raeus (also see Index of Egyptian words,fr.t). 137, \42,

144--45, 166,189-9 1,211,588.

w Wand, see "Knife. apO[ropaic." Werethekau. 42, 43, 145. West, see "Direction, west."

Scene 5 (Aim Group 3). Top: righr half, comb ofPedamenoper (TT 33). Bo((om: lefr half, comb of Padineirh (TT 197).